R
TM120
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
Optimizer Planning in SAP
Transportation Management
.
.
PARTICIPANT HANDBOOK
INSTRUCTOR-LED TRAINING
.
Course Version: 16
Course Duration: 2 Day(s)
Material Number: 50131927
SAP Copyrights and Trademarks
© 2015 SAP SE. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose
without the express permission of SAP SE. The information contained herein may be
changed without prior notice.
●
Microsoft, Windows, Excel, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, System i, System i5, System p, System p5, System
ME
●
R
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary
software components of other software vendors.
x, System z, System z10, System z9, z10, z9, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, eServer,
z/VM, z/OS, i5/OS, S/390, OS/390, OS/400, AS/400, S/390 Parallel Enterprise
Server, PowerVM, Power Architecture, POWER6+, POWER6, POWER5+, POWER5,
POWER, OpenPower, PowerPC, BatchPipes, BladeCenter, System Storage, GPFS,
US
TO
HACMP, RETAIN, DB2 Connect, RACF, Redbooks, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA,
AIX, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or
registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.
●
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.
●
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are either trademarks or
registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation
●
UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group.
●
Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin
RC
●
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.
HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World
FO
●
Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
●
Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
●
JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for
LY
technology invented and implemented by Netscape.
●
SAP, R/3, SAP NetWeaver, Duet, PartnerEdge, ByDesign, SAP BusinessObjects
Explorer, StreamWork, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well
as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE in
ON
Germany and other countries.
●
Business Objects and the Business Objects logo, BusinessObjects, Crystal Reports,
Crystal Decisions, Web Intelligence, Xcelsius, and other Business Objects products and
services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd. Business Objects is an SAP
company.
●
Sybase and Adaptive Server, iAnywhere, Sybase 365, SQL Anywhere, and other Sybase
products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Sybase, Inc. Sybase is an SAP company.
All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective
companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National
product specifications may vary.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials are provided by SAP SE
and its affiliated companies ("SAP Group") for informational purposes only, without
representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or
omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP Group products and
services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such
products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional
warranty.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
iii
R
ME
US
TO
FO
RC
LY
ON
iv
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Typographic Conventions
American English is the standard used in this handbook.
The following typographic conventions are also used.
R
This information is displayed in the instructor’s presentation
ME
Demonstration
Warning or Caution
Hint
Facilitated Discussion
FO
User interface control
RC
Related or Additional Information
US
TO
Procedure
Example text
ON
LY
Window title
Example text
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
v
R
ME
US
TO
FO
RC
LY
ON
vi
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Contents
xi
Course Overview
1
Unit 1:
Lesson: Describing Optimizer Planning
Lesson: Applying Optimizer Planning Settings
Exercise 1: Create Planning Cost Settings
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
Exercise 2: Execute Optimization to Determine Means of
Transport
Exercise 3: Determine Optimizer Run Results Using Planning
Costs
Exercise 4: Apply Cost Functions to Influence Optimizer Results
Lesson: Applying Short-Cut Planning
Exercise 5: Maintain Integration Settings for Short-Cut Planning
Exercise 6: Maintain Configuration and Execute Short-cut
Planning
Lesson: Creating Pooled Shipments
Exercise 7: Create a Transportation Network to Support Pooled
Distribution
Exercise 8: Create Pooled Freight Orders
ME
R
3
6
9
17
19
31
US
TO
41
46
49
57
85
86
89
Unit 2:
Optimizer Applications
Lesson: Creating a Transportation Proposal
Exercise 9: Plan a Freight Order Using a Transportation
Proposal
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
Exercise 10: Create a Vehicle for Load Optimization
Exercise 11: Create Freight Units for Load Optimization
Exercise 12: Maintain Load Planning Settings
Exercise 13: Perform and Analyze Load Planning
LY
92
97
103
111
117
FO
RC
62
67
75
Optimizer Planning
127
ON
128
133
139
143
Unit 3:
Advanced Transportation Network
Lesson: Creating Schedules
Exercise 14: Create a Carrier Schedule
Exercise 15: Generate Departures
Lesson: Analyzing the Results of the Path Finder
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
vii
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
Exercise 16: Create Passive Vehicle Resources
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle
Resources
Exercise 17: Create Transportation Units
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with the Optimizer
Lesson: Planning Transportation with Container Units
Exercise 18: Create Container Units
167
179
182
189
197
Unit 5:
Lesson: Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
Exercise 19: Execute Carrier Selection
Lesson: Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
Exercise 20: Configure Carrier Selection
Lesson: Using Allocations
Exercise 21: Perform Carrier Selection based on Transportation
Allocations
Lesson: Using Business Shares
Exercise 22: Perform Carrier Selection Based on Business
Shares
Lesson: Improving Carrier Utilization
US
TO
198
205
211
217
223
229
236
241
247
254
261
269
275
284
301
Unit 6:
Freight Tendering
Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process
Exercise 23: Tender a Freight Order
Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan
Exercise 24: Create a Tendering Profile
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
FO
253
Carrier Selection
ME
148
153
164
Transportation Unit Planning
R
Unit 4:
RC
147
Unit 7:
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders
LY
302
Freight Orders in Transportation Management
311
ON
312
319
324
327
334
Unit 8:
viii
Freight Order Setup
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Types
Exercise 25: Create Freight Order Types
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Type Determination
Exercise 26: Determine Freight Order Types
Lesson: Determining Business Partners
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 9:
387
Lesson: Integrating Freight Orders with Shipments
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
Exercise 27: Create Freight Order-Based Shipments
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
Lesson: Communicating Freight Orders to Other Companies
Unit 10:
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
Exercise 28: Monitor Freight Order Events
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for
Transportation Visibility
Lesson: Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
Exercise 29: Monitor Events in the Collaboration Portal
ME
388
397
404
414
419
425
Transportation Event Monitoring
R
346
350
355
367
380
Freight Order Integration
Unit 11:
US
TO
345
Transportation Execution
426
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Output
435
Exercise 30: Configure Settings to Enable Printing of Freight
Order Documents
Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
Exercise 31: Process a Freight Order with Discrepancies
471
Unit 12:
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM based on Shipments
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM Based on Deliveries
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
Exercise 32: Receive Goods in Transit Warehouse
ON
LY
FO
472
481
489
497
Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
RC
444
455
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
ix
R
ME
US
TO
FO
RC
LY
ON
x
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Course Overview
Application Consultant
●
Business Process Architect
●
Business Process Owner/Team Lead/Power User
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
●
R
TARGET AUDIENCE
This course is intended for the following audiences:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
xi
R
ME
US
TO
FO
RC
LY
ON
xii
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
UNIT 1
Optimizer Planning
R
Lesson 1
3
Lesson 2
6
9
US
TO
Applying Optimizer Planning Settings
Exercise 1: Create Planning Cost Settings
ME
Describing Optimizer Planning
Lesson 3
Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
Exercise 2: Execute Optimization to Determine Means of Transport
Exercise 3: Determine Optimizer Run Results Using Planning Costs
Exercise 4: Apply Cost Functions to Influence Optimizer Results
FO
RC
Lesson 4
17
19
31
41
Applying Short-Cut Planning
Exercise 5: Maintain Integration Settings for Short-Cut Planning
Exercise 6: Maintain Configuration and Execute Short-cut Planning
46
49
57
Lesson 5
62
67
75
LY
Creating Pooled Shipments
Exercise 7: Create a Transportation Network to Support Pooled Distribution
Exercise 8: Create Pooled Freight Orders
ON
UNIT OBJECTIVES
●
Describe optimizer planning
●
Create planning cost settings
●
Execute planning to determine the means of transport
●
Execute planning to consolidate deliveries
●
Execute planning to enforce minimum shipping requirements
●
Describe short-cut planning
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
1
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Maintain integration settings for short-cut planning
●
Maintain configuration and execute short-cut planning
●
Model the transportation network for pooled shipments
●
Create pooled freight orders
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
2
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Lesson 1
Describing Optimizer Planning
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Describe optimizer planning
ON
LY
FO
RC
Route Optimization
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson examines how the vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer considers
routes and locations in transportation planning to minimize costs and operate within
constraints.
Figure 1: SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) Document Flow
The vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer considers routing and the sequence in
which resources arrive at certain locations. The VSR optimizer also considers the scheduling
of tasks that are running in parallel. It evaluates potential changes to the routing and the
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
3
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
effect such changes have on scheduling, helping to avoid the possibility of delayed deliveries
and follow-on costs.
Mathematical Model
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
The goal of the optimizer is to assign tasks to vehicles and determine the route and sequence
of tasks per vehicle so that all constraints are met and total costs are minimized. The
optimizer achieves this goal by evolutionary local search, a population-based meta-heuristic
that borrows selection principles from evolutionary algorithms and relies heavily on local
optimization.
Figure 2: Mathematical Model
A more concrete example of the workings of the optimizer is its handling of potential date
changes, which it handles by applying each date change to all tasks on the affected resource
or dependent tasks on any other resources to derive the most appropriate choice. The
consideration of several aspects in parallel is repeated for other variables, such as
transshipment locations, and is necessary to create effective plans or to make improvements
to existing plans.
Costs and Constraints
LY
The total cost, which the optimizer is designed to minimize, is a weighted sum of the following
items:
Non-delivery/execution penalty (per freight unit (FU))
●
Earliness and lateness penalty (per FU)
ON
●
4
●
Fixed cost (per vehicle or tour)
●
Travel-dependent costs (per vehicle), for example, distance and duration.
●
Load-dependent costs (per vehicle and tour)
●
Sustainability costs such as CO2 emissions (from SAP TM 8.0 by BAdI)
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Describing Optimizer Planning
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Describe optimizer planning
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
5
Unit 1
Lesson 2
Applying Optimizer Planning Settings
●
Create planning cost settings
Optimization Costs
US
TO
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, we examine the use of optimization costs in the planning process. You learn
about the different kinds of planning costs that the vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR)
optimizer uses in an optimization run.
Fixed costs are calculated once by the system for each capacity used in the VSR optimization
run. Capacities include vehicle resources and schedules. For schedules, the fixed costs are
incurred per departure.
FO
RC
In addition to fixed costs, other variable costs can be applied. The following are the variable
transportation costs per unit for the following dimensions:
●
Duration
●
Distance
●
Transported quantity per distance
●
Intermediate stop
These costs refer to the use of the dimensions of a capacity, including empty runs, during the
VSR optimization run.
Duration and Distance Costs
LY
You can define the costs per duration for each VSR optimization run. You can also define a
maximum value and a unit. The unit refers to both the costs and the maximum value. If you do
not specify a unit, the system measures duration in seconds.
ON
You can define the costs per distance for each VSR optimization run. You can also define a
maximum value and a unit. The unit refers to both the costs and the maximum value. If you do
not specify a unit, the system measures distance in kilometers. You can also specify the cost
basis. This determines if the system uses the costs per distance from the costs per distance
field in the planning profile or from the transportation lane. Alternatively, you can specify that
the system is to take the sum of both values into account.
Transported Quantity per Distance and Intermediate Stop Costs
You can define the costs per quantity for each VSR optimization run. You must also define a
unit. You cannot define a maximum value for the costs per quantity. However, you can specify
if the system is to use the costs per quantity from the transportation lane or from the costs
per quantity specified in the planning profile.
6
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Applying Optimizer Planning Settings
US
TO
ME
R
For costs per quantity from the transportation lane, you can specify if the system is to
calculate the costs in a distance-independent way or if it is to multiply them by the distance.
Figure 3: Quantity and Distance
RC
For costs per quantity from the planning costs, you can specify if the system is to calculate
the costs in a distance-independent way per transportation lane or if it is to multiply them by
the distance. The system determines the costs per stage if costs are calculated in a distanceindependent way. You are not allowed to define a unit. If multiplying by the distance, the
system uses the fixed value that you have defined in the costs per quantity field.
You can define the maximum number of intermediate stops and the costs per additional stop.
ON
LY
FO
Route-based Versus Destination-based Cost
Figure 4: Route-based Versus Destination-based Cost
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
7
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
The figure, Route-based Versus Destination-based Cost, illustrates the route-based and
destination-based costs as follows:
●
Destination-based cost:
-
Freight order (A → B → C) = Distance (A → B → C) * Cost (A → C) = 300 * 1.5 = $450.
-
Freight order (A → C → B)
= Distance (A → C → B) * Cost (A → B) = 250 * 1.9 = $475.
-
-
R
Route-based cost:
Freight order (A → B → C) = Distance (A → B) * Cost (A → B) + Distance (B → C) *
Cost (B → C) = 200 * 1.9 + 100 * 1.8 = $560.
ME
●
Freight order (A → C → B) = Distance (A → C) * Cost (A → C) + Distance (C → B) *
Cost (C → B) = 150 * 1.5 + 100 * 1.8 = $405.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
Route-based and destination-based distance costs can yield different results. In North
America, destination-based distance cost calculation is used frequently, whereas in Europe,
route-based distance costs are primarily used.
8
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Exercise 1
Create Planning Cost Settings
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create a planning profile to be used
during transportation planning.
US
TO
Note:
In all exercises, when the values include ##, replace the characters, ##, with the
group number that your instructor has assigned to you.
This exercise requires you to use sales orders, that are created by the instructor in
SAP ERP.
In this exercise, you create the planning profile, TM211_PLAN_##, that is required
for one or more subsequent exercises on this course.
FO
RC
1. Create a planning profile by copying planning profile TM200_PLAN to your own profile
TM211_PLAN_##. Use the data in the following table:
Table 1: Planning Profile
Field
Value
Planning Profile
TM211_PLAN_##
Description
Planning Profile for Group ##.
2. In the Profile Assignments screen area, delete the entry in the Selection Profile for Freight
Orders field, and replace the entry in the Capacity Selection Settings field with CAPA-99.
LY
3. Create planning cost settings TM211_COST_## with the following values, and assign them
to your planning profile TM211_PLAN_##:
ON
Table 2: Planning Cost Settings
Field
Value
Planning Costs Settings
TM211_COST_##
Description
Planning Cost Setting for Group
##
Earliness/Delay Costs Basis
Earliness/Delay Costs Defined in Planning
Costs
Costs for Non-Delivery
999,999,999.00 (if not already defined)
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
9
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Field
Value
Costs for Earliness per Day
24,00
Costs for Lateness per Day
24,00
Currency
USD
R
4. In the Means-of-Transport Settings screen area, create two lines for MOT FTL-99 and
LTL-99 using the following data:
Value
Means of Transport
FTL-99
Consider Distance Cost from Planning Cost
Settings
Yes
Consider Distance Cost from Transportation Lane
No
Fixed Costs
1
Means of Transport
US
TO
Field
ME
Table 3: Means-of-Transport Settings 1
LTL-99
Yes
Consider Distance Cost from Transportation Lane
No
Fixed Costs
1
FO
RC
Consider Distance Cost from Planning Cost
Settings
5. Select the FTL-99 line. This opens two new tabs. Enter the following data in the Means-ofTransport Setting Details tab:
Table 4: Means-of-Transport Settings 2
Value
Premature Pick-Up
1,0
Delayed Pick-Up
1,0
Premature Delivery
1,0
Delayed Delivery
1,0
Basis for Quantity Costs
No Costs
Costs per Additional Intermed. Stop
50
Maximum Number of Stops
4
Distance Cost Basis from Lane
Route-based
Costs per Distance Unit
0,3
ON
LY
Field
10
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Applying Optimizer Planning Settings
6. Select the LTL-99 line. In the Means-of-Transport Setting Details tab, enter the following
data:
Table 5: Means-of-Transport Settings 3
Value
Premature Pick-Up
1,0
Delayed Pick-Up
1,0
Premature Delivery
1,0
Delayed Delivery
1,0
Basis for Quantity Costs
Planning Costs: Distance Independent
Maximum Number of Stops
1
Distance Cost Basis from Lane
Route-based
Costs per Quantity
0,01
ME
US
TO
Unit of Measure
R
Field
LB
7. Assign your capacity selection profile and planning cost settings to your planning profile.
Use the following data:
Table 6: Planning Profile Details
Field
Value
TM211_PLAN_##
RC
Planning Profile
TM211_COST_##
ON
LY
FO
Planning Cost Settings
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
11
Unit 1
Solution 1
Create Planning Cost Settings
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create a planning profile to be used
during transportation planning.
US
TO
Note:
In all exercises, when the values include ##, replace the characters, ##, with the
group number that your instructor has assigned to you.
This exercise requires you to use sales orders, that are created by the instructor in
SAP ERP.
In this exercise, you create the planning profile, TM211_PLAN_##, that is required
for one or more subsequent exercises on this course.
FO
RC
1. Create a planning profile by copying planning profile TM200_PLAN to your own profile
TM211_PLAN_##. Use the data in the following table:
Table 1: Planning Profile
Field
Value
Planning Profile
TM211_PLAN_##
Description
Planning Profile for Group ##.
a) In NWBC, choose Application Administration → Planning → Planning Profiles →
Display Planning Profile.
LY
b) Enter TM200_PLAN, and choose Continue.
c) Choose
(Copy).
ON
d) On the Planning Profile tab, in the Planning Profile field, enter the data in the Planning
Profile table.
2. In the Profile Assignments screen area, delete the entry in the Selection Profile for Freight
Orders field, and replace the entry in the Capacity Selection Settings field with CAPA-99.
a) In the Selection Profile for Freight Orders field, delete the entry FOR_3100_00.
b) In the Capacity Selection Settings field, replace CAPA_3100_00 with CAPA-99.
c) Save your data.
12
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Applying Optimizer Planning Settings
3. Create planning cost settings TM211_COST_## with the following values, and assign them
to your planning profile TM211_PLAN_##:
Table 2: Planning Cost Settings
Value
Planning Costs Settings
TM211_COST_##
Description
Planning Cost Setting for Group
##
Earliness/Delay Costs Basis
Earliness/Delay Costs Defined in Planning
Costs
Costs for Non-Delivery
999,999,999.00 (if not already defined)
Costs for Earliness per Day
24,00
Costs for Lateness per Day
24,00
Currency
USD
US
TO
ME
R
Field
a) In NWBC, choose Application Administration → Planning → Planning Profile Settings
→ Planning Costs Settings → Create Planning Costs Settings.
b) Enter the data from the Planning Cost Settings table.
c) Save your data.
RC
4. In the Means-of-Transport Settings screen area, create two lines for MOT FTL-99 and
LTL-99 using the following data:
Table 3: Means-of-Transport Settings 1
Field
FTL-99
Consider Distance Cost from Planning Cost
Settings
Yes
Consider Distance Cost from Transportation Lane
No
Fixed Costs
1
Means of Transport
LTL-99
Consider Distance Cost from Planning Cost
Settings
Yes
Consider Distance Cost from Transportation Lane
No
Fixed Costs
1
FO
Means of Transport
LY
ON
Value
a) Choose Edit.
b) Enter the data from the Means-of-Transport 1 table.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
13
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
5. Select the FTL-99 line. This opens two new tabs. Enter the following data in the Means-ofTransport Setting Details tab:
Table 4: Means-of-Transport Settings 2
Value
Premature Pick-Up
1,0
Delayed Pick-Up
1,0
Premature Delivery
1,0
Delayed Delivery
1,0
Basis for Quantity Costs
No Costs
Costs per Additional Intermed. Stop
50
Maximum Number of Stops
4
Distance Cost Basis from Lane
Route-based
Costs per Distance Unit
0,3
US
TO
ME
R
Field
6. Select the LTL-99 line. In the Means-of-Transport Setting Details tab, enter the following
data:
Table 5: Means-of-Transport Settings 3
Field
1,0
FO
RC
Premature Pick-Up
Value
1,0
Premature Delivery
1,0
Delayed Delivery
1,0
Basis for Quantity Costs
Planning Costs: Distance Independent
Maximum Number of Stops
1
Distance Cost Basis from Lane
Route-based
Costs per Quantity
0,01
LY
Delayed Pick-Up
Unit of Measure
LB
a) Enter the data from the Means-of-Transport Settings 3 table.
ON
b) Save your data.
7. Assign your capacity selection profile and planning cost settings to your planning profile.
Use the following data:
Table 6: Planning Profile Details
14
Field
Value
Planning Profile
TM211_PLAN_##
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Applying Optimizer Planning Settings
Field
Value
Planning Cost Settings
TM211_COST_##
a) Choose Application Administration → Planning → Planning Profiles → Edit Planning
Profile.
R
b) In the Profile Assignments screen area, enter the data in the Planning Profile Details
table.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
c) Save your data.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
15
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Create planning cost settings
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
16
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Lesson 3
Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, we consider the goals of the vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer in
transportation planning. We look also at the use of costs to influence VSR optimization
results, and analyze how constraints and tolerances effect means-of-transport selection.
Finally, we examine the use of planning costs to enforce minimum shipping requirements in
the VSR optimization run.
US
TO
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
●
Execute planning to determine the means of transport
●
Execute planning to consolidate deliveries
●
Execute planning to enforce minimum shipping requirements
Truck-Load Planning Scenarios
RC
Freight orders can be created by manual planning or they can be built by the VSR optimizer.
Optimizer planning is a key function of SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) and aims
to select the best means of transportation.
FO
SAP TM decides between shipping an order directly to a customer less than truckload (LTL)
scenario or consolidating orders from several customers in a single vehicle full truckload
(FTL) scenario.
Optimization Execution
The goal of the VSR optimizer is freight unit consolidation and the creation of a cost effective
and timely route from source to destination.
LY
VSR Goals and Objectives
●
ON
●
Goal: Determine a transportation plan that minimizes total costs and satisfies all
constraints.
Decisions:
-
Per freight unit: transport or not?
-
Per transported freight unit: select path through transportation network (stages).
-
Per selected stage: select capacity or vehicle resource.
-
Per capacity or vehicle resource:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
17
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
●
■
Select relative ordering of activities (= routing).
■
Assign start time to each activity (= scheduling).
Total costs = sum of:
-
Penalty costs (non-delivery, earliness, or lateness).
-
Capacity or vehicle costs (fixed, duration, stops, quantity, and distance).
R
The total cost is the sum of penalty costs for non delivery, early and late delivery, and vehicle
costs for duration, distance, stops, and quantity.
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
Optimizer Constraints
Figure 5: Optimizer Constraints
The optimizer operates within the constraints defined in the figure, Optimizer Constraints.
The optimizer evaluates any changes in routing caused by constraints for their effect on the
scheduling and timing. It communicates any change of time or date to all tasks on that
resource or to any dependent tasks on any other resource. Considering both aspects in
parallel ensures effective planning.
LY
The optimizer tries to assign freight units to vehicles and determine an effective delivery order
for each vehicle so that total transportation costs are minimized. It considers several
constraints and takes penalty costs into account as part of the total transportation cost.
ON
Optimizer Communication
When the optimizer starts, the engine communicates with the SAP TM application; the
optimizer requires the complete description of the transportation planning scenario to make
informed decisions.
For each freight unit, the engine decides if it wants to transport it directly or via transshipment
locations.
18
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Exercise 2
R
Execute Optimization to Determine Means of
Transport
ME
Business Example
US
TO
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to execute VSR optimization to determine
the means of transport required for transportation planning.
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the data, TM211_PLAN_##, that you created in
the exercise “Create Planning Cost Settings”.
In this exercise, the system automatically generates sales and freight orders, that
are required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. You also create
the item. FU_SEL_3100_##, that is required for one or more subsequent exercises
in this course.
FO
RC
1. In SAP ERP, create several sales orders so that you have data for planning. Note the sales
order numbers that you create and use the following data:
Table 7: Sales Orders 1
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Org
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
LY
Field
ON
Table 8: Sales Orders 2
Field
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Sold-to
Party
CUST##-1
6
CUST##-1
7
CUST##-1
8
CUST##-2
5
CUST##-2
6
CUST##-2
8
PO Number
TM200_00
TM200_00
TM200_00
TM200_00
TM200_00
TM200_00
Material
PRODTM-0
0
PRODTM-0
0
PRODTM-0
0
PRODTM-0
0
PRODTM-0
0
PRODTM-0
0
Quantity
50
50
50
50
50
50
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
19
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Field
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Sales Order Number
2. Copy the selection profile FU_SEL_3100_00 to your own selection profile
FU_SEL_3100_##.
Table 9: Selection Profile
ME
R
3. Replace the geographical selection attributes FU_GEO_3100_00 with your own
geographical attributes FU_GEO_3100_## by replacing the range for destination locations
CUST00-01 to CUST00-30 with CUST##-01 to CUST##-03. On the Selection Profile tab,
enter the following data:
Value
Selection Profile
FU_SEL_3100_##
Description
US
TO
Field
FU Selection Profile for Group ##
4. In NWBC, enter the transportation cockpit using the following data:
Table 10: Profile Details
Field
FU_SEL_3100_##
FO
RC
Selection Profile For Freight Units
Value
Planning Profile
TM211_PLAN_##
Selection Profiles For Freight Orders
FU_SEL_3100_##
Layout
Standard Layout
5. Create a freight order for the freight unit to CUST##-16 using the optimizer planning
function, with all available resources. Analyze the result, but do not save.
LY
6. Create a freight order for the freight units to CUST##-17 and CUST##-18 using all
available vehicle resources. Use the optimizer planning function with selected entries only.
Analyze the result, but do not save.
ON
7. Review the details of the freight unit in the Overview tab. Answer the following question
before canceling the transaction: How many freight orders are created?
8. Why is one freight order created?
20
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
9. Create freight orders for the freight units to CUST##-17 and CUST##-18 using vehicle
resource LTL-99. Use the optimizer planning function with selected entries only. Analyze
the result, but do not save.
10. Review the details of the freight unit in the Overview screen area.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
12. Why are two freight orders created?
R
11. How many freight orders are created?
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
21
Unit 1
Solution 2
R
Execute Optimization to Determine Means of
Transport
ME
Business Example
US
TO
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to execute VSR optimization to determine
the means of transport required for transportation planning.
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the data, TM211_PLAN_##, that you created in
the exercise “Create Planning Cost Settings”.
In this exercise, the system automatically generates sales and freight orders, that
are required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course. You also create
the item. FU_SEL_3100_##, that is required for one or more subsequent exercises
in this course.
RC
1. In SAP ERP, create several sales orders so that you have data for planning. Note the sales
order numbers that you create and use the following data:
Table 7: Sales Orders 1
Field
ZT00
FO
Order Type
Value
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
LY
Sales Org
Table 8: Sales Orders 2
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Sold-to
Party
CUST##-1
6
CUST##-1
7
CUST##-1
8
CUST##-2
5
CUST##-2
6
CUST##-2
8
PO Number
TM200_00
TM200_00
TM200_00
TM200_00
TM200_00
TM200_00
Material
PRODTM-0
0
PRODTM-0
0
PRODTM-0
0
PRODTM-0
0
PRODTM-0
0
PRODTM-0
0
Quantity
50
50
50
50
50
50
ON
Field
22
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
Field
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Sales Order Number
2. Copy the selection profile FU_SEL_3100_00 to your own selection profile
FU_SEL_3100_##.
R
a) In NWBC, choose Application Administration → Planning → Selection Profiles →
Display Selection Profile.
ME
b) Enter FU_SEL_3100_00 and choose Continue.
c) Choose Copy.
Table 9: Selection Profile
Field
US
TO
3. Replace the geographical selection attributes FU_GEO_3100_00 with your own
geographical attributes FU_GEO_3100_## by replacing the range for destination locations
CUST00-01 to CUST00-30 with CUST##-01 to CUST##-03. On the Selection Profile tab,
enter the following data:
Value
Selection Profile
Description
FU_SEL_3100_##
FU Selection Profile for Group ##
RC
a) In the Selection Profile tab, next to the geographical selection attribute
FU_GEO_3100_##, choose Copy.
b) Enter the profile name FU_GEO_3100_## and the description Geographical Sel.
Attributes for Group ##.
FO
c) Choose OK.
d) On the Geographical Selection Attributes tab, select Destination Locations.
e) Replace CUST00–01 with CUST##-01.
f) Replace CUST00–30 with CUST##-30.
LY
g) Save your data.
4. In NWBC, enter the transportation cockpit using the following data:
ON
Table 10: Profile Details
Field
Value
Selection Profile For Freight Units
FU_SEL_3100_##
Planning Profile
TM211_PLAN_##
Selection Profiles For Freight Orders
FU_SEL_3100_##
Layout
Standard Layout
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
23
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
a) In NWBC, choose Planning → Planning → Transportation Cockpit.
b) Choose New.
c) Enter the data from the Profile Details table.
d) Save your data.
e) Select the row and choose Continue.
a) Select the freight unit corresponding to CUST##-16.
ME
b) Choose Optimizer Planning → Selected Entries with All Resources.
R
5. Create a freight order for the freight unit to CUST##-16 using the optimizer planning
function, with all available resources. Analyze the result, but do not save.
c) In the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings tab, select the new freight order ($0000000).
e) Choose Cancel.
US
TO
d) Review the details of the freight unit in the Overview screen area.
6. Create a freight order for the freight units to CUST##-17 and CUST##-18 using all
available vehicle resources. Use the optimizer planning function with selected entries only.
Analyze the result, but do not save.
a) Select the freight units corresponding to CUST##-17 and CUST##-18.
b) Choose Optimizer Planning → Selected Entries with All Resources.
c) Select the new freight order ($0000000).
FO
RC
7. Review the details of the freight unit in the Overview tab. Answer the following question
before canceling the transaction: How many freight orders are created?
One freight order is created.
8. Why is one freight order created?
One freight order is created because in the planning cost settings, you defined that the
means-of-transport FTL-99 can do a maximum of 4 stops. It is cheaper to do a multi-stop
freight order than several freight orders.
LY
9. Create freight orders for the freight units to CUST##-17 and CUST##-18 using vehicle
resource LTL-99. Use the optimizer planning function with selected entries only. Analyze
the result, but do not save.
a) Select the freight units corresponding to CUST##-17 and CUST##-18.
ON
b) Select vehicle resource LTL-99.
c) Choose Optimizer Planning → Selected Entries Only.
d) Select the new freight order that was generated ($0000000)
10. Review the details of the freight unit in the Overview screen area.
24
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
11. How many freight orders are created?
Two freight orders are created
12. Why are two freight orders created?
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Two freight orders are created because in the planning cost settings, you defined that the
means-of-transport LTL-99 cannot do any additional stops. Therefore, one freight order is
created for each customer.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
25
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Configuration of Planning Cost Settings
●
Premature pick-up
●
Delayed pick-up
●
Premature delivery
●
Delayed delivery
R
The following penalty costs are defined in the planning profile and can be used to control the
decisions made by VSR optimization:
ME
Using Soft Constraints
The optimizer calculates additional costs if the transportation plan deviates from the
requested pickup and delivery dates. This is done when using soft constraints in the pickup
and delivery time window and defining penalty costs in the planning profile.
ON
LY
FO
RC
Penalty Costs
US
TO
There is a balance in the optimizer process between selecting the cheapest mode of transport
and adhering to promised delivery dates and defined pickup dates. For example, the optimizer
could decide to ship via an intermodal means of transport even if this means delivering a day
late. This is on the condition that savings made by selecting a slower means of transport
outweigh the penalty costs for delayed delivery.
Figure 6: VSR Optimization and Windows
The penalty cost for premature pick-up is incurred when the scheduled pickup time falls
between the earliest pickup time (hard constraint) and the allowed premature pickup (soft
constraint).
26
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
The penalty cost for delayed pick-up is incurred when the scheduled pickup time falls between
the allowed late pickup time (soft constraint) and the latest pickup time (hard constraint).
The penalty cost for premature delivery is incurred when the scheduled delivery time falls
between the earliest delivery time (hard constraint) and the allowed premature delivery time
(soft constraint).
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
Pickup and Delivery Window Definition
R
The penalty cost for delayed delivery is incurred when the scheduled delivery time falls
between the allowed late delivery time (soft constraint) and the latest delivery time (hard
constraint).
LY
Figure 7: Pick Up and Delivery Windows
Defining Pickup and Delivery Windows
ON
●
●
●
Forwarding orders, SAP ERP-orders, and deliveries work only with single day and time for
pick up and delivery.
To allow more flexibility for freight consolidation and routing optimization SAP TM
Planning uses Time Windows.
Combination of pick up and delivery definition and penalty costs controls how the
optimizer schedules within the time window.
Windows control when goods are to be picked up and delivered. VSR optimization schedules
the pickup or delivery exactly in the window defined. If there were no windows, VSR
optimization would schedule these dates to minimize the total costs.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
27
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
You can also control the optimization when windows are not taken into account and goods are
picked up or delivered too early or too late.
Defining Tolerances
You can create windows by defining tolerances within which a premature or delayed pickup or
delivery is to be allowed. You specify for each tolerance if VSR optimization is to consider it a
hard, soft, or hard and soft constraint. Specifying constraints controls if VSR optimization
calculates penalty costs when the constraints are not adhered to.
●
Maximum earliness
●
Maximum delay
●
Delay without penalty costs
●
Earliness without penalty costs
ME
R
The following tolerances can be defined:
ON
LY
FO
RC
Hard and Soft Constraints
US
TO
The dates and times defined for the pickup and delivery in the freight unit are the basis for
calculating the tolerances. The exact time for the pick-up date or delivery date can be
considered.
Figure 8: Defining Pick Up and Delivery Windows
Conditions are used to set up pickup and delivery windows. The condition is specified in the
freight unit type.
28
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
Window Constraints
●
None
●
Hard (Acceptable dates)
●
Soft (Requested dates
●
Hard and soft (Both)
●
VSR optimization always adheres to hard constraints.
ME
●
R
VSR optimization takes constraints into account when it assigns freight units to capacities.
You can differentiate between hard and soft constraints:
You model soft constraints using penalty costs, for example, lateness costs that are part of
the total costs.
The following are the relevant condition types:
For pick up and delivery time window definition: /SCMTMS/TOR_TIMEWIND
●
For earliness and lateness cost definition: /SCMTMS/FU_PNLT_COST
US
TO
●
ON
LY
FO
RC
Means of Transport Cost Evaluation
Figure 9: Means of Transport Costs
Using the planning cost settings, the optimizer can determine the best means of transport to
use. For example, a break-even analysis between a large truck and a small truck can be
modeled with this setting.
There is a relation between pickup and delivery penalty time and cost per duration. Depending
on business rules, it could be better to delay pickup or deliver early.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
29
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
The maximum distance and durations are useful for deciding on rail or air transport instead of
road. The maximum number of stops and costs are useful for reducing the number of visits
during a week at customers or suppliers.
Figure 10: Stop Off Costs
US
TO
ME
R
Stop Off Costs
ON
LY
FO
RC
The figure, Stop Off Costs, shows two stop-offs between locations A and D. Stopover costs
are applied to influence the outcome of VSR optimization. The source and target location in a
route are not taken into account when calculating the number of stopovers. Maintain the
number of stopovers plus one.
30
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Exercise 3
R
Determine Optimizer Run Results Using
Planning Costs
ME
Business Example
US
TO
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support a truck-load (TL) and less-thantruck-load (LTL) planning scenario. Sue, the SAP consultant, wants to use costs to determine
the outcome of optimization runs needed for transportation planning.
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the planning cost, TM211_COST_##, that you
created, and the freight orders that were automatically generated, in the exercise
“Execute Optimization to Determine Means of Transport”.
In this exercise, the systems automatically generates freight orders that are
required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course.
RC
1. Analyze the three optimization runs using the Optimization Explanation function to
understand why the optimizer creates the results. Identify the optimization runs of the
previous exercise.
2. Use the Explanation Tool to view the optimization results.
FO
3. What is the total cost in the optimization result for the first run (with freight unit to
CUST##-16)?
LY
4. Review the settings responsible for this result using the Freight Unit, Resources, and
Transportation Network folders.
ON
5. What is the gross weight of the freight unit?
6. In the MTR costs folder, what is the fixed cost for LTL-99?
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
31
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
7. In the MTR Costs folder, what is the unit cost for the LTL-99 in the MTR Variable Costs
table?
R
8. What is the total cost?
ME
9. Exit the screen.
10. On the RCCF: Log Display screen, use the Explanation Tool to view the optimization results
for the second run (freight units to CUST##-17 and CUST##-18 using FTL-99).
US
TO
11. What is the total cost in the optimization result for the second run (with freight units to
CUST##-17 and CUST##-18 using FTL-99)?
12. Review the settings responsible for this result using the Resources and Transportation
Network folders.
FO
RC
13. In the MTR costs folder, what is the fixed cost for FTL-99?
14. In the MTR costs folder, what is the stop-off cost?
LY
15. What is the distance cost for FTL-99?
ON
16. In the Solution Details folder, choose Costs. What is the distance in the Determined
Distance table?
32
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
17. What is the total cost?
18. Exit the screen.
R
19. On the RCCF: Log Display screen, use the Explanation Tool to view the optimization results
for the third run (freight units to CUST##-17 and CUST##-18 using LTL-99).
ME
20. What is the total cost in the optimization result for the third run (with freight units to
CUST##-17 and CUST##-18 using LTL-99)
US
TO
21. Review the settings responsible for this result using the Freight Unit, Resources, and
Transportation Network folders.
22. What is the gross weight of the freight unit?
RC
23. In the MTR costs folder, what is the fixed cost for LTL-99?
FO
24. In the MTR Costs folder, what is the unit cost for the LTL-99 in the MTR Variable Costs
table?
LY
25. What is the total cost?
ON
26. If you select freight units to CUST##17 and CUST##-18, but do not specify the vehicle
resource to be used, what is the result?
27. In NWBC, change the fixed costs for LTL-99 to 500 so you can select the other means-oftransport.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
33
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
28. From your transportation cockpit in NWBC, execute the optimization run using the
Optimizer Planning function for all resources to prove that your change worked as desired
using freight units corresponding to CUST##-17 and CUST##-18.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
30. In NWBC, revert the fixed costs for LTL-99 to 1.
R
29. What is the max utilization of the freight order?
34
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Solution 3
R
Determine Optimizer Run Results Using
Planning Costs
ME
Business Example
US
TO
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support a truck-load (TL) and less-thantruck-load (LTL) planning scenario. Sue, the SAP consultant, wants to use costs to determine
the outcome of optimization runs needed for transportation planning.
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the planning cost, TM211_COST_##, that you
created, and the freight orders that were automatically generated, in the exercise
“Execute Optimization to Determine Means of Transport”.
In this exercise, the systems automatically generates freight orders that are
required for one or more subsequent exercises in this course.
RC
1. Analyze the three optimization runs using the Optimization Explanation function to
understand why the optimizer creates the results. Identify the optimization runs of the
previous exercise.
a) In NWBC, enter the transaction code rcc_log and filter by user name.
b) On the RCCF: Log Display screen, choose
.
FO
c) In the Define Filter Criteria dialog box, select User Name in the Column Set column and
use the arrows to move it to the Filter Criteria column to filter by user name.
d) Choose
.
LY
e) Enter your user name for the filter criteria (TM211-##).
f) Choose
Enter.
2. Use the Explanation Tool to view the optimization results.
ON
a) Select the earliest row with the optimization run.
b) Choose
Explanation Tool.
c) Open the Solution Details folder.
d) Choose Costs and review the Costs table.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
35
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
3. What is the total cost in the optimization result for the first run (with freight unit to
CUST##-16)?
The total cost can vary. The fixed cost is 1 and the stop cost is 50.
a) Choose Results → Solution Details → Costs.
R
4. Review the settings responsible for this result using the Freight Unit, Resources, and
Transportation Network folders.
The gross weight of the freight unit is 5000 LB.
a) Choose Input → Freight Units → Freight Units.
US
TO
6. In the MTR costs folder, what is the fixed cost for LTL-99?
ME
5. What is the gross weight of the freight unit?
The fixed cost is defined as 1. You defined the fixed cost in the planning cost settings.
a) Choose Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Fix Costs and Penalty Factors.
FO
RC
7. In the MTR Costs folder, what is the unit cost for the LTL-99 in the MTR Variable Costs
table?
The unit cost you defined in the planning cost settings is 0.01 per LB.
a) Choose Input Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Variable Cost.
8. What is the total cost?
The total cost is potentially 1 + 5000 * 0.01 = 1 + 50 = 51. However, with the additional
consideration of earliness and lateness, this may vary at different times of the day.
9. Exit the screen.
LY
10. On the RCCF: Log Display screen, use the Explanation Tool to view the optimization results
for the second run (freight units to CUST##-17 and CUST##-18 using FTL-99).
a) Select the first row with the optimization run.
ON
b) Choose
Explanation Tool.
c) Choose Result → Solution Details → Costs.
d) Review the Costs table.
36
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
11. What is the total cost in the optimization result for the second run (with freight units to
CUST##-17 and CUST##-18 using FTL-99)?
The total cost is 209.66. However, the cost may be different in your system.
12. Review the settings responsible for this result using the Resources and Transportation
Network folders.
R
13. In the MTR costs folder, what is the fixed cost for FTL-99?
ME
The fixed cost for FTL-99 is defined as 1. You defined this in the planning cost settings.
a) Choose Input → Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Fix Costs and Penalty Factors.
14. In the MTR costs folder, what is the stop-off cost?
US
TO
The stop-off cost is 50. You defined this in the planning cost settings.
a) Choose Input → Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Variable Costs.
15. What is the distance cost for FTL-99?
0.3 per km.
RC
a) Choose Input → Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Variable Costs.
16. In the Solution Details folder, choose Costs. What is the distance in the Determined
Distance table?
FO
The distance is 528.88. However, the distance may be different based on your GIS
settings.
17. What is the total cost?
LY
The total cost is 1 + 50 + 528,88*0,3 = 1 + 50 + 158.66= 209.66
18. Exit the screen.
ON
19. On the RCCF: Log Display screen, use the Explanation Tool to view the optimization results
for the third run (freight units to CUST##-17 and CUST##-18 using LTL-99).
a) Select the first row with the optimization run.
b) Choose
Explanation Tool.
c) Choose Solution Details → Costs.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
37
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
20. What is the total cost in the optimization result for the third run (with freight units to
CUST##-17 and CUST##-18 using LTL-99)
The total cost is 248.67. However, with the additional consideration of earliness and
lateness, this may vary at different times of the day.
21. Review the settings responsible for this result using the Freight Unit, Resources, and
Transportation Network folders.
a) Choose Input → Freight Units → Freight Units.
US
TO
23. In the MTR costs folder, what is the fixed cost for LTL-99?
ME
The gross weight of the freight unit is 5000 LB.
R
22. What is the gross weight of the freight unit?
The fixed cost is defined as 1.You defined it in the planning cost settings.
a) Choose Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Fix Costs and Penalty Factors.
24. In the MTR Costs folder, what is the unit cost for the LTL-99 in the MTR Variable Costs
table?
FO
RC
The unit cost you defined in the planning cost settings is 0.01 per LB.
a) Choose Input Resources → MTR Costs → MTR Variable Cost.
25. What is the total cost?
The total cost is 2*(1+5000*0,01)+146.66 = 248.67. The majority comes from the delay
cost (Result - Solution Details - Cost - Lateness: 146.66).
LY
26. If you select freight units to CUST##17 and CUST##-18, but do not specify the vehicle
resource to be used, what is the result?
Two freight orders using LTL-99 result, because this is the cheaper variant according to
the current system setup.
ON
27. In NWBC, change the fixed costs for LTL-99 to 500 so you can select the other means-oftransport.
a) Choose Application Administration → Planning → Planning Profile Settings →
Planning Cost Settings → Edit Planning Costs Settings.
b) Planning Costs: TM211_COST_##
c) Change the fixed costs for LTL-99 to 500.
d) Save your data.
38
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
28. From your transportation cockpit in NWBC, execute the optimization run using the
Optimizer Planning function for all resources to prove that your change worked as desired
using freight units corresponding to CUST##-17 and CUST##-18.
a) Choose Optimizer Planning → Selected Entries with all Resources.
b) Select the new freight order generated ($0000000).
c) Review the details of the freight order in the overview tab.
The max utilization of the freight order is 22%.
30. In NWBC, revert the fixed costs for LTL-99 to 1.
ME
29. What is the max utilization of the freight order?
R
d) Accept the result.
US
TO
a) Choose Application Administration → Planning → Planning Profile Settings →
Planning Cost Settings → Edit Planning Costs Settings.
b) Planning Costs: TM211_COST_##
c) Change the fixed costs for LTL-99 to 1.
ON
LY
FO
RC
d) Save your data.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
39
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Cost Function Application
Figure 11: Cost Functions
The figure, Cost Functions, shows the creation of a cost profile function and how penalty
costs are calculated. During optimization, the system avoids transports if a certain load level
is not reached. If this minimum load level is not reached, the system does not create a
transport. It waits until this level is reached. In the example, there is a penalty of $1500 for a
load less than 2000mᵌ. After 2000mᵌ, the penalty cost is reduced from $500 to zero.
Additional Linear Loading Costs
Additional Linear Loading Costs
LY
Additional linear loading costs can be applied to increase truck usage. You define two
segments for this cost function. For the first segment, you define penalty costs of $1500 and
a load of zero cubic meters (mᵌ). Define a gradient of zero. If TRUCK001 leaves the plant with
a load of less than 2000mᵌ, the optimizer calculates penalty costs of $1500.
ON
For the second segment, you define penalty costs of $500 and a load of 2000mᵌ. Define a
gradient of one. If TRUCK001 leaves the plant with a load of 2000mᵌ to 2500mᵌ, the optimizer
calculates penalty costs between $500 and zero in accordance with the gradient. The
penalties decrease in intervals of one unit for each additional cubic meter loaded onto the
truck.
40
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Exercise 4
R
Apply Cost Functions to Influence Optimizer
Results
ME
Business Example
US
TO
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support a truck-load (TL) and less-thantruck-load (LTL) planning scenario. Sue, the SAP consultant, wants to apply cost functions to
influence the outcome of VSR optimization needed for transportation planning.
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the planning cost setting, TM211_COST_##,
created in the exercise, Determine Optimizer Run Results Using Planning Costs.
RC
1. In NWBC, define a cost function COST_FUNC-##. Define the cost function so that a load
cost of 1000 is defined if vehicle resources of means-of-transport FTL-99 are loaded with
less than 30000 LB. Define also that a penalty of 1000 applies. This decreases for loads
above 30000 LB from 10 at a rate of 0.001. Use the data in the following tables to create
cost function settings.
Table 11: Segment 1
Field
FO
Segment
Value
1
0
Load Cost
1000
Slope
0
LY
Load
ON
Table 12: Segment 2
Field
Value
Segment
2
Load
30000
Load Cost
10
Slope
-0,001
2. In NWBC, assign your new cost function to your MOT FTL-99 in your cost profile. Use the
following data:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
41
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Table 13: Cost Settings
Field
Value
Planning Cost Settings
TM211_COST_##
Cost Function
COST_FUNC-##
Unit of Measure
LB
R
3. Go to your transportation cockpit and run the Optimizer Planning function on freight units
corresponding to CUST##-17 and CUST#-18.
ME
4. Accept the result.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
5. Verify that LTL-99 is again chosen for the two freight orders.
Because of the low utilization, the multi-stop freight order using FTL-99 is now too
expensive.
42
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Solution 4
R
Apply Cost Functions to Influence Optimizer
Results
ME
Business Example
US
TO
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support a truck-load (TL) and less-thantruck-load (LTL) planning scenario. Sue, the SAP consultant, wants to apply cost functions to
influence the outcome of VSR optimization needed for transportation planning.
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the planning cost setting, TM211_COST_##,
created in the exercise, Determine Optimizer Run Results Using Planning Costs.
RC
1. In NWBC, define a cost function COST_FUNC-##. Define the cost function so that a load
cost of 1000 is defined if vehicle resources of means-of-transport FTL-99 are loaded with
less than 30000 LB. Define also that a penalty of 1000 applies. This decreases for loads
above 30000 LB from 10 at a rate of 0.001. Use the data in the following tables to create
cost function settings.
Table 11: Segment 1
Field
FO
Segment
Value
1
0
Load Cost
1000
Slope
0
LY
Load
ON
Table 12: Segment 2
Field
Value
Segment
2
Load
30000
Load Cost
10
Slope
-0,001
a) In NWBC, choose Application Administration → Planning → Planning Profile
Settings → Cost Functions Settings → Create Cost Function Settings.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
43
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
b) Enter your cost function.
c) Enter the data in the table, Segment 1.
d) Enter the data in the table, Segment 2.
e) Save your data.
Table 13: Cost Settings
Value
Planning Cost Settings
TM211_COST_##
Cost Function
COST_FUNC-##
Unit of Measure
LB
US
TO
ME
Field
R
2. In NWBC, assign your new cost function to your MOT FTL-99 in your cost profile. Use the
following data:
a) In NWBC, choose Application Administration → Planning → Planning Profile Settings
→ Planning Costs Settings → Edit Planning Costs Settings.
b) Enter the Planning Cost Setting and choose Continue.
c) Select the MOT FTL-99.
d) In the Cost Functions tab, enter the data from the table.
FO
RC
e) Save your data.
3. Go to your transportation cockpit and run the Optimizer Planning function on freight units
corresponding to CUST##-17 and CUST#-18.
a) Choose Planning → Planning → Transportation Cockpit.
b) Select your transportation cockpit and choose Continue.
c) Select the freight units for CUST##-17 and CUST##-18.
d) Choose Optimizer Planning → Selected Entries Only.
e) Select the new freight order.
LY
4. Accept the result.
ON
5. Verify that LTL-99 is again chosen for the two freight orders.
Because of the low utilization, the multi-stop freight order using FTL-99 is now too
expensive.
44
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying Modal Decision Planning Scenarios
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Execute planning to determine the means of transport
●
Execute planning to consolidate deliveries
●
Execute planning to enforce minimum shipping requirements
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
45
Unit 1
Lesson 4
Applying Short-Cut Planning
Finally, we examine and execute short-cut planning.
US
TO
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, we examine short-cut planning in SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM).
We look also at the maintenance of the transportation requirement types, freight unit building
rules, and freight orders for short-cut planning.
●
Describe short-cut planning
●
Maintain integration settings for short-cut planning
●
Maintain configuration and execute short-cut planning
ON
LY
FO
RC
Short-Cut Planning Processes
Figure 12: Automatic Creation of Freight Order
46
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Applying Short-Cut Planning
Automatic planning allows you to automate the planning process in SAP TM. You can use this
process for the following activities:
●
Automatic freight order creation
●
Automatic carrier selection
●
Automatic freight order tendering
●
Automatic quotation evaluation and carrier assignment
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Short-Cut Planning Configuration
FO
Figure 13: Freight Unit Building Rule
Freight orders can be created directly for your order-based or delivery-based transportation
requirements. This is helpful when large orders already fill up a truck and do not need further
consolidation or planning.
The Forwarding Order Management (FWM) Business Document
LY
The system creates a freight order directly when you save an FWM business document (FO,
OTR, or DTR) if the following requirements have been met:
ON
●
●
●
The FWM business document is subcontracted and not consolidated with other FWM
business documents.
The FWM business document can be delivered in one freight order, meaning there is no
pre-carriage or on-carriage.
The FWM business document only has one source location and one destination location.
Transportation Requirement Types
The automatic creation of freight units can be activated in SAP TM configuration for orderbased and delivery-based transportation requirements and forwarding orders.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
47
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Automatic freight unit building is flagged for the desired OTR and DTR types in the context of
automated planning.
Freight Unit Building Rules
Automatic or direct creation of a freight order is possible via the freight unit building rule.
Instead of defining a freight unit type in the freight unit building rule, a freight order type can
be specified.
R
A freight order is then created directly instead of a freight unit. No additional intervention is
required by the planner in the transportation cockpit.
Freight Orders
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
Carrier selection can be automatically triggered for a freight order by assigning process
controller strategy CARR_SEL as a creation strategy to the freight order type in SAP TM
configuration. When doing so, carrier selection is carried out for the freight order upon its
creation. The tendering process can also be initiated using process controller strategies.
48
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Exercise 5
R
Maintain Integration Settings for Short-Cut
Planning
ME
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load (TL) and less-than-truckload (LTL) planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to maintain the integration
settings for automatic planning required for transportation management.
US
TO
Sue wants to set up a zero-click scenario for sales orders from customer CUST##-20. To do
so, there are four tasks to complete.
Note:
In this exercise, you create the following items that are required for one or more
subsequent exercises in the course:
●
FA##
●
FUBR-AUTO-##
OD##
FO
RC
●
1. In Customizing for SAP TM, create a freight order type TA## by copying existing freight
order type TM00. Assign FTL-99 as the default means-of-transport. Specify CARR_SEL as
a creation strategy. Specify CSEL_TM211 as default carrier selection settings and remove
the default type flag, the execution organization, the execution group and the last
expected event settings. Use the data in the following table:
Table 14: Freight Order Type Details
Value
Screen Area
Freight Order Type
TA##
Freight Order Types
Default Type
Deselect
Freight Order Types
Default MTr for Type
FTL-99
Default MTr Determination
Creation Strategy
CARR_SEL
Additional Strategies
Default Carrier Selection
Settings
CSEL_TM211
Additional Strategies
ON
LY
Field
2. In NWBC, create a freight unit building rule FUBR-AUTO-## by copying your freight unit
building rule FUBR-199. Assign your newly created freight order type TA## as the
business document type.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
49
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
3. In Customizing for SAP TM, create a new OTR-Type OD## by copying your existing OTRtype OTRX. Assign your newly created freight unit building rule FUBR-AUTO-## as the
freight unit building rule.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
4. Display OTR-Type Determination Condition ZOTR_TYPE and ask your instructor to
maintain an entry for you that maps sales orders of type ZT00 to customer CUST##-20
for purchase order TM200_00 to your newly created OTR-type OD##.
50
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Solution 5
R
Maintain Integration Settings for Short-Cut
Planning
ME
Business Example
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load (TL) and less-than-truckload (LTL) planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to maintain the integration
settings for automatic planning required for transportation management.
US
TO
Sue wants to set up a zero-click scenario for sales orders from customer CUST##-20. To do
so, there are four tasks to complete.
Note:
In this exercise, you create the following items that are required for one or more
subsequent exercises in the course:
●
FA##
●
FUBR-AUTO-##
OD##
FO
RC
●
1. In Customizing for SAP TM, create a freight order type TA## by copying existing freight
order type TM00. Assign FTL-99 as the default means-of-transport. Specify CARR_SEL as
a creation strategy. Specify CSEL_TM211 as default carrier selection settings and remove
the default type flag, the execution organization, the execution group and the last
expected event settings. Use the data in the following table:
Table 14: Freight Order Type Details
Value
Screen Area
Freight Order Type
TA##
Freight Order Types
Default Type
Deselect
Freight Order Types
Default MTr for Type
FTL-99
Default MTr Determination
Creation Strategy
CARR_SEL
Additional Strategies
Default Carrier Selection
Settings
CSEL_TM211
Additional Strategies
ON
LY
Field
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management →
Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Freight Order →
Define Freight Order Types.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
51
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
b) Choose
Execute.
c) Select freight order type TM00.
d) Choose
Copy As and enter the data in the table provided.
ME
R
Note:
Before you enter a value in the Default MTr for Type field, remove the
default value in the Transportation Mode field. After you enter the value in
the Default MTr for Type field, in the Transportation Mode field, enter 01.
e) In the Organizational Unit Determination screen area, delete the entries in the
Execution Org. and Execution Group fields.
f) In the Execution Settings screen area, delete the entry in the Last Exp. Event field.
US
TO
g) Press Enter on your keyboard and save your data.
2. In NWBC, create a freight unit building rule FUBR-AUTO-## by copying your freight unit
building rule FUBR-199. Assign your newly created freight order type TA## as the
business document type.
a) Choose Application Administration → Planning → Overview Settings.
b) From the Active Queries list, select All Freight Unit Building Rules.
Copy.
FO
RC
c) Select your freight unit building rule FUBR-199 and choose
d) Enter the freight unit building rule FUBR-AUTO-##.
e) Document Type: TA##.
f) Press Enter on your keyboard and save your data.
3. In Customizing for SAP TM, create a new OTR-Type OD## by copying your existing OTRtype OTRX. Assign your newly created freight unit building rule FUBR-AUTO-## as the
freight unit building rule.
LY
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management →
Transportation Management → Integration → ERP Logistics Integration → OrderBased Transportation Requirement → Define Order-Based Transportation
Requirement Types.
b) Select your freight order type OTRX.
Copy As.
ON
c) Choose
d) Enter the OTR type OD##
e) Enter the freight unit building rule FUBR-AUTO-##.
f) Press Enter on your keyboard and save your data.
4. Display OTR-Type Determination Condition ZOTR_TYPE and ask your instructor to
maintain an entry for you that maps sales orders of type ZT00 to customer CUST##-20
for purchase order TM200_00 to your newly created OTR-type OD##.
52
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Applying Short-Cut Planning
a) In NWBC, choose Application Administration → General Settings → Conditions →
Display Condition.
b) Enter the condition ZOTR_TYPE and continue.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
c) Ask your instructor now to maintain the condition.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
53
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Carrier Profile
Carriers are business partners that are assigned the business partner role Carrier. You
characterize the transportation capabilities of a carrier with the carrier profile. This object
stores information that is used in a similar constellation for multiple carriers.
You create only one profile for each carrier.
●
Transportation lane and carrier-specific parameters
●
Product freight groups
●
Transportation groups
●
Equipment groups and equipment types
●
Fixed transportation costs
●
Dimension costs
ME
Freight code sets
US
TO
●
R
You can store the following objects in a carrier profile:
You use the carrier profile when selecting a carrier.
In SAP TM, to define the carrier profile, choose Master Data → General → Define Carrier
Profile.
Carrier Selection Settings
FO
RC
Definition of settings can be done in the carrier selection settings or in the transportation lane.
●
Carrier selection settings
●
Determination of costs
●
Transportation charge interpretation
●
Business share usage
●
Transportation allocation usage
●
Incompatibility usage
LY
The carrier selection settings are part of the planning profile settings and are required to
launch a carrier selection run.
Carrier selection settings can be retrieved from the freight order type as default carrier
selection settings or via a condition maintained in the freight order type customizing.
ON
Specify in the carrier selection settings that automatic tendering is to start after the carrier
selection run.
Tendering Profile
The tendering profile is used to define a tendering plan. It contains basic tendering data and is
a prerequisite for automatic tendering. You can use a tendering profile when you manually
create a tendering plan.
Within the profile, you can define multi-step tendering in a tendering plan. This allows a
company to mix tendering types.
Profile Definitions
54
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Applying Short-Cut Planning
Within the tendering profile, you can define multiple variants such as direct, peer-to-peer, and
broadcast tendering. You can also decide if the rule based tendering is fully automatic or
semi-automatic.
The tendering profile also allows you to define the medium of tendering communication. It can
be web-based, e-mail, SMS, or B2B oriented.
You can identify a multi-currency setting, event monitoring, and exception based
management.
ME
Automatic Planning Execution
R
You can classify a fully configurable process, request for quotation (RFQ) publishing, and
authorization-based RFQ processing and data visibility.
Automatic planning allows you to automate the planning process in SAP TM. You can use this
process for:
Automatic freight order creation
●
Automatic carrier selection
●
Automatic freight order tendering
●
Automatic quotation evaluation and carrier assignment
US
TO
●
ON
LY
FO
RC
When a sales order is created in SAP ERP, it is transferred to SAP TM where an order-based
transportation requirement is created. If all planning steps are automated in SAP TM, no
additional user intervention is needed; a freight order is automatically created and tendered
to a carrier.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
55
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
56
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Exercise 6
R
Maintain Configuration and Execute Short-cut
Planning
ME
Business Example
Sue, the SAP consultant needs to execute the zero click scenario.
US
TO
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the order-based transportation requirement,
OD##, created in the exercise “Maintain Integration Settings for Short-Cut
Planning”.
1. In SAP ERP, create a sales order. From the SAP Easy Access screen, enter transaction
code VA01 to start creating the order. Use the following data:
Field
Value
Order Type
3000
RC
Sales Organization
ZT00
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
FO
Sold-to party
CUST##-20
TM200_00
Material
PRODTM-00
Quantity
50
LY
PO Number
2. In NWBC, check the document flow of the resultant OTR.
ON
3. In the Document Flow tab, is a successor business document created?
4. What type of document is the successor business document?
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
57
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
5. Navigate into the successor business document and review the details in the General Data
tab.
6. Can you explain why a freight order of type TA## is the successor document?
9. Is a carrier ranking created?
US
TO
8. In the Subcontracting tab, has a carrier been selected?
ME
R
7. In the General Data tab, which means of transport is used in this business document?
ON
LY
FO
RC
10. Can you explain why a carrier ranking is created?
58
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Solution 6
R
Maintain Configuration and Execute Short-cut
Planning
ME
Business Example
Sue, the SAP consultant needs to execute the zero click scenario.
US
TO
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the order-based transportation requirement,
OD##, created in the exercise “Maintain Integration Settings for Short-Cut
Planning”.
1. In SAP ERP, create a sales order. From the SAP Easy Access screen, enter transaction
code VA01 to start creating the order. Use the following data:
Field
Value
Order Type
3000
RC
Sales Organization
ZT00
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
FO
Sold-to party
CUST##-20
TM200_00
Material
PRODTM-00
Quantity
50
LY
PO Number
2. In NWBC, check the document flow of the resultant OTR.
ON
a) Choose ERP Logistics Integration → Worklist → Overview Transportation
Requirements.
b) In the Document column, select the OTR created in Step 1.
3. In the Document Flow tab, is a successor business document created?
Yes, a successor business document is created.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
59
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
4. What type of document is the successor business document?
The successor business document is a freight order of type TA##.
5. Navigate into the successor business document and review the details in the General Data
tab.
6. Can you explain why a freight order of type TA## is the successor document?
ME
R
Yes. The sales order of type ZT00 for CUST##-20 was mapped onto an OTR-type OD##.
Customizing this OTR type included a freight unit building rule FBR-AUTO-## that created
business documents of type TA##.
7. In the General Data tab, which means of transport is used in this business document?
Means of transport FTL-99 is used in this business document.
US
TO
8. In the Subcontracting tab, has a carrier been selected?
No carrier has been selected until now.
9. Is a carrier ranking created?
Yes, a carrier ranking is created.
FO
RC
a) In the freight order, choose Subcontracting → Carrier Ranking.
10. Can you explain why a carrier ranking is created?
ON
LY
Yes. In the freight order type, customizing creation strategy CARR_SEL is defined, which
initiates carrier selection on creation of the freight order. Carrier selection setting
CSEL_TM211 is used in this process which is defined as a default carrier selection setting
in the customizing of freight order type TA##. These carrier selection settings only create
a carrier ranking, but do not award a result.
60
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Applying Short-Cut Planning
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Describe short-cut planning
●
Maintain integration settings for short-cut planning
●
Maintain configuration and execute short-cut planning
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
61
Unit 1
Lesson 5
Creating Pooled Shipments
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you examine the process of modeling the transportation network for pooled
distribution. You learn about the purpose and definition of a transshipment location.
You then consider the use of the transportation network for pooled distribution to generate
pooled shipments.
US
TO
Finally, you identify the requirement for a pooled shipment in multiple freight orders and
execute planning for pooled distribution.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
●
Model the transportation network for pooled shipments
●
Create pooled freight orders
ON
LY
FO
RC
Pooled Distribution
Figure 14: Pool Distribution
62
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Pooled Shipments
In the pooled distribution process, the SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) system
determines whether it is more cost-effective to deliver freight directly to the customer via
truckload or using a pool location to consolidate freight. The second option is cheaper yet
more time-consuming.
VSR Optimization in Pooled Distribution
R
In the pool distribution process, a shipper wants to send goods from a shipping point to
customers using pool or hub locations for consolidation. For planning, sales orders are
created in the SAP ERP system and then transferred as order-based transportation requests
into the SAP TM system.
ME
The VSR optimizer determines whether it is more cost-effective and less time-consuming to
deliver freight to customers via less than truckload (LTL) directly with no consolidation
allowed or to a pool location for consolidation.
From there, freight can be delivered to customers via full truck load (FTL) with multiple stop
offs.
FO
RC
US
TO
Transshipment Locations
Figure 15: Transshipment Locations
LY
A transshipment location is used for unloading goods from one vehicle resource and loading it
onto another vehicle resource during the transportation process. Transshipment locations
are used when different means of transport or different carriers have to be used in the
transportation process. You can also use transshipment locations when consolidating or deconsolidating goods to be transported.
Definition of a Transshipment Location
ON
A transshipment location is defined by assigning a location to either another location or to a
transportation zone. When you assign a transshipment location to a transportation zone, it
can be used as a transshipment location by all locations that are part of that transportation
zone.
If you define a transshipment location and want to use it in your transportation processes, you
must define transportation lanes that take the transshipment location into consideration.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
63
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Rough Planning
Figure 16: Rough Planning
Rough Planning Business Rationale
●
●
For pre- and on-carriages, rough planning is sufficient.
For pre- and on-carriages, neither transportation lanes, vehicles, or schedules are
required, thus reducing the effort for master data maintenance.
ON
LY
For many business processes, it is not important to plan complete end-to-end transportation
in detail. For example, it may be important to find the right flights, but if the airport can be
reached within a predefined time interval, the planning for this stage of the journey does not
need to be planned with the same precision. The assignment of transshipment locations to
transportation zones (entry or exit point into a transportation network) allows planners to
specify a duration that can be used for rough planning. This means that a detailed
transportation network (transportation lanes, for example) is not required for pre or oncarriage.
Transshipment locations are defined only as entry and exit points in the network. If entry and
exit points are connected indirectly via schedules or freight bookings, the transshipment
points for these do not have to be defined as transshipment locations (from SAP TM 9.0). If
stages are maintained (via transportation proposal or manually) constraints resulting from
stage information can be considered or respected.
64
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Pooled Shipments
US
TO
ME
R
Transportation Lanes
RC
Figure 17: Transportation Lanes
FO
A transportation lane represents a relationship between two locations, two transportation
zones, or a combination of locations and zones. It connects two locations or all locations
within the zones for a specific means of transport. You use this business object when planning
distribution and procurement between different locations.
A transportation lane is defined by a source location or zone, a destination location or zone,
and a means of transport. You can assign carriers to the transportation lane.
A transportation lane points only in one direction. To model the reverse direction, you need to
create another transportation lane.
LY
Editing a Transportation Lane
You can change or display transportation lanes that you have defined in SAP TM by choosing
Master Data → Transportation Network → Define Transportation Lane.
ON
You can also view and edit multiple transportation lanes on the Mass Maint. (Display/Change)
tab. Transportation lanes are used in transportation processes such as dispatching or
subcontracting.
The origin and destination locations, carrier, and means of transport are assigned to the
transportation lane.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
65
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
66
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Exercise 7
R
Create a Transportation Network to Support
Pooled Distribution
ME
Business Example
US
TO
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create a transportation network to
support pooled distribution.
Note:
In this exercise, you create the following items that are required for one or more
subsequent exercises in the course:
ATLANTA-##
●
POOL-##
●
RESOURCE POOL-##
FO
RC
●
1. In NWBC, model a pool distribution scenario for customer CUST##-22 via a hub in
Atlanta. For this purpose, create a hub called ATLANTA-## and assign the customer to
this hub. Use the data in the following table:
Table 15: Hub Details
Value
Location
ATLANTA-##
Location Type
1140
Description
Atlanta Hub
Country
US
Region
GA
City
Atlanta
ON
LY
Field
2. Assign the transshipment location. Use the data in the following table:
Table 16: Transshipment Location Details
Field
Value
Location
CUST##-22
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
67
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Field
Value
Transshipment Location
ATLANTA-##
3. A dedicated fleet is used for transportation from your shipping point SP3100 to your pool
point ATLANTA-##. In Customizing for SAP TM, create a means-of-transport POOL-##
and resource POOL-## by copying your means-of-transport FTL-99 and resource FTL-99.
R
4. In NWBC, define your new resource POOL-##. Change the means of transport from
FTL-99 to POOL-## in the General Data tab.
Table 17: New Resource Details
Value
Resource
FTL-99
Resource
POOL-##
Short Description
Pool Resource for Group ##
US
TO
ME
Field
5. The new means of transport now needs to be registered in the transportation network. In
NWBC, create a transportation lane from SP3100 to your pool point ATLANTA-##. Use
the data in the following table to generate the proposal:
Table 18: Transportation Lane Proposal Details
Field
Value
SP3100
RC
Start Location
Dest. Location
ATLANTA-##
Means of Transport
POOL-##
Start Date
Beginning of current year
FO
End Date
31.12.9999
Select
Priority/Costs
Priority
Cost Origin
Internal Costs
LY
Relevant to Carrier Sel.
6. Assign carriers CAR##-01 and CAR##-02 to your new means of transport. Use the data in
the following tables:
ON
Table 19: Carrier for Means of Transport Data
68
Field
Value
BP Number
CAR##-01
Transportation cost
0,45 KM
Priority
1
Consider carrier for P2P Tendering
Select
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Pooled Shipments
Field
Value
Carrier Priority for P2P Tendering
1
Value
BP Number
CAR##-02
Transportation cost
0,55 KM
Priority
2
Consider carrier for P2P Tendering
Select the checkbox
Carrier Priority for P2P Tendering
2
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
Field
R
Table 20: Carrier for Means of Transport Data (2)
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
69
Unit 1
Solution 7
R
Create a Transportation Network to Support
Pooled Distribution
ME
Business Example
US
TO
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create a transportation network to
support pooled distribution.
Note:
In this exercise, you create the following items that are required for one or more
subsequent exercises in the course:
ATLANTA-##
●
POOL-##
●
RESOURCE POOL-##
FO
RC
●
1. In NWBC, model a pool distribution scenario for customer CUST##-22 via a hub in
Atlanta. For this purpose, create a hub called ATLANTA-## and assign the customer to
this hub. Use the data in the following table:
Table 15: Hub Details
Value
Location
ATLANTA-##
Location Type
1140
Description
Atlanta Hub
Country
US
Region
GA
City
Atlanta
ON
LY
Field
a) Choose Master Data → Transportation Network → Locations → Define Location, and
enter the data in the table provided.
b) Choose Create.
c) In the Address tab, assign the country and region.
d) Save your data and exit the screen.
70
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Pooled Shipments
2. Assign the transshipment location. Use the data in the following table:
Table 16: Transshipment Location Details
Field
Value
Location
CUST##-22
Transshipment Location
ATLANTA-##
R
a) Choose Master Data → Transportation Network → Locations → Assign
Transshipment Location.
ME
b) Select the Locations radio button, and enter the data in the table provided.
c) Choose Create / Update Assignments.
US
TO
3. A dedicated fleet is used for transportation from your shipping point SP3100 to your pool
point ATLANTA-##. In Customizing for SAP TM, create a means-of-transport POOL-##
and resource POOL-## by copying your means-of-transport FTL-99 and resource FTL-99.
a) Choose SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Master
Data → Resource → Define Means of Transport.
b) Select your Means of Transport FTL-99.
c) Choose
Copy As.
d) Enter the means-of-transport POOL-##.
FO
RC
e) Press ENTER on your keyboard to continue through the warning message.
f) Save your data and exit Customizing.
4. In NWBC, define your new resource POOL-##. Change the means of transport from
FTL-99 to POOL-## in the General Data tab.
Table 17: New Resource Details
Value
Resource
FTL-99
Resource
POOL-##
Short Description
Pool Resource for Group ##
LY
Field
ON
a) Choose Master Data → Resources → Define Resource.
b) Enter the resource FTL-99 and choose
Change Resource.
c) Select your resource FTL-99 and choose
Copy Resources.
d) In the Copy Resources dialog box, in the To screen area, enter the resource and
description from the table.
e) Choose
Copy.
f) Select the resource POOL-##.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
71
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
g) In the General Data tab, change the Means of Transport from FTL-99 to POOL-##.
h) Save your data.
5. The new means of transport now needs to be registered in the transportation network. In
NWBC, create a transportation lane from SP3100 to your pool point ATLANTA-##. Use
the data in the following table to generate the proposal:
Table 18: Transportation Lane Proposal Details
Value
Start Location
SP3100
Dest. Location
ATLANTA-##
Means of Transport
POOL-##
Start Date
Beginning of current year
End Date
31.12.9999
Priority/Costs
ME
US
TO
Relevant to Carrier Sel.
R
Field
Select
Priority
Cost Origin
Internal Costs
a) Choose Master Data → Transportation Network → Transportation Lanes → Define
Transportation Lane.
c) Choose
RC
b) Enter the start and destination location.
Create.
d) In the Means of Transport screen area, choose
Create.
FO
e) Enter the data from the Transportation Lane Proposal Details table.
f) Choose Generate Proposal.
g) Choose
Copy and Close, to accept the data.
LY
h) Save your data.
6. Assign carriers CAR##-01 and CAR##-02 to your new means of transport. Use the data in
the following tables:
Table 19: Carrier for Means of Transport Data
Value
BP Number
CAR##-01
Transportation cost
0,45 KM
Priority
1
Consider carrier for P2P Tendering
Select
ON
Field
72
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Pooled Shipments
Field
Value
Carrier Priority for P2P Tendering
1
Value
BP Number
CAR##-02
Transportation cost
0,55 KM
Priority
2
Consider carrier for P2P Tendering
Select the checkbox
Carrier Priority for P2P Tendering
2
ME
Field
R
Table 20: Carrier for Means of Transport Data (2)
US
TO
a) In the Carrier for Means of Transport screen area, select your MoT and choose
Create.
b) Enter the data from the Carrier for Means of Transport table.
c) Choose
Copy and Close, to accept the MoT data.
d) Select your MoT repeat steps a-c using the data for CAR##-02.
ON
LY
FO
RC
e) Save your data.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
73
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
Multi-Stage Transportation
The VSR optimizer evaluates the various possibilities for transporting the selected freight
units. It then opts for pooled distribution whenever it is cost-effective to do so. In a standard
pooled distribution process, the VSR optimizer creates one freight order to transport the
cargo to the transshipment location. It then creates a second freight order to transport the
cargo out of the transshipment location.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Other scenarios are also possible. Multiple freight orders allow splitting up of resource
assignment, carrier assignment, and other downstream planning and execution activities.
74
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Exercise 8
Create Pooled Freight Orders
R
Business Example
ME
Sue, the SAP consultant, now wants to verify that using the pool point is a valid option in the
transportation network. Sue needs to include the newly created means of transport in the
planning configuration.
US
TO
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the means of transport, POOL-##, that your
created in the exercise Create a Transportation Network to Support Pooled
Distribution.
1. In NWBC, create a new capacity selection setting, CAPA-POOL-##, by copying your
capacity selection settings CAPA-99. Replace LTL-99 with POOL-##.
RC
2. In NWBC, create a new planning cost setting COST-POOL-## by copying your existing
planning cost settings TM211–COST-##. Replace LTL-99 with POOL-##. Adjust the fixed
cost for POOL-## to 1. Remove the cost function and unit of measure from means of
transport FTL-99.
3. In NWBC, create a new planning profile PLAN-POOL-## by copying your existing planning
profile TM211–PLAN-##. Replace planning cost settings and capacity selection settings
with COST-POOL-## and CAPA-POOL-## respectively.
FO
4. Create a sales order for CUST##-22 using the following data:
Table 21: Sales Order
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to
CUST##-22
PO Number
TM200_00
Material
PRODTM-00
Quantity
50
ON
LY
Field
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
75
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
5. In NWBC, start the transportation cockpit from the OTR worklist by selecting the OTR
created in the previous step, and the selection planning profile PLAN-POOL-##. In the
transportation cockpit, create a transportation proposal for the selected freight unit.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
6. How many options are created?
76
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Solution 8
Create Pooled Freight Orders
R
Business Example
ME
Sue, the SAP consultant, now wants to verify that using the pool point is a valid option in the
transportation network. Sue needs to include the newly created means of transport in the
planning configuration.
US
TO
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the means of transport, POOL-##, that your
created in the exercise Create a Transportation Network to Support Pooled
Distribution.
1. In NWBC, create a new capacity selection setting, CAPA-POOL-##, by copying your
capacity selection settings CAPA-99. Replace LTL-99 with POOL-##.
a) Choose Application Administration → Planning → Overview Settings.
RC
b) On the Active Queries screen area, choose All Capacity Selection Settings.
c) Select CAPA-99.
d) Choose
Copy.
e) In the Capacity Selection Settings field, enter CAPA-POOL-##.
FO
f) Replace LTL-99 with POOL-##.
g) Save your data.
LY
2. In NWBC, create a new planning cost setting COST-POOL-## by copying your existing
planning cost settings TM211–COST-##. Replace LTL-99 with POOL-##. Adjust the fixed
cost for POOL-## to 1. Remove the cost function and unit of measure from means of
transport FTL-99.
a) Choose Application Administration → Planning → Overview Settings.
ON
b) From the Active Queries screen area, choose All Planning Costs Settings.
c) Select TM211_COST_##.
d) Choose
Copy.
e) In the Planning Cost Settings field, enter COST-POOL-##.
f) Replace LTL-99 with POOL-## and adjust the fixed cost for POOL-##.
g) Select FTL-99.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
77
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
This opens two new tabs.
h) On the Cost Functions tab page, delete the Cost Function and Unit of Measure.
i) Save your data.
3. In NWBC, create a new planning profile PLAN-POOL-## by copying your existing planning
profile TM211–PLAN-##. Replace planning cost settings and capacity selection settings
with COST-POOL-## and CAPA-POOL-## respectively.
b) On the Active Queries screen area, choose All Planning Profiles.
d) Choose
ME
c) Select TM211_PLAN_##.
R
a) Choose Application Administration → Planning → Overview Settings.
Copy.
e) On the Planning Profile tab page, enter PLAN-POOL-##.
g) Save your data.
US
TO
f) In the Profile Assignments screen area, replace the Capacity Selection Settings and
Planning Cost Settings.
4. Create a sales order for CUST##-22 using the following data:
Table 21: Sales Order
Field
Value
Order Type
RC
ZT00
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
FO
Sold-to
CUST##-22
TM200_00
Material
PRODTM-00
Quantity
50
LY
PO Number
a) In SAP ERP, enter transaction code VA01.
b) Enter the data from the table.
ON
c) Save your new sales order and record the number.
5. In NWBC, start the transportation cockpit from the OTR worklist by selecting the OTR
created in the previous step, and the selection planning profile PLAN-POOL-##. In the
transportation cockpit, create a transportation proposal for the selected freight unit.
a) Choose ERP Logistics Integration → Worklist → Overview Transportation
Requirements.
b) Select the row corresponding to the sales order number created in Step 4.
78
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Pooled Shipments
c) Choose Start Transportation Cockpit.
d) In the Profile and Layout Sets screen, choose New.
e) In the new row, enter the planning profile PLAN-POOL-##. If the profile and layout sets
screen is not shown, choose Change Profile Selection screen to go to the Profile and
Layout Sets screen.
f) Save your data.
i) Choose Transportation Proposals.
6. How many options are created?
ME
h) Select the freight unit corresponding to CUST##-22.
R
g) Select the newly created row and choose Continue.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
Three options are shown with different costs. Option 1: SP3100 to ATLANTA-## using
POOL-## and continuing to CUST##-22 using FTL-99. Option 2: SP3100 to ATLANTA-##
using FTL-99 and continuing to CUST##-22 using FTL-99. Option 3: SP3100 direct to
CUST##-22 using FTL-99.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
79
Unit 1: Optimizer Planning
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Model the transportation network for pooled shipments
●
Create pooled freight orders
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
80
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Learning Assessment
A Vehicle capacity
X
B Driver experience
X
C Handling resources
X
D Depot location
US
TO
X
ME
Choose the correct answer.
R
1. Which of the following items is not a constraint considered by the VSR optimizer?
2. Using the planning cost settings, the optimizer can determine the best means of transport
to use.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
X
False
RC
X
FO
3. The SAP TM system creates a freight order directly via the freight unit building rule when
you save an FWM business document if the FWM business document only has one source
location and one destination location, if the FWM business document is subcontracted
and not consolidated with other FWM business documents, and if the FWM business
document can be delivered in one freight order, meaning there is no pre-carriage or oncarriage.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
X
False
ON
LY
X
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
81
Unit 1: Learning Assessment
4. To create carrier selection profiles in SAP TM, what is the correct menu path to choose?
Choose the correct answer.
A Planning → Selection Profiles → Create Selection Profile
X
B Planning → Planning Profiles → Create Planning Profile
X
C Planning → Planning Profile Settings → Carrier Selection Settings → Create
Carrier Selection Settings
X
D Planning → Capacity Selection Settings → Create Capacity Selection Settings
ME
R
X
5. Any freight order with more than one stage must visit at least one transshipment location.
X
True
X
False
US
TO
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
6. A transshipment location allows you to change the means-of-transport.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
X
False
ON
LY
FO
RC
X
82
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Learning Assessment - Answers
A Vehicle capacity
X
B Driver experience
X
C Handling resources
X
D Depot location
US
TO
X
ME
Choose the correct answer.
R
1. Which of the following items is not a constraint considered by the VSR optimizer?
2. Using the planning cost settings, the optimizer can determine the best means of transport
to use.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
X
False
RC
X
FO
3. The SAP TM system creates a freight order directly via the freight unit building rule when
you save an FWM business document if the FWM business document only has one source
location and one destination location, if the FWM business document is subcontracted
and not consolidated with other FWM business documents, and if the FWM business
document can be delivered in one freight order, meaning there is no pre-carriage or oncarriage.
LY
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
X
False
ON
X
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
83
Unit 1: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. To create carrier selection profiles in SAP TM, what is the correct menu path to choose?
Choose the correct answer.
A Planning → Selection Profiles → Create Selection Profile
X
B Planning → Planning Profiles → Create Planning Profile
X
C Planning → Planning Profile Settings → Carrier Selection Settings → Create
Carrier Selection Settings
X
D Planning → Capacity Selection Settings → Create Capacity Selection Settings
ME
R
X
5. Any freight order with more than one stage must visit at least one transshipment location.
X
True
X
False
US
TO
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
6. A transshipment location allows you to change the means-of-transport.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
FO
RC
X
False
ON
LY
X
84
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Optimizer Applications
Lesson 1
86
89
ME
Creating a Transportation Proposal
Exercise 9: Plan a Freight Order Using a Transportation Proposal
R
UNIT 2
Lesson 2
FO
RC
UNIT OBJECTIVES
92
97
103
111
117
US
TO
Describing Load Optimization Processes
Exercise 10: Create a Vehicle for Load Optimization
Exercise 11: Create Freight Units for Load Optimization
Exercise 12: Maintain Load Planning Settings
Exercise 13: Perform and Analyze Load Planning
Plan freight orders using transportation proposals
●
Create a vehicle for load optimization
●
Create freight units for load optimization
●
Maintain load planning settings
●
Perform load planning
ON
LY
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
85
Unit 2
Lesson 1
Creating a Transportation Proposal
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Plan freight orders using transportation proposals
Transportation Proposals
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson provides an overview of the transportation proposal functionality offered by SAP
Transportation Management (SAP TM).
A transportation proposal defines how a freight unit can be transported through a
transportation network (which is defined by locations, transshipment locations,
transportation zones, transportation lanes, vehicle resources, schedules, and bookings). For a
given transportation demand (freight unit), the system determines a set of alternative
transportation proposals. The transportation proposal functionality serves the following
purposes:
To create the stages upfront, for example, to choose the option of ocean transport,
because the customer has placed their order well in advance and this is the cheapest
choice. In this use case, no freight orders are created based on the proposal result, but
only the stage information is stored. This allows the task of planning the different stages to
be assigned to different planners and to be completed at different times.
ON
LY
●
To help the user identify the different transportation options for a freight unit. In a complex
network, in which end-to-end transportation requires several stages, transportation
proposals are an easy way to make the different options transparent. Transportation
proposals can differ in relation to routing, means of transport, and time required. Each of
these variables can increase or reduce costs, and the proposals thus provide the planner
responsible with the necessary information to make an appropriate choice.
FO
RC
●
Figure 18: Visualization Of Transportation Proposals
86
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating a Transportation Proposal
Entry Points for Transportation Proposal Determination
The entry points for transportation proposal determination are as follows:
●
Forwarding Order → Stages → Actual Route → Define Route
●
Transportation Cockpit → Select Freight Unit(s) → Transportation Proposal
Layout of the Transportation Proposal Result
●
Route variation
●
Carrier variation
●
Departure date variation
●
Time relevance
●
Cost variance
US
TO
Transportation Proposal: User-Defined Preferences
ME
R
The layout of the transportation proposal result screen can be flexibly configured, similar to
the transportation cockpit layout. The results can be displayed in a table format or visualized
on a map. If the transportation proposal has been carried out for several freight units
(because these compete for the same capacity, for example), the solution is always for a valid
combination of assignments. In the table-based layout, each stage is shown in a separate line.
In complex networks, there could be millions of routing options for a given transport, with only
minor differences between them. Depending on the objective of the planner, results can be
presented according to defined criteria.
ON
LY
FO
RC
Preferences can be weighed against each other on the basis of relevance: none, low, medium,
or high.
Figure 19: Transportation Proposal User Interface
Features of the Transportation Proposal
The features of the transportation proposal are as follows:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
87
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
●
●
●
Implicit definition of transshipment locations by schedules and freight bookings (simplified
definition of transportation network)
Mode of transport constraints on freight unit and freight unit stage level
Fast determination of transportation proposals, yielding more alternatives according to
predefined variation criteria (for example, route, carrier, and departure date), and trade-off
between time and cost (controlled variation according to pre-defined criteria)
Consideration of preferences for locations, carrier, mode of transport, dates, and times.
●
Display of multiple solutions on the result map
Rough planning (detailed planning on the main leg and rough planning for pre leg and
subsequent leg, based on rough definition of transportation durations)
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
●
R
●
88
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Exercise 9
R
Plan a Freight Order Using a Transportation
Proposal
ME
Business Example
As a transportation planner, you need to be able to generate transportation proposals so that
you can make an informed choice on all transportation options available.
US
TO
1. Create a transportation proposal for the sales order to customer CUST##-26. Enter the
transportation cockpit with the freight unit selection profile FU_SEL_3100_## and
planning profile TM211_PLAN_##.
2. How many different transportation proposals are presented?
3. Choose
Expand All to show the different carrier options and costs.
ON
LY
FO
RC
4. How many carriers are proposed as possible carriers? What is the difference between
them, and why are these carriers proposed?
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
89
Unit 2
Solution 9
R
Plan a Freight Order Using a Transportation
Proposal
ME
Business Example
As a transportation planner, you need to be able to generate transportation proposals so that
you can make an informed choice on all transportation options available.
US
TO
1. Create a transportation proposal for the sales order to customer CUST##-26. Enter the
transportation cockpit with the freight unit selection profile FU_SEL_3100_## and
planning profile TM211_PLAN_##.
a) In NWBC, choose Planning → Planning → Transportation Cockpit.
b) In the Profile and Layout Sets selection screen, select the profile with the selection
profile (FUs) FU_SEL_3100_## and planning profile TM211_PLAN_##, then choose
Continue.
c) In the transportation cockpit, locate the freight unit for the sales order to CUST##–28.
FO
RC
d) Select the row for this freight unit and choose Transportation Proposals.
2. How many different transportation proposals are presented?
The system offers two options - one using FTL-99, the other using LTL-99.
3. Choose
Expand All to show the different carrier options and costs.
4. How many carriers are proposed as possible carriers? What is the difference between
them, and why are these carriers proposed?
ON
LY
Four carriers are proposed. The difference between them is the means of transport (MTr)
- two carriers are proposed for each of the two MTrs. This leads to different transportation
durations between the two proposals. These carriers are proposed because of the
transportation network setup. Customer CUST##-26 belongs to transportation zone USMOUNTAIN and US-99. In the transportation lane that runs between SP3100 (the source
location) and US-MOUNTAIN, LTL-99 is defined. On the intra zone transportation lane for
US-99, FTL-99 is defined.
90
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating a Transportation Proposal
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Plan freight orders using transportation proposals
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
91
Unit 2
Lesson 2
Describing Load Optimization Processes
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson examines the necessary maintenance of capacity master data for load
maintenance. You learn about freight unit creation for load optimization, and you can create a
vehicle for load optimization.
You look at freight unit dimensions and can practise creating freight units for load
optimization.
US
TO
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Create a vehicle for load optimization
●
Create freight units for load optimization
●
Maintain load planning settings
●
Perform load planning
FO
RC
●
Load Optimization
During truck planning, rules are applied to fulfill legal restrictions. For example, certain axle
loads may not be exceeded. In addition, a certain loading sequence of the goods to be
transported optimizes the transportation plan. Load planning concerns the loading of goods
to be transported in an optimized manner into a transportation unit, be it be a truck, trailer, or
container resource.
You can plan the loading space of box trucks, trailers, semi-trailers, and containers in the
transportation cockpit or directly in one of the following business documents:
Road freight order
●
Trailer unit
●
Container unit
LY
●
ON
Planning is carried out at the level of business document items. Load planning returns an
approximate calculation of how the available loading space can be optimally used, taking into
account the maximum axle loads and the maximum weight of a vehicle resource. The
calculation is based on the master data that you enter for the resource.
In automatic load planning, also known as load optimization, the load optimizer creates a load
plan for your business document. It considers capacity restrictions in terms of the height,
width, weight, and length of the loading space. For vehicle resources with two axle groups, it
also considers the maximum axle load.
92
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
RC
Figure 20: Vehicle Capacity
US
TO
ME
R
Vehicle Capacity
Vehicle Capacity Attributes
●
VSR:
One-dimensional, for example, volume or mass.
Up to eight dimensions.
FO
-
-
VSO:
-
Three-dimensional, for example, pallet or box size.
-
Visual representation.
LY
●
●
Vehicle capacity is maintained in vehicle resource master data.
ON
In vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) planning, SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM)
considers the resource capacities of weight and volume. However, the new load planning
function requires much more information on master data level. Not only are weight and
volume limitations considered more precisely, but weight distribution of axles is also planned.
This is required to fulfill legal restrictions when creating a load plan.
Within the resource master data, on the Physical Properties tab, there are additional capacity
and resource configuration fields to maintain. You can specify attributes regarding dimension,
weight, and type of resource. One specific attribute is the definition of axle groups. From SAP
TM 9.1, a resource viewer (master data transaction) is offered to display the resource
configuration.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
93
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
US
TO
ME
R
Vehicle Types
RC
Figure 21: Vehicle Types Example 1: Box Truck
The table, Box Truck, provides a detailed explanation of the elements of the figure, Vehicle
Types Example 1: Box Truck:
FO
Table 22: Box Truck
Name in the Master Data
Description
a1
Axle Group Distance 1
Distance between axle group
1 and the front of the box
truck
c
Cargo body distance
Distance between the start of
the loading space and the
front of the box truck
a2
Axle Group Distance 2
Distance between axle group
2 and the front of the box
truck
d
Connector Distance
Distance between the trailer
coupling of the box truck and
the front of the vehicle
s2
Distance Between Axles
Distance within axle group 2
h
Interior Height
Height of the loading space
ON
LY
Measurement in Figure
94
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
Measurement in Figure
Name in the Master Data
Description
l
Interior Length
Length of the loading space
US
TO
ME
R
Vehicle Types Example 2: Semi-Trailer
FO
RC
Figure 22: Vehicle Types Example 2: Semi-Trailer
The table, Semi-Trailer, provides a detailed explanation of the elements of the figure, Vehicle
Types Example 2: Semi-Trailer:
Table 23: Semi-Trailer
Name in the Master Data
Description
a1
Axle Group Distance 1
Distance between axle group
1 and the front of the trailer
s1
Distance Between Axles
Distance within axle group 1
k
King Pin Distance
Distance between the king
pin and the front of the trailer
h
Interior Height
Height of the loading space
l
Interior Length
Length of the loading space
p
Split Deck Position
Position in the trailer at which
you have added the split deck
ON
LY
Measurement in Figure
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
95
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
96
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Exercise 10
Create a Vehicle for Load Optimization
R
Business Example
ME
As a transportation planner, you need to generate load plans that adhere to defined load
planning rules. You are tasked to demonstrate that process and create corresponding master
data.
US
TO
Note:
In this exercise you create the resource, FTL-##, that is required for one or more
subsequent exercises in this course.
1. Create a vehicle resource FTL-## by copying the vehicle resource FTL-99. Maintain the
following dimensions:
Table 24: Phys. Properties Data
Field
12000
FO
RC
Max Gross Weight
Value
KG
Max Length
10
Max Width
2,5
Max Height
3
UoM
M
Number of Axles
3
First Axle Group — Axle Type
1–Single Axle
ON
LY
UoM
First Axle Group — Axle Group Distance
8
First Axle Group — UoM
M
First Axle Group — Max Weight on Group
5000
First Axle Group — UoM
KG
Second Axle Group — Axle Type
2 — Tandem Axle
Second Axle Group — Axle Group Distance
2
Second Axle Group — Distance between
Axles
1,5
Second Axle Group — UoM
M
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
97
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
Field
Value
Second Axe Group — Max Weight on Group
8000
Second Axle Group — UoM
KG
Payload weight
12000
UoM
KG
Internal Length
10
Internal Width
2,5
Internal Height
3
UoM
Table 26: Copy Resources
Field
Resource
M
Value
FTL-##
Load Planning Group ##
FO
RC
Short Description
ME
Value
US
TO
Field
R
Table 25: Capacity Data
2. In the Resource Viewer, check your resource by verifying that the data entered in Step 1 is
maintained in the Resource Configurator screen area. Review the 3D model also.
ON
LY
3. Examine how the 3D model changes if you enter a split deck at a position of 1,5 in the
Resource Configurator screen area.
98
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Solution 10
Create a Vehicle for Load Optimization
R
Business Example
ME
As a transportation planner, you need to generate load plans that adhere to defined load
planning rules. You are tasked to demonstrate that process and create corresponding master
data.
US
TO
Note:
In this exercise you create the resource, FTL-##, that is required for one or more
subsequent exercises in this course.
1. Create a vehicle resource FTL-## by copying the vehicle resource FTL-99. Maintain the
following dimensions:
Table 24: Phys. Properties Data
Field
12000
FO
RC
Max Gross Weight
Value
KG
Max Length
10
Max Width
2,5
Max Height
3
UoM
M
Number of Axles
3
First Axle Group — Axle Type
1–Single Axle
ON
LY
UoM
First Axle Group — Axle Group Distance
8
First Axle Group — UoM
M
First Axle Group — Max Weight on Group
5000
First Axle Group — UoM
KG
Second Axle Group — Axle Type
2 — Tandem Axle
Second Axle Group — Axle Group Distance
2
Second Axle Group — Distance between
Axles
1,5
Second Axle Group — UoM
M
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
99
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
Field
Value
Second Axe Group — Max Weight on Group
8000
Second Axle Group — UoM
KG
Payload weight
12000
UoM
KG
Internal Length
10
Internal Width
2,5
Internal Height
3
UoM
ME
Value
US
TO
Field
R
Table 25: Capacity Data
M
Table 26: Copy Resources
Field
Value
Resource
FTL-##
Load Planning Group ##
FO
RC
Short Description
a) In NWBC, choose Master Data → Resources → Define Resource.
b) Enter the resource FTL-99 and choose Enter.
c) Select the resource FTL-99 and choose
Copy Resources.
d) On the Copy Resources dialog box, in the To screen area, enter the resource FTL-##.
Use the data in the Copy Resources table provided.
e) Choose
Copy Object.
LY
f) Choose the row containing the new resource FTL-##.
g) In the Phys. Properties tab, enter the data from the Phys. Properties Data table in the
step.
ON
h) In the Capacity tab, enter the data from the Capacity Data table in the step.
i) Save your data.
2. In the Resource Viewer, check your resource by verifying that the data entered in Step 1 is
maintained in the Resource Configurator screen area. Review the 3D model also.
a) In NWBC, choose Master Data → Resources → Resource Viewer.
b) In the Search Criteria screen area, search for your resource by entering FTL-## as the
search criteria for the vehicle resource.
100
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
c) Choose Search.
d) In the Resources screen area, select your resource FTL-##.
e) Close all screen areas except for the Resource Configurator screen area.
f) Check that the values for the interior dimensions (length, height, width) and the data
for the axle groups is maintained.
g) Hide the Resource Configurator screen area and open the 3D model.
R
3. Examine how the 3D model changes if you enter a split deck at a position of 1,5 in the
Resource Configurator screen area.
ME
a) In the Resource Configurator screen area, enter a value of 1,5 in the Split Deck
Position field and press Enter on your keyboard.
b) Close the Resource Configurator screen area, and open the 3D Model screen area.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
c) In the 3D Model screen area, open the context menu and choose Switch View → Right.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
101
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
Freight Unit Dimensions
Dimensions of individual packages are determined from the business document items; that is,
freight unit items are the basis for load planning and load optimization in the transportation
cockpit.
●
Height
●
Width
●
Gross weight
ME
Length
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
●
R
The following are relevant dimensions:
102
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Exercise 11
Create Freight Units for Load Optimization
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create freight units for load
optimization to support this.
US
TO
Note:
You must complete the exercise, Create a Vehicle for Load Optimization, before
attempting this exercise.
This exercise requires you to use the data, FTL-##, that you created in the
exercise “Create a Vehicle for Load Optimization”.
In this exercise, the system automatically generates a forwarding order and
freight unit that are required for one or more subsequent exercises in the course.
FO
RC
1. Create a forwarding order using forwarding order type FWOX and movement type T2C.
The order is from SP3100 (source location, shipper, ordering party) to CUST##-25
(destination location, consignee). The pick up date is Tuesday of next week, and the
delivery date is Friday of next week. Create the following six items in the forwarding order:
Table 27: Order Items
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Item
10
20
30
40
50
60
Item Type
PRD
PRD
PRD
PRD
PRD
PRD
Gross
Weight
2000
500
100
2000
500
100
Gross
Weight
UoM
KG
KG
KG
KG
KG
KG
Length
5
3
1
5
3
1
Width
1
1
1
1
1
1
Height
1
1,4
2
1
1,4
2,5
UoM
M
M
M
M
M
M
ON
LY
Field
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
103
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
Table 28: Order Details
Value
Screen Area
Ordering Party
SP3100
Business Partner
Shipper
SP3100
Business Partner
Consignee
CUST##-25
Business Partner
Movement Type
T2C
General Terms
Source Location
SP3100
Source
Pick-up-Date
Tuesday of next week
Source
Destination Location
CUST##=25
Delivery Date
Friday of next week
ME
R
Field
Destination
Destination
US
TO
2. Verify that a freight unit is created automatically for your forwarding order.
3. Verify that the dimension information (length, width, height) is carried over into the unit
items.
ON
LY
FO
RC
4. Record your freight unit number.
104
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Solution 11
Create Freight Units for Load Optimization
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support truck-load and less-than-truck-load
planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to create freight units for load
optimization to support this.
US
TO
Note:
You must complete the exercise, Create a Vehicle for Load Optimization, before
attempting this exercise.
This exercise requires you to use the data, FTL-##, that you created in the
exercise “Create a Vehicle for Load Optimization”.
In this exercise, the system automatically generates a forwarding order and
freight unit that are required for one or more subsequent exercises in the course.
FO
RC
1. Create a forwarding order using forwarding order type FWOX and movement type T2C.
The order is from SP3100 (source location, shipper, ordering party) to CUST##-25
(destination location, consignee). The pick up date is Tuesday of next week, and the
delivery date is Friday of next week. Create the following six items in the forwarding order:
Table 27: Order Items
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Value
Item
10
20
30
40
50
60
Item Type
PRD
PRD
PRD
PRD
PRD
PRD
Gross
Weight
2000
500
100
2000
500
100
Gross
Weight
UoM
KG
KG
KG
KG
KG
KG
Length
5
3
1
5
3
1
Width
1
1
1
1
1
1
Height
1
1,4
2
1
1,4
2,5
UoM
M
M
M
M
M
M
ON
LY
Field
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
105
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
Table 28: Order Details
Value
Screen Area
Ordering Party
SP3100
Business Partner
Shipper
SP3100
Business Partner
Consignee
CUST##-25
Business Partner
Movement Type
T2C
General Terms
Source Location
SP3100
Source
Pick-up-Date
Tuesday of next week
Source
Destination Location
CUST##=25
Delivery Date
Friday of next week
ME
R
Field
Destination
Destination
US
TO
a) In NWBC, choose Forwarding Order Management → Forwarding Order → Create
Forwarding Order.
b) Enter FWOX in the Forwarding Order Type field.
c) Choose Continue.
d) Enter the data in the Order Details table.
e) In the Items table, choose Insert → Product.
FO
RC
f) Enter the data from the table, repeating Substep e each time you want to create a new
row.
g) Save your data and record your forwarding order number.
2. Verify that a freight unit is created automatically for your forwarding order.
a) In NWBC, choose Forwarding Order Management → Forwarding Order → Display
Forwarding Order.
ON
LY
b) Select the Document Flow tab.
106
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
Note:
If more than one freight unit is created, cancel the existing freight units.
a) Choose the freight unit with the lowest number.
b) Choose Edit.
d) In the warning message that appears, choose OK.
e) Save your data.
R
c) Choose Cancel Document.
ME
f) Repeat Steps a-e for any additional freight units that have been
created.
US
TO
g) Return to the forwarding order and choose Refresh.
c) One freight unit is created for the forwarding order.
3. Verify that the dimension information (length, width, height) is carried over into the unit
items.
a) In the Document Flow tab of the forwarding order, choose the Business Document
number to navigate into the freight unit.
b) Select an item in the Item screen area.
RC
c) On the General Data tab, verify that the values for length, width, and height are
maintained.
4. Record your freight unit number.
ON
LY
FO
The freight unit number varies.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
107
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
Load Planning Settings
Load planning settings define a process controller strategy. This strategy defines a sequence
of methods to be executed for the load planning and enables a flexible combination of
standard and custom logic. With the strategy, it is possible to define a set of rules to be
applied when optimizing the load. The rules can be given a priority, deactivated to test the
planning with a different rule set, and adjusted with certain attributes.
R
Load Planning Settings Definition
Load planning strategy
●
Load optimization runtime
●
Load planning rules (including their priorities and parameters)
ME
●
Load Planning Rules
US
TO
Load planning settings are assigned in the planning profile. By assigning a planning profile in
the freight order type, different load planning settings can be used for different freight order
types.
In automatic load planning, you can define rules to be considered by the system during a load
optimization run. You can choose between the following types of rules:
Rules that apply to automatic planning for all resource types
●
Rules that apply only to the automatic load planning of box trucks
●
Rules that apply only to the automatic planning of trailers and semi-trailers
●
FO
RC
●
Rules that apply only to the automatic load planning of the upper decks of double-deck
trailers
You can define different rules for the lower and upper deck of double-deck trailers.
The combination of stack, row, and line indicates the exact position of each package loaded
onto the resource. Packages loaded on top of each other form a stack. Packages loaded next
to each other from left to right form a row. The first row of a deck is always placed towards the
start of the loading space. Packages loaded one behind the other from front to back form a
line. The first line of a deck is always on the left side of the deck in the direction of travel.
LY
Rules for Load Planning
Stack height ascending in driving direction
●
Stack height descending in driving direction
●
Maximum height difference of adjacent stacks
ON
●
108
●
Maximum height difference of stacks within a row
●
Maximum height difference of stacks within a line
●
Penalty for packages that cannot be loaded based on weight
●
Penalty for packages that cannot be loaded based on weight multiplied by volume
●
Packages with high density must be at the bottom of the stack
●
Packages can be positioned anywhere in the stack regardless of weight and density
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
US
TO
ME
R
Features of Load Planning Rules
Figure 23: Load Planning Rules Example: Loading Pattern
Load planning rules are characterized by the following features:
Loading pattern
●
Orientation
ON
LY
FO
RC
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
109
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
110
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Exercise 12
Maintain Load Planning Settings
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support its truck-load and less-than-truckload planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to maintain load planning settings to
do this.
Item
US
TO
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the items, created in previous tasks, as follows:
Created in the Task
Freight Unit [NUMBER]
Create Freight Units for Load Optimization
TM211_PLAN_##
Create Planning Cost Settings
FO
RC
In this exercise, you create the following items, that are required for one or more
subsequent exercises in the course:
●
LOAD_PLAN_##
●
CAPA_LOAD_##
●
LOAD_PLAN_LAYOUT_##
1. Create load planning settings LOAD_PLAN_##. Assign the load planning rule 1000 (stack
height ascending in driving direction) with priority 1 (high) to your load planning settings
LOAD_PLAN_##. Use the data in the following table:
ON
LY
Table 29: Load Planning Settings
Field
Value
Load Planning Settings
LOAD_PLAN_##
Description
Load Planning Settings for Group
##
Load Planning Strategy
ALP_DEF
Runtime
10
2. Assign your load planning settings LOAD_PLAN_## to your planning profile
TM211_PLAN_##. Change the capacity selection by copying capacity selection settings
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
111
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
CAPA-99 to your own settings CAPA_LOAD_## and add vehicle resource FTL-## to your
selection of vehicle resources. Use the data in the following tables:
Table 30: Capacity Selection Settings 1
Value
Profile
CAPA_LOAD_##
Description
Capacity Selection for Load Planning ##
Table 31: Capacity Selection Settings 2
ME
R
Field
Value
Attributes for Vehicle Resource Selection
VEHICLERES_ID
Sign
Inclusive
Option
Value
US
TO
Field
=
FTL-##
ON
LY
FO
RC
3. Create a transportation cockpit layout with load planning enabled.
112
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Solution 12
Maintain Load Planning Settings
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support its truck-load and less-than-truckload planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to maintain load planning settings to
do this.
Item
US
TO
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the items, created in previous tasks, as follows:
Created in the Task
Freight Unit [NUMBER]
Create Freight Units for Load Optimization
TM211_PLAN_##
Create Planning Cost Settings
FO
RC
In this exercise, you create the following items, that are required for one or more
subsequent exercises in the course:
●
LOAD_PLAN_##
●
CAPA_LOAD_##
●
LOAD_PLAN_LAYOUT_##
1. Create load planning settings LOAD_PLAN_##. Assign the load planning rule 1000 (stack
height ascending in driving direction) with priority 1 (high) to your load planning settings
LOAD_PLAN_##. Use the data in the following table:
ON
LY
Table 29: Load Planning Settings
Field
Value
Load Planning Settings
LOAD_PLAN_##
Description
Load Planning Settings for Group
##
Load Planning Strategy
ALP_DEF
Runtime
10
a) In NWBC, choose Application Administration → Planning → Planning Profile
Settings → Load Planning Settings → Create Load Planning Settings.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
113
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
b) Enter the data in the Load Planning Settings table.
c) In the Load Planning Rules screen area, choose Insert.
d) In the Load Planning Rule field, enter 1000.
e) Save your data.
R
2. Assign your load planning settings LOAD_PLAN_## to your planning profile
TM211_PLAN_##. Change the capacity selection by copying capacity selection settings
CAPA-99 to your own settings CAPA_LOAD_## and add vehicle resource FTL-## to your
selection of vehicle resources. Use the data in the following tables:
ME
Table 30: Capacity Selection Settings 1
Value
Profile
CAPA_LOAD_##
Description
Capacity Selection for Load Planning ##
US
TO
Field
Table 31: Capacity Selection Settings 2
Field
Value
Attributes for Vehicle Resource Selection
VEHICLERES_ID
Sign
Inclusive
=
FO
RC
Option
Value
FTL-##
a) In NWBC, choose Application Administration → Planning → Planning Profiles → Edit
Planning Profile.
b) In the Planning Profile field, enter TM211_PLAN_## and choose Continue.
c) On the Planning Profile tab, in the Profile Assignments screen area, in the Load
Planning Settings field, enter LOAD_PLAN_##.
LY
d) Save your data.
e) Choose Edit.
f) Beside the Capacity Selection Settings field, choose New.
ON
g) Enter the data in the Capacity Selection Settings 1 table.
h) Choose OK.
i) Select the Capacity Selection Settings tab.
j) Enter a new line in the table using the data in the Capacity Selection Settings 2 table.
k) Save your data.
3. Create a transportation cockpit layout with load planning enabled.
114
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
a) Choose Application Administration → Planning → General Settings → Page Layouts
→ Page Layouts for Transportation Cockpit. To make the required changes to the
layout, use the data in the following table:
Table 32: Page Layout Details
Positions of Screen
Area
Width
Additional Info
Requirements Area
Top left
100%
n/a
Resources Area
Middle left
50%
Orders Area
Middle right
50%
R
Field
Select the
Freight Orders /
Freight Bookings
row
US
TO
●
●
Bottom left
FO
RC
Order Details Area
In the Display
column, select
all checkboxes
ME
●
100%
●
In the Details of
Freight Orders /
Freight Bookings
screen area, select the Load
Planning checkboxes
In the Display
column, select
the Utilization
and Load Plan
checkboxes
b) Choose New.
c) In the Page Layout field, enter LOAD_PLAN_LAYOUT_##.
LY
d) In the Visibility Pushbutton screen area, leave all the selected checkboxes and also
select the Explanation — Load Planning checkbox.
e) Below the Visibility Pushbutton screen area, there are a number of tabs. Use the data in
the Page Layout Details table to make the required changes.
ON
f) Save your data.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
115
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
Transportation Cockpit
The transportation cockpit layout can be enhanced to perform the following activities:
Initiate load planning (Orders screen area).
●
Initiate load planning (Transportation Unit screen area).
●
Visualize and analyze load planing (Order Details screen area).
●
Explain the load planning result (Visibility button).
R
●
ME
Load Planning
The load plan is the result of load planning. It provides you with an overview of how the loading
space available for transporting a business document is used currently.
US
TO
In both the transportation cockpit and in the business document, you can display the
complete load plan as a 3D load plan or a table load plan of business document items. In the
3D load plan, you can show or hide individual objects as well as entire rows, columns, or
stacks and fill them with different colors. Furthermore, you can show and hide gridlines in
your decks in the 3D load plan.
If items cannot be loaded, the load plan includes information on the loading sequence and the
exact position on the vehicle. In addition to the load plan, a load distribution is available for
each axle and the complete vehicle. This document proves that the load plan fulfills legal
requirements. An additional tab holds statistical indicators such as the used volume and area.
The Load Plan
FO
RC
The load plan contains the following information about the business document item:
Resource
●
Item in the resource
●
Loading sequence
●
Row, stack, and level in the loading space
●
Gross weight
●
Height, width, and length
●
Stackability
LY
●
Load Plan Analysis
The following is the load distribution and statistical data based on the current load plan:
Number of loaded business document items
●
Used area on the lower deck of your double-deck trailer
●
Utilization of the loading volume in percent
●
Used area on the upper deck of your double-deck trailer
●
Maximum weight for each axle group compared to the current weight for each axle group
●
Maximum trailing load compared to the current trailing load
ON
●
116
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Exercise 13
Perform and Analyze Load Planning
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support its truck-load and less-than-truckload planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to perform and analyze load planning
to support this implementation.
US
TO
Note:
In this exercise you are required to use the planning profile, TM211_PLAN_##, that
you created in the exercise “Maintain Load Planning Settings”.
1. In the transportation cockpit, create a freight order from SP3100 to CUST##–25 using
vehicle resource FTL-##. Manually drag the freight unit that you created in the exercise
Create Freight Units for Load Optimization to your vehicle resource. Use the following
profiles to enter the transportation cockpit:
Field
Value
FU_SEL_3100_##
RC
Selection Profile (FUs)
FU_SEL_3100_##
Planning Profile
TM211_PLAN_##
Transportation Cockpit Layout
LOAD_PLAN_LAYOUT_##
FO
Selection Profile (FOs)
2. Execute load planning for the newly created freight order.
LY
3. How many items are loaded?
ON
4. Review the load plan. What is the execution status at the source location SP3100?
5. Review the load distribution. What is the total utilization?
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
117
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
6. What is the utilization of axle group 1 and axle group 2?
R
7. What is the floor size of the cargo body? How much floor space is used?
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
8. What is the volume of the truck and how much of the volume has been used?
118
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Solution 13
Perform and Analyze Load Planning
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support its truck-load and less-than-truckload planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP consultant, needs to perform and analyze load planning
to support this implementation.
US
TO
Note:
In this exercise you are required to use the planning profile, TM211_PLAN_##, that
you created in the exercise “Maintain Load Planning Settings”.
1. In the transportation cockpit, create a freight order from SP3100 to CUST##–25 using
vehicle resource FTL-##. Manually drag the freight unit that you created in the exercise
Create Freight Units for Load Optimization to your vehicle resource. Use the following
profiles to enter the transportation cockpit:
Field
Value
FU_SEL_3100_##
RC
Selection Profile (FUs)
FU_SEL_3100_##
Planning Profile
TM211_PLAN_##
Transportation Cockpit Layout
LOAD_PLAN_LAYOUT_##
FO
Selection Profile (FOs)
a) In NWBC, choose Planning → Planning → Transportation Cockpit.
b) Choose New and enter the data from the table.
LY
c) Save your data.
d) Select the newly created line and choose Continue.
ON
e) In the transportation cockpit, select the freight unit to CUST##–25.
f) Drag the freight unit to the vehicle resource FTL-##.
A new freight order is created in the Freight Orders / Freight Bookings screen area. You
can identify the order by the $ symbol in the Document column.
g) Save your data.
2. Execute load planning for the newly created freight order.
a) Select the freight order in the Freight Orders / Freight Bookings screen area.
b) In the Freight Orders / Freight Bookings screen area, choose Load Planning.
c) Save your data.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
119
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
3. How many items are loaded?
6 of 6 items are loaded.
4. Review the load plan. What is the execution status at the source location SP3100?
The execution status is either Load Plan Up-to-Date or Not Loaded.
R
a) Select the freight order in the Freight Orders / Freight Bookings screen area.
5. Review the load distribution. What is the total utilization?
US
TO
The total utilization is 43%.
ME
b) In the Overview tab, in the Execution Status column, the execution status is displayed.
a) Select the freight order in the Freight Orders / Freight Bookings screen area.
b) Select the Load Plan tab, and then select the Load Distribution tab to view the required
data.
6. What is the utilization of axle group 1 and axle group 2?
FO
RC
The utilization of axle group 1 is 60% and the utilization of axle group 2 is 7%.
a) Select the freight order in the Freight Orders / Freight Bookings screen area.
b) Select the Load Plan tab, and then select the Load Distribution tab to view the required
data.
7. What is the floor size of the cargo body? How much floor space is used?
The floor size of the cargo body is 25m² and the used floor of the cargo body is 10m²
(40%).
LY
a) Select the freight order in the Freight Orders / Freight Bookings screen area.
b) Select the Load Plan tab, and then select the Statistics tab to view the required data.
8. What is the volume of the truck and how much of the volume has been used?
ON
The volume of the truck is 75m³ and 22,9m³ has been used.
a) Select the freight order in the Freight Orders / Freight Bookings screen area.
b) Select the Load Plan tab, and then select the Statistics tab to view the required data.
120
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Describing Load Optimization Processes
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Create a vehicle for load optimization
●
Create freight units for load optimization
●
Maintain load planning settings
●
Perform load planning
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
121
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 2: Optimizer Applications
122
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Learning Assessment
R
1. Why is rough planning sometimes sufficient for pre- and on-carriage?
ME
Choose the correct answer.
A Main carriage is the only portion of a transportation route that ever requires
planning.
X
B Pre-carriage and on-carriage are planned by the shipper and the customer
respectively, no detailed plans are required.
X
C A carrier or LSP may be extremely familiar with the routes for pre-carriage, for
example from a warehouse to an airport. The same degree of planning is therefore
not required for each individual shipment.
X
D Pre-carriage and on-carriage must always be planned with the same degree of
detail as the main carriage.
US
TO
X
2. Which of the following can be expressed as preferences for a transportation proposal?
RC
Choose the correct answers.
A Route variation
X
B Departure date variation
FO
X
X
C Driver preference
X
D Incompatibilities
3. Which of the following load planning rules are available in SAP TM 9.1?
ON
LY
Choose the correct answers.
X
A Stack height ascending in driving direction
X
B Packages with high density must be on top of the stack
X
C Maximum height difference of packages in one row
X
D U.S. Federal Bridge Formula
X
E Truck: Load all packages with the same loading formula
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
123
Unit 2: Learning Assessment
4. Load planning considers the business document items to determine the dimensions of the
individual packages.
X
True
X
False
5. For which of the following documents can you execute load planning?
A Freight order
X
B Transportation unit
X
C Forwarding order
X
D Handling resource
US
TO
X
ME
Choose the correct answers.
R
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
6. Load optimization can consider only one planning rule.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
X
False
ON
LY
FO
RC
X
124
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Learning Assessment - Answers
R
1. Why is rough planning sometimes sufficient for pre- and on-carriage?
ME
Choose the correct answer.
A Main carriage is the only portion of a transportation route that ever requires
planning.
X
B Pre-carriage and on-carriage are planned by the shipper and the customer
respectively, no detailed plans are required.
X
C A carrier or LSP may be extremely familiar with the routes for pre-carriage, for
example from a warehouse to an airport. The same degree of planning is therefore
not required for each individual shipment.
X
D Pre-carriage and on-carriage must always be planned with the same degree of
detail as the main carriage.
US
TO
X
RC
2. Which of the following can be expressed as preferences for a transportation proposal?
Choose the correct answers.
A Route variation
X
B Departure date variation
FO
X
X
C Driver preference
X
D Incompatibilities
LY
3. Which of the following load planning rules are available in SAP TM 9.1?
ON
Choose the correct answers.
X
A Stack height ascending in driving direction
X
B Packages with high density must be on top of the stack
X
C Maximum height difference of packages in one row
X
D U.S. Federal Bridge Formula
X
E Truck: Load all packages with the same loading formula
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
125
Unit 2: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. Load planning considers the business document items to determine the dimensions of the
individual packages.
X
True
X
False
5. For which of the following documents can you execute load planning?
A Freight order
X
B Transportation unit
X
C Forwarding order
X
D Handling resource
US
TO
X
ME
Choose the correct answers.
R
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
6. Load optimization can consider only one planning rule.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
FO
RC
X
False
ON
LY
X
126
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson 1
Creating Schedules
Exercise 14: Create a Carrier Schedule
Exercise 15: Generate Departures
Lesson 2
UNIT OBJECTIVES
128
133
139
143
US
TO
Analyzing the Results of the Path Finder
R
Advanced Transportation
Network
ME
UNIT 3
Create carrier schedules
●
Generate departures
●
Use the Path Finder to analyze results
ON
LY
FO
RC
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
127
Unit 3
Lesson 1
Creating Schedules
●
Create carrier schedules
●
Generate departures
ON
LY
FO
RC
Carrier Schedules
US
TO
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn about carrier schedules, schedule types, and schedule capacities. You
create a carrier schedule before you examine and generate departures.
Figure 24: Sailing Schedule with Gateway (CFS)
When shipping products via air or ocean, consider that your partners are typically renting
space at a port facility. This facility is used by many parties, and so options for moving
product may be limited.
While the road-based scenario can make use of a variety of transportation lanes due to the
flexibility of the carriers, ocean and air carriers often face more competition and more
128
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Schedules
regulation. This limits the flexibility for departures and arrivals. From a transportation
planning perspective, the implication is that you may need a more structured and predictable
plan for scheduling purposes. With SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM), your
organization can take advantage of different types of schedules to model specific departure
and arrival rules suited to air and ocean shipping.
Carrier Schedules for Actual Transportation
ME
R
Carrier schedules represent the actual transportation executed by the schedule vehicle, be it
by plane, vessel, train, or truck. Usually, these schedules involve stopping at locations such as
ports and airports that are used commonly and shared by many different carriers. Flights for
air transportation and vessel voyages for ocean are examples of carrier schedules. Carrier
schedules can also be truck schedules.
Location and time information are relevant to a schedule. For example, the planner asks the
following questions:
When and from where does the plane depart?
●
When do you have to be there to board it?
●
When will it arrive?
●
Which carrier is responsible for the transportation?
●
What can be transported?
US
TO
●
RC
Carrier schedules do not just have a start and end destination; they can have multiple stops,
which is common for air transportation. Carrier schedules can be executed by different
carriers on different stages using a connection schedule. It is possible to use a multi-stop
carrier schedule in any sequential location combination, so it is not required to start at the
first and leave at the last location.
FO
Schedules can be created manually in SAP TM and uploaded from an external source. You
can also upload schedules from an external data source to SAP TM by calling function
module /SCMTMS/BAPI_SCHEDULE_SAVEMULT. This function is available for the sea, air,
and road transportation modes. Alternatively, you can upload schedules for the air
transportation mode in a spreadsheet or CSV format to SAP TM by executing report /
SCMTMS/SCH_UPLOAD. For more information, see the system documentation.
ON
LY
You can delete schedules created manually and uploaded by calling function module /
SCMTMS/BAPI_SCHEDULE_DELMULTI or by executing report /SCMTMS/SCH_DELETION.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
129
Unit 3: Advanced Transportation Network
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Schedule Types
Figure 25: Overview of Schedules
SAP TM allows businesses to create different schedule types to handle the multiple shipping
scenarios they may encounter. Schedules can be maintained for each business partner or
carrier, and can identify different loading and unloading points, such as ports and airports.
If you have reappearing transportation traffic in your transportation network scenario, you
can use the schedules functionality. A combination of transportation mode, gateway
customer fact sheets (CFS), direct, and reference fields define the type of schedule.
LY
A gateway schedule includes two gateway locations. In ocean scenarios, the locations could
be the CFS-locations. In air scenarios, they can be the gateway locations.
Gateway Schedules: Subcategories
The following are the subcategories in gateway schedules:
Direct
ON
●
The schedule goes from A to B without changing the mode of transport. For example, GW
Nurnberg to GW Hamburg via truck.
●
Indirect
The schedule goes from A to B but the mode of transport changes. For example, GW
Hamburg to GW Cape Town via truck and ocean.
Air and Ocean Scenarios: Subcategories
The following are the subcategories in ocean and air scenarios:
130
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Schedules
●
Sailing schedules with vessel information
●
Master flight schedules with aircraft information
Carrier schedules describe a sequence of transportation stops where the start location and
the target stop are not gateways. A gateway is a transportation hub where freight is
consolidated and deconsolidated.
Carrier Schedules
●
Ocean Carrier Schedule
●
ME
R
Use the ocean carrier schedule to define a standard sequence of transportation stops that
are served by a ship. By specifying departure rules, you can generate voyages
automatically.
Carrier Flight Schedule
●
Road Schedule
US
TO
Use the carrier flight schedule to define a standard sequence of transportation stops that
are served by a plane. By specifying departure rules, you can generate flights
automatically.
Use the road schedule to define a standard sequence of transportation stops that are
served by a truck.
Schedule Capacities
In the schedule type, you can define if the schedule should have the following items assigned
to it:
Limited capacities
●
Transportation costs
ON
LY
FO
RC
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
131
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 3: Advanced Transportation Network
132
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 3
Exercise 14
Create a Carrier Schedule
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support its planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP
consultant, needs to create a carrier schedule to support this implementation.
US
TO
Note:
In this exercise, you create the carrier schedules that are required for one or more
subsequent exercises in this course.
1. Create a new carrier schedule using schedule type 2000 for carrier CAR##-04 with
shipping type 2. The schedule should be valid for the current month and the following two
months. Maintain the following port sequence:
Table 33: Port Sequence
10
20
30
Cargo CutOff (Days)
Transit Dura- Days to
tion (Days)
Availability
PORT-HMBG
1
1
PORT-RTDM
1
20
1
PORT-SHNG
1
20
1
PORT-NWRK
FO
40
Location
RC
Sequence
Availability
Time
12:00
1
Table 34: Schedule Details
Value
Description
Schedule for Group ##
Valid from
Beginning of current month
Valid to
The end of the month after next month
Shipping Type
2
Carrier
CAR##-04
ON
LY
Field
2. Record your schedule number.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
133
Unit 3: Advanced Transportation Network
3. What is the meaning of the value in the Cargo Cut-Off (offset in days) field?
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
4. What is the meaning of the value in the Days to Availability field?
134
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 3
Solution 14
Create a Carrier Schedule
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support its planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP
consultant, needs to create a carrier schedule to support this implementation.
US
TO
Note:
In this exercise, you create the carrier schedules that are required for one or more
subsequent exercises in this course.
1. Create a new carrier schedule using schedule type 2000 for carrier CAR##-04 with
shipping type 2. The schedule should be valid for the current month and the following two
months. Maintain the following port sequence:
Table 33: Port Sequence
10
20
30
Cargo CutOff (Days)
Transit Dura- Days to
tion (Days)
Availability
PORT-HMBG
1
1
PORT-RTDM
1
20
1
PORT-SHNG
1
20
1
PORT-NWRK
FO
40
Location
RC
Sequence
Availability
Time
12:00
1
Table 34: Schedule Details
Value
Description
Schedule for Group ##
Valid from
Beginning of current month
Valid to
The end of the month after next month
Shipping Type
2
Carrier
CAR##-04
ON
LY
Field
a) In NWBC, choose Master Data → Transportation Network → Schedule → Create
Schedule.
b) Enter 2000 in the Schedule Type field.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
135
Unit 3: Advanced Transportation Network
c) Choose Continue.
d) Enter the data in the Schedule Details table.
e) In the Standard Port Sequence screen area, choose Create.
f) Insert the data from the table for sequence 10.
g) Choose Create and repeat step f for sequences 20, 30, and 40.
h) Save your data.
This varies.
US
TO
2. Record your schedule number.
ME
R
Note:
When you are creating new sequences, if the fields are not editable, choose
Create to insert a new line. The fields in the previous line then become
editable.
3. What is the meaning of the value in the Cargo Cut-Off (offset in days) field?
This is the time that the cargo needs to arrive at the port prior to the departure of the
vessel.
FO
RC
4. What is the meaning of the value in the Days to Availability field?
ON
LY
This is the time that the cargo arrives after the vessel reaches the port.
136
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Schedules
Departure Calendar
By specifying departure rules in carrier schedules, you can generate voyages, flights, and
departures automatically. The system calculates the arrival and departure dates and times at
each transportation stop in the sequence, taking into account the transit duration, cut-off
times, and availability of the goods for each stop. You can then modify each generated voyage
individually.
Transit duration
●
Length of stay
●
Cargo cut-off time
●
Availability time
ME
●
R
You can define the following durations and times for each stop:
US
TO
You can generate concrete departures from your departure rule and adjust them individually
for each departure if required.
You can define departure rules at schedule or transportation stage level for carrier schedules
and gateway schedules.
You can also apply departure rules from a referenced carrier schedule to a gateway schedule.
Automatic Calculation of Times
RC
In the Departure Rules screen area of your schedule, if you select the Auto Fill Times checkbox
and specify particular times for various transportation stages, the system calculates the
missing times for the various transportation stages of the departure rule automatically. It also
takes the different time zones of each of the locations into account.
FO
In carrier schedules, for example, the system uses the arrival time at the destination location
of the first transportation stage and the length of stay at the destination location of the first
destination stage to calculate the departure time at the source location of the second
transportation stage.
Departures
Possible Alterations to Departures (Voyages, Flights, Trips)
The following alterations can be made to departures:
Created
●
Changed
●
Deleted
LY
●
ON
Changes to Each Departure
Changes can be made to each departure in the following areas:
●
The location sequence
●
Dates and times
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
137
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 3: Advanced Transportation Network
138
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 3
Exercise 15
Generate Departures
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support its planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP
consultant, needs to generate departures to support this implementation.
US
TO
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the carrier schedules, that you created in the
exercise “Create a Carrier Schedule”.
1. Create voyages from today until the end of the next month for the schedule that you
created in the previous exercise. The vessels should leave PORT-HMBG on each Tuesday.
Create a corresponding rule and generate voyages based on this rule. Use the information
in the following table:
Table 35: Voyage Details
Value
RC
Field
Start Date
Today’s date
End Date
The end of next month
FO
2. How many voyages are created?
3. In the third voyage, replace the stop at PORT-RTDM with a stop in PORT-DOVR.
ON
LY
4. In the fourth voyage, remove the stop in PORT-SHNG and change the transit duration
from PORT-RTDM to PORT-NWRK to 12 days.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
139
Unit 3
Solution 15
Generate Departures
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support its planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP
consultant, needs to generate departures to support this implementation.
US
TO
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the carrier schedules, that you created in the
exercise “Create a Carrier Schedule”.
1. Create voyages from today until the end of the next month for the schedule that you
created in the previous exercise. The vessels should leave PORT-HMBG on each Tuesday.
Create a corresponding rule and generate voyages based on this rule. Use the information
in the following table:
Table 35: Voyage Details
Start Date
End Date
Value
RC
Field
Today’s date
The end of next month
FO
a) In NWBC, choose Master Data → Transportation Network → Overview Transportation
Network.
b) Choose All Schedules.
c) Select the schedule that you created in the previous exercise.
LY
d) In the Voyages screen area, choose Create.
e) In the row containing the PORT-HMBG to PORT-RTDM, select the checkbox for
Tuesday.
f) Select the row containing rule 1, PORT-HMBG to PORT-NWRK.
ON
g) Choose Generate Voyages → For Specific Time Period.
h) In the dialog box, enter the data in the table provided.
i) Choose Generate Voyages.
j) Save your data.
140
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Schedules
2. How many voyages are created?
This varies.
a) In the Voyages screen area, in the Voyages tab, the required data is displayed.
3. In the third voyage, replace the stop at PORT-RTDM with a stop in PORT-DOVR.
a) In the Voyages screen area, in the Voyages tab, select the third voyage.
R
b) Choose Edit.
ME
c) In the Actual Port Sequence screen area, replace PORT-RTDM with PORT-DOVR.
d) Save your data.
4. In the fourth voyage, remove the stop in PORT-SHNG and change the transit duration
from PORT-RTDM to PORT-NWRK to 12 days.
b) Choose Edit.
US
TO
a) In the Voyages screen area, in the Voyages tab, select the fourth voyage.
c) Select the row to PORT-SHNG.
d) Choose Delete.
e) Change the transit duration from 20 to 12.
ON
LY
FO
RC
f) Save your data.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
141
Unit 3: Advanced Transportation Network
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Create carrier schedules
●
Generate departures
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
142
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 3
Lesson 2
Analyzing the Results of the Path Finder
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Use the Path Finder to analyze results
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you examine transportation network complexity and consider the use and
benefits of the path finder in transportation planning.
Transportation Network Complexity
Scenario building can be time consuming. Scenario validation, especially for transportation
optimization, is even more time consuming. The planner needs to establish if all elements of
the transportation network are maintained correctly to enable the optimizer to find a valid
solution.
RC
You can use the path finder function to search for legs in your transportation network and
take the following considerations into account during the process:
Locations
●
Transshipment locations
●
Transportation lanes
●
Schedules
FO
●
●
Transportation zones
LY
The path finder enables you to easily determine whether a connection exists between two
locations and, therefore, whether you have correctly configured your master data. However,
the path finder does not take incompatibilities into consideration.
Path Finder Execution
You can execute the path finder and check the result in either the transportation network
cockpit or on the transportation proposals user interface.
ON
●
●
Transportation Network Cockpit
When you open the context menu for a location in the transportation network cockpit, you
can choose Find Path To Location and enter a destination in the displayed dialog box. The
system then calculates all of the available connections in the transportation network and
displays them on the map. The color of the connections indicates whether a valid
transportation lane or schedule exists.
Transportation Proposals
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
143
Unit 3: Advanced Transportation Network
When you call the user interface for transportation proposals, you can choose the
appropriate button to show or hide the available connections on the map. As in the
transportation network cockpit, the color of the connections indicates whether a valid
transportation lane or schedule exists.
●
Explanation Tool
R
When you select one or more freight units, you can choose Show Network Path to analyze
the underlying transportation network that is taken into account when planning the
selected freight units.
Path Finder Report
Source location
-
Destination location
Options
-
Determine path
-
Determine connections
Restrictions
-
Outbound, inbound, or implicit hub
-
Transportation mode
-
Means of transport
FO
RC
●
-
ME
●
Requests
US
TO
●
Path Finder Report: /SCMTMS/FIND_TN_PATH
The required input for the tool is a start and a destination location. Using assigned
transshipment locations and existing connections (transportation lanes, schedules, and
booking), the path finder tries to find all paths. The result indicates if there is a valid
connection or not (all existing are listed) for each stage of a path. It is thus easy to find out if
you have assigned a transshipment location, but if it cannot be reached from your start
location.
LY
The report has some limitations. For example, it is not possible to search within a certain
timeframe and respect the validity of the connections. Also, transportation mode and meansof-transport filters are not available and incompatibilities are not considered.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Use the Path Finder to analyze results
ON
●
144
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 3
1. Carrier schedules can reference a corresponding schedule.
X
True
X
False
ME
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
R
Learning Assessment
US
TO
2. What is the minimum number of locations required to define a carrier schedule?
X
A 1
X
B 2
X
C 3
X
D 4
RC
Choose the correct answer.
3. The path finder can be used to visualize proposals.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
X
False
ON
LY
FO
X
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
145
Unit 3
1. Carrier schedules can reference a corresponding schedule.
X
True
X
False
ME
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
R
Learning Assessment - Answers
Choose the correct answer.
A 1
X
B 2
X
C 3
X
D 4
FO
RC
X
US
TO
2. What is the minimum number of locations required to define a carrier schedule?
3. The path finder can be used to visualize proposals.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
X
False
ON
LY
X
146
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
UNIT 4
Transportation Unit Planning
Lesson 2
164
167
US
TO
Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
Exercise 17: Create Transportation Units
148
153
ME
Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
Exercise 16: Create Passive Vehicle Resources
R
Lesson 1
Lesson 3
Planning Transportation Units with the Optimizer
Lesson 4
179
182
189
RC
Planning Transportation with Container Units
Exercise 18: Create Container Units
FO
UNIT OBJECTIVES
Create passive vehicle resources
●
Analyze transportation units
●
Create transportation units
LY
●
Outline transportation unit planning
●
Apply optimizer settings to passive vehicle resources
●
Create container units
ON
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
147
Unit 4
Lesson 1
Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Create passive vehicle resources
●
Analyze transportation units
Means of Transport
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn about passive vehicle resources and their creation in SAP
Transportation Management (SAP TM). You then examine transportation units and learn how
to analyze rail units.
ON
LY
FO
RC
The figure, Transportation Resources: Mode of Transport and Means of Transport, provides
information about the means of transport in SAP TM.
Figure 26: Transportation Resources: Mode of Transport and Means of Transport
148
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
Transportation Resources
●
●
●
Mode of Transport (MoT): For example, road or sea.
Means of Transport (MTr): For example, railcar, truck, refrigerated truck, less than
truckload (LTL), full truckload (FTL), barge, and vessel.
Vehicles and resources: For example, maintenance of capacities and depot locations for
individual vehicles.
RC
Figure 27: Vehicle Resources
US
TO
ME
R
Passive Vehicle Resources
Depending on the means of transport, a vehicle resource can be modeled with or without
capacity and may be active or passive, as follows:
●
Active
FO
The vehicle resource can move by itself.
●
Passive
The vehicle resource must be pulled by another resource.
LY
MTr combinations can be used to model truck and trailer combinations.
Vehicle Types
ON
●
●
●
You can define your vehicle resources, such as railcars and trailers, as resources with the
necessary details in the master data.
Alternatively, you can also define a vehicle group and type for railcars and trailers that
contains only general information about these vehicles.
You can define a vehicle type and group in the freight unit building rule. This means that
the rule can be used to create a container, railcar, or transportation unit depending on the
equipment or vehicle group category.
Vehicle Group and Vehicle Type
The vehicle and vehicle group types specify attributes such as the physical properties of a
certain kind of vehicle. When you have created a vehicle type you can do the following:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
149
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
●
●
Use the type as a template to create vehicle resources, copying the attributes of the type
to the new resource.
Request a special type of vehicle resource in a forwarding order or in a booking order. This
is similar to the function already available for container groups and types.
Parameters for Vehicle Resources
You can define, among others, the following parameters for vehicle resources:
Passive Means of Transport
R
●
●
Vehicle Combination
ME
You can define vehicle resources that cannot move by themselves. In Customizing, select
the Passive Means of Transport checkbox for the means of transport that is assigned to the
vehicle resource.
You can combine means of transport to create vehicle combinations.
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
Means-of-Transport Combinations
ON
Figure 28: Compartments and Trailers
A means of transport combination is an instance of a particular means of transport, or a
group of identical instances of means of transport, that can provide transportation services.
You use this business object to map the capacity and availability of vehicles that you want to
use for transportation.
MTr combinations have the following attributes:
●
150
They can be used to model a truck and trailer combination.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
●
●
●
You specify capacities (several units of measure (UoM)): Maximum capacities of the
combination.
Additional (freely definable) attributes can be used for compatibilities and
incompatibilities, based on a customizable attribute definition (code + text).
Coupling or uncoupling durations are defined per passive MTr.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
You can specify the number of the objects of each MTr within the combination. For
example, one truck and two trailers.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
151
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
152
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Exercise 16
Create Passive Vehicle Resources
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support its planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP
consultant, needs to create passive vehicle resources to support this implementation.
●
TRAIL_##
●
COMBI-##
US
TO
Note:
In this exercise, you create the following items that are required for one or more
subsequent exercises in the course:
1. Create a means-of-transport TRAIL-## representing your trailers. It should be your own
means-of-transport. Use the data from the following table:
FO
RC
Table 36: Means of Transport Details
Value
Means-of-Transport
TRAIL-##
Description
Trailer for Group ##
Standard Code
031
Transportation Mode
01 – Road
Resource Class
Trailer
Passive
Select checkbox
Your Own MTr
Selection checkbox
LY
Field
ON
2. Create a means-of-transport combination COMBI-## by allowing one trailer of means-oftransport TRAIL-## to be coupled to one means-of-transport FTL-99. Define the total
capacity of the combination to be 65000 LB. Use the information in the following table:
Table 37: Transport
MTR Combination
MTR
Number
COMBI-##
FTL-99
1
COMBI-##
TRAIL-##
1
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
153
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Table 38: Order
MU
Capacity
LB
65000
Table 39: Coupling Details
R
3. Define the coupling and uncoupling duration for your trailer TRAIL-## so that it is 5
minutes each. Use the data in the following table:
Coupling Duration
Uncoupling Duration
TRAIL-##
0:05
0:05
ME
MTR
US
TO
4. Create a vehicle resource TRAIL-## representing your trailer. The trailer should have a
35000 LB capacity and be created in the time zone CST with depot location SP3100. Use
the data from the following table:
Table 40: Vehicle Resource Details
Field
Value
Resource Class
Means-of-Transport
Location
Trailer
TRAIL-##
SP3100
Time Zone
RC
CST
Factory Calendar
US
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Capacity
35000
LB
ON
LY
FO
Unit
154
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Solution 16
Create Passive Vehicle Resources
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support its planning scenarios. Sue, the SAP
consultant, needs to create passive vehicle resources to support this implementation.
●
TRAIL_##
●
COMBI-##
US
TO
Note:
In this exercise, you create the following items that are required for one or more
subsequent exercises in the course:
1. Create a means-of-transport TRAIL-## representing your trailers. It should be your own
means-of-transport. Use the data from the following table:
FO
RC
Table 36: Means of Transport Details
Value
Means-of-Transport
TRAIL-##
Description
Trailer for Group ##
Standard Code
031
Transportation Mode
01 – Road
Resource Class
Trailer
Passive
Select checkbox
Your Own MTr
Selection checkbox
ON
LY
Field
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management →
Transportation Management → Master Data → Resources → Define Means-ofTransport.
b) Choose New Entries.
c) Enter the data in the Means of Transport table.
d) Choose Save and press Enter on your keyboard to continue through the warning.
2. Create a means-of-transport combination COMBI-## by allowing one trailer of means-oftransport TRAIL-## to be coupled to one means-of-transport FTL-99. Define the total
capacity of the combination to be 65000 LB. Use the information in the following table:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
155
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Table 37: Transport
MTR Combination
MTR
Number
COMBI-##
FTL-99
1
COMBI-##
TRAIL-##
1
Capacity
LB
65000
ME
MU
R
Table 38: Order
b) Choose New Entries.
US
TO
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management →
Transportation Management → Master Data → Resources → Define Means-ofTransport Combination.
c) Enter the data in the Transport table.
d) Select one of the rows and, from the navigation pane, choose Capacity.
e) Choose New Entries.
f) Enter the data in the Order table.
FO
RC
g) Save your data.
3. Define the coupling and uncoupling duration for your trailer TRAIL-## so that it is 5
minutes each. Use the data in the following table:
Table 39: Coupling Details
MTR
Coupling Duration
Uncoupling Duration
TRAIL-##
0:05
0:05
LY
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management →
Transportation Management → Master Data → Resources → Define Coupling /
Uncoupling Duration.
b) Choose New Entries.
c) Enter the data in the Coupling Details table.
ON
d) Save your data.
4. Create a vehicle resource TRAIL-## representing your trailer. The trailer should have a
35000 LB capacity and be created in the time zone CST with depot location SP3100. Use
the data from the following table:
Table 40: Vehicle Resource Details
156
Field
Value
Resource Class
Trailer
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
Value
Means-of-Transport
TRAIL-##
Location
SP3100
Time Zone
CST
Factory Calendar
US
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Capacity
35000
Unit
LB
ME
R
Field
a) In NWBC, choose Master Data → Resources → Define Resources.
b) Enter TRAIL-## in the Resources field.
US
TO
c) Choose Create Resources.
d) Enter the data provided in the table.
ON
LY
FO
RC
e) Save your data.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
157
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Transportation Units
Table 41: Transportation Unit (TU)
Freight Unit
Transportation Unit
Freight Order
Represents demand
+
+
-
Default route to define stages
+
+
-
Provides capacity
-
+
+
Different quantities
per stage
-
+
+
Cargo management
-
+
Subcontracting
-
-
ME
R
Feature
+
US
TO
+
Using the transportation unit business document, you can depict transport requirements or
capacity, for example:
●
A trailer and its load
●
The capacity of a railcar or several railcars that are transported together
●
A container and its load
RC
You use the transportation unit to consolidate freight units. You can then plan the
transportation unit as a unit for several transportation stages. That is, you can assign it to one
or more freight orders.
ON
LY
FO
Within the transportation unit type, you configure the most important settings for the
transportation unit. For example, you use the transportation unit category to indicate whether
you want to create the transportation unit type for a trailer, a railcar, or a container. When you
then create the related business document, such as a trailer unit, for example, the system
offers you only the relevant transportation units.
158
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
US
TO
ME
R
Document Structure with Transportation Units
Figure 29: Document Structure with Transportation Unit
Document Structure with Transportation Units: An Explanation
FO
RC
Table 42: Document Structure with Transportation Units: An Explanation
The following table provides explanatory information about the figure, Document Structure
with Transportation Units.
Structure
Trailer TU 1
●
Contains FU 1 and FU 2
●
Defines own stages
Mover FO 1
●
Covers 1 TU stage
Mover FO 2
●
Covers 2 TU stages
ON
LY
Transportation Order
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
159
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Figure 30: Trailer Units
US
TO
ME
R
Trailer Units
TU is a new document or object in SAP TM.
FO
RC
The planning features for tractor and trailer resources are in the Transportation Cockpit.
The TU was introduced in SAP TM 9.0. A TU is a document that represents a trailer, such as a
passive vehicle resource.
The trailer document is used for certain logistical activities, such as a trailer swap scenario
where the same physical trailer is used to transport goods with multiple tractors, or a scenario
where the trailer is loaded first and then it is routed through a network of trailer exchange
locations.
The trailer document represents both of the following:
A capacity that can be used to transport freight units
A transportation demand that requires a freight order to be moved
LY
●
●
The Trailer Unit
ON
The logistical processing of transports with trailers comprises of trailer units. You require a
trailer unit if a trailer is moved by more than one tractor. In the transportation unit type, you
configure the most important settings for the trailer units. You cannot perform
subcontracting for trailer units.
Trailer units contain the following information:
●
General Data (such as locations and dates)
You can enter one-time locations at stage level. The system stores these new locations
and adjusts stages in the document. It also adjusts the locations in the assigned execution
documents.
160
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
●
Transportation Stages
On the Stages tab, you can see the following information:
Assignment of the trailer to one or more tractors
-
The route the trailer takes
-
Transportation stage types
Freight
Quantities and weights
-
Goods information
-
Dangerous goods information
-
Seal information
-
Information about foreign trade
Overview
US
TO
●
-
ME
On the Freight tab, you can see the following information:
R
●
-
The Overview tab is an integrated view of the Stages and Freight tabs. It contains the
following information:
Assignment of the trailer to one or more tractors
-
The route the trailer takes
-
The maximum utilization as well as planned departure and arrival times
RC
-
Trailer units also contain the following information:
●
Execution information, such as, actual departure times.
●
Document dependencies and predecessor and successor documents (document flow).
Status information and blocking information.
FO
●
Rail Car Units
A railcar unit makes up the logistic processing of transports with railcars. It describes the
assignment of cargo to a railcar.
ON
LY
A railcar unit can comprise of one or more railcars. If a customer orders a full carload and you
have already defined the railcar items in the forwarding order, the system can create a railcar
unit instead of a freight unit during freight unit building. The relevant item in the forwarding
order must be a passive vehicle resource type and you must have entered a transportation
unit in the freight unit building rule. If you have not already created the railcar items in the
forwarding order, you can use the railcar unit as a consolidation document. This means that
the freight unit is created based on a product item. You then assign this product freight unit to
the railcar unit.
Alternatively, you can assign the freight unit directly to a railcar that you have created in the
rail freight order. A railcar unit must be assigned to a rail freight order before you can carry
out the follow-on processes. You can assign the individual stages for the railcar unit to one or
more rail freight orders. You cannot subcontract railcar units. The railcar unit is used only for
logistical purposes and for the assignment of different subcontracting documents.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
161
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Within the transportation unit type, you configure the most important settings for the railcar
unit.
Railcar units contain the same information as trailer units. The following points are variances:
Source location and destination location (rail)
-
Number of railcars
-
Number of assigned rail freight orders
Resources and Equipment
R
-
-
Position of a railcar in the train
-
Equipment group and type
-
Railcar details such as whether the railcar belongs to the shipper or the carrier
Information about seals. The handling execution status and the cargo execution behave
in the same way as for rail freight orders.
ON
LY
FO
RC
-
ME
●
General Data
US
TO
●
162
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Passive Vehicle Resources
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Create passive vehicle resources
●
Analyze transportation units
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
163
Unit 4
Lesson 2
R
Planning Transportation Units with Passive
Vehicle Resources
US
TO
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn about the manual creation of transportation units. You practise
creating a transportation unit with a passive vehicle resource, and then examine freight
orders with transportation units.
●
Create transportation units
●
Outline transportation unit planning
Manual Creation of Transportation Units
Transportation Unit Creation
Options for manual creation:
-
-
●
FO
RC
●
In the transportation cockpit
Via a separate transaction in freight order management
Options for automatic creation:
-
-
Via freight unit building rules
Via the VSR optimizer
Transportation units can be created via the following options:
Manual creation in the transportation cockpit
LY
●
You create a trailer unit by assigning existing transportation stages (that is, freight units)
to a trailer (document or resource).
Manual creation on the user interface for creating trailer units
ON
●
You create the trailer unit and enter the items via Freight Order Management → Road →
Trailer Unit → Create Trailer Unit.
●
Automatic creation from a transportation requirement (OTR, DTR, FWO)
If, instead of creating freight units, you want to create trailer units automatically from your
forwarding order (FWO), enter a transportation unit type in the freight unit building rule.
This function is also available for order-based requirements (OTR) and delivery-based
transportation requirements (DTR).
164
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Transportation Unit Planning
Figure 31: Transportation Unit Planning
ON
LY
FO
The figure, Transportation Unit Planning, examines transportation unit planning processes in
SAP TM.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
165
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
166
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Exercise 17
Create Transportation Units
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support their planning scenarios. Sue, the
SAP consultant, must create transportation units to support the implementation.
US
TO
Note:
This exercise requires you to use items, created in the exercise, Create Passive
Vehicle Resources, as follows:
●
TRAIL-##
●
COMBI-##
●
TM211_PLAN_##
RC
1. Create a document type TU## for your trailer units by copying the existing trailer unit
type TUKT. Deselect the Default Type checkbox.
2. Change the planning profile TM211_PLAN_## so that only vehicle resources MOVER-99
and TRAIL-## are selected (via capacity selection settings COMBI_##), and the default
type TU## is chosen for trailer documents. Use the information in the following tables:
FO
Table 43: Planning Profile
Value
Profile
COMBI_##
Description
Capacity Selection for Truck &
Trailer ##
LY
Field
ON
Table 44: Planning Assignments
Line
Field
Value
1
Attributes for Vehicle Resource Selection
VEHICLERES_ID
Sign
Inclusive
Option
=
Lower Limit
MOVER-99
Attributes for Vehicle Resource Selection
VEHICLERES_ID
2
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
167
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Line
Field
Value
Sign
Inclusive
Option
=
Lower Limit
TRAIL-##
Table 45: Forwarding Order Details
Value
Ordering Party
SP3100
Shipper
Consignee
Movement Type
Source Location
Pick-up Date
SP3100
CUST##-28
T2C
SP3100
Tuesday of next week
CUST##-28
FO
RC
Destination Location
US
TO
Field
ME
R
3. Create a forwarding order using forwarding order type FWOX and movement type T2C.
The forwarding order is from SP3100 (source location, shipper, ordering party) to
CUST##-28 (destination location and consignee).The pick-up date is Tuesday of next
week, and the delivery date is Friday of next week. Use the following data to add an item to
the forwarding order:
Delivery Date
Friday of next week
Table 46: Item Details
Value
Item
10
Item Type
PRD
Gross Weight
20000
Gross Weight UoM
LB
LY
Field
ON
4. Change your transportation cockpit layout LOAD_PLAN_LAYOUT_## so that
requirements and resources are displayed at the top of the screen, transportation units
and freight orders are in the middle of the screen, and the freight order details are at the
bottom of the screen. Use the information in the following table to make the changes:
Table 47: Cockpit Layout Details
168
Tab
Position of Screen
Area
Width
Requirements Area
Top Left
50%
Resources Area
Top Right
50%
Additional Changes
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
Width
Additional Changes
Transportation Units Middle Left
Area
50%
In the Content of
Transportation Units
Area table, in the
Trailer Unit Hierarchy and Container
Unit row, in the Display column, select
the checkbox.
Orders Area
Middle Right
50%
Order Details Area
Bottom Left
R
Position of Screen
Area
In the Content of Orders Area table, in
the Freight Orders/
Freight Bookings
row, in the Display
column, select the
checkbox.
US
TO
ME
Tab
100%
RC
5. Create a trailer document from SP3100 to CUST##-28 using vehicle resource TRAIL-##.
Manually drag the freight unit created in the previous step to your trailer in the
transportation cockpit. Use planning profile TM211_PLAN_## and selection Profile
FU_SEL_3100_## and transportation cockpit layout LOAD_PLAN_LAYOUT_## to enter
the transportation cockpit. Use the data in the following table:
Table 48: Planning Profile Data
Field
Value
FU_SEL_3100_##
Selection Profile for Freight Orders
FU_SEL_3100_##
FO
Selection Profile for Freight Units
Planning Profile
TM211_PLAN_##
Transportation Cockpit Layout
LOAD_PLAN_LAYOUT_##
LY
6. Is a trailer document created?
ON
7. Create a freight order by dragging the newly created trailer document to your vehicle
resource MOVER-99.
8. Is a freight order created? Record the freight order number.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
169
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
9. Is the trailer document changed?
170
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Solution 17
Create Transportation Units
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support their planning scenarios. Sue, the
SAP consultant, must create transportation units to support the implementation.
US
TO
Note:
This exercise requires you to use items, created in the exercise, Create Passive
Vehicle Resources, as follows:
●
TRAIL-##
●
COMBI-##
●
TM211_PLAN_##
FO
RC
1. Create a document type TU## for your trailer units by copying the existing trailer unit
type TUKT. Deselect the Default Type checkbox.
a) In Customizing for SAP TM , choose SAP Transportation Management →
Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Transportation Unit →
Define Transportation Unit Types.
b) Select the document type TUKT.
c) Choose
Copy As.
d) Enter TU## in the Transportation Unit Type field.
e) Deselect the Default Type checkbox.
LY
f) Press Enter on your keyboard, and choose Save.
ON
2. Change the planning profile TM211_PLAN_## so that only vehicle resources MOVER-99
and TRAIL-## are selected (via capacity selection settings COMBI_##), and the default
type TU## is chosen for trailer documents. Use the information in the following tables:
Table 43: Planning Profile
Field
Value
Profile
COMBI_##
Description
Capacity Selection for Truck &
Trailer ##
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
171
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Table 44: Planning Assignments
Field
Value
1
Attributes for Vehicle Resource Selection
VEHICLERES_ID
Sign
Inclusive
Option
=
Lower Limit
MOVER-99
Attributes for Vehicle Resource Selection
VEHICLERES_ID
Sign
ME
2
R
Line
Inclusive
Option
=
Lower Limit
US
TO
TRAIL-##
a) In NWBC, choose Application Administration → Planning → Planning Profiles → Edit
Planning Profiles.
b) Enter TM211_PLAN_## in the Planning Profile field.
c) Choose Continue.
FO
RC
d) In the Planning Profile tab, in the Business Document Type screen area, enter TU## in
the Default Type for Trailer Unit field.
e) In the Planning Profile tab, in the Profile Assignments screen area, beside the Capacity
Selection Settings field, choose Copy.
f) In the Enter New Settings ID dialog box, enter the data in the Planning Profile table.
g) Choose OK.
h) Select the Capacity Selection Settings tab.
i) Delete the existing lines by selecting each line and choosing Delete.
j) Enter the data in the Planning Assignments table.
LY
k) Save your data.
ON
3. Create a forwarding order using forwarding order type FWOX and movement type T2C.
The forwarding order is from SP3100 (source location, shipper, ordering party) to
CUST##-28 (destination location and consignee).The pick-up date is Tuesday of next
week, and the delivery date is Friday of next week. Use the following data to add an item to
the forwarding order:
Table 45: Forwarding Order Details
172
Field
Value
Ordering Party
SP3100
Shipper
SP3100
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
Value
Consignee
CUST##-28
Movement Type
T2C
Source Location
SP3100
Pick-up Date
Tuesday of next week
Destination Location
CUST##-28
Delivery Date
Friday of next week
Value
Item
10
Item Type
Gross Weight
Gross Weight UoM
US
TO
Field
ME
Table 46: Item Details
R
Field
PRD
20000
LB
a) In NWBC, choose Forwarding Order Management → Forwarding Order → Create
Forwarding Order.
RC
b) In the Forwarding Order Type field, enter FWOX.
c) Choose Continue.
d) Enter the data in the Forwarding Order Details table.
e) In the Items screen area, choose Insert → Product.
FO
f) Enter the values from the Item Details table.
g) Save your data.
LY
4. Change your transportation cockpit layout LOAD_PLAN_LAYOUT_## so that
requirements and resources are displayed at the top of the screen, transportation units
and freight orders are in the middle of the screen, and the freight order details are at the
bottom of the screen. Use the information in the following table to make the changes:
ON
Table 47: Cockpit Layout Details
Tab
Position of Screen
Area
Width
Requirements Area
Top Left
50%
Resources Area
Top Right
50%
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Additional Changes
173
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Width
Additional Changes
Transportation Units Middle Left
Area
50%
In the Content of
Transportation Units
Area table, in the
Trailer Unit Hierarchy and Container
Unit row, in the Display column, select
the checkbox.
Orders Area
Middle Right
50%
In the Content of Orders Area table, in
the Freight Orders/
Freight Bookings
row, in the Display
column, select the
checkbox.
Order Details Area
Bottom Left
R
Position of Screen
Area
US
TO
ME
Tab
100%
a) In NWBC, choose Application Administration → Planning → General Settings → Page
Layouts → Page Layouts for Transportation Cockpit.
b) Select the page layout LOAD_PLAN_LAYOUT_##.
FO
RC
c) In the bottom half of the screen, make the changes detailed in the Cockpit Layout
Details table.
d) Save your data.
5. Create a trailer document from SP3100 to CUST##-28 using vehicle resource TRAIL-##.
Manually drag the freight unit created in the previous step to your trailer in the
transportation cockpit. Use planning profile TM211_PLAN_## and selection Profile
FU_SEL_3100_## and transportation cockpit layout LOAD_PLAN_LAYOUT_## to enter
the transportation cockpit. Use the data in the following table:
Table 48: Planning Profile Data
LY
Field
Value
FU_SEL_3100_##
Selection Profile for Freight Orders
FU_SEL_3100_##
Planning Profile
TM211_PLAN_##
ON
Selection Profile for Freight Units
Transportation Cockpit Layout
LOAD_PLAN_LAYOUT_##
a) In NWBC, choose Planning → Planning → Transportation Cockpit.
b) Choose New.
c) Create a new profile using the data in the Planning Profile Data table.
d) Save your data.
174
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
e) Select the new line and choose Continue.
f) Select the freight unit that is created based on the forwarding order.
g) Select the Trailers tab in the resources screen area to display your trailer TRAIL-##.
h) Drag the freight unit to the trailer TRAIL-## and drop the freight unit on the trailer
TRAIL-##.
i) A new trailer document appears in the Trailer Unit Hierarchy screen area.
R
You can identify it by the $ sign in front of the number.
6. Is a trailer document created?
ME
j) Save your data.
Yes a trailer document is created. The number varies.
US
TO
a) Select the Trailer Unit Hierarchy screen area to view the required information.
7. Create a freight order by dragging the newly created trailer document to your vehicle
resource MOVER-99.
a) Select the Trucks tab in the resources screen area to show your vehicle resource
MOVER-99.
b) Drag the trailer document to vehicle resource MOVER-99 and drop it onto the vehicle
resource.
RC
c) Save your data.
8. Is a freight order created? Record the freight order number.
FO
Yes, a freight order is created. The number varies.
a) The required data is visible in the Freight Orders /Freight Bookings screen area.
9. Is the trailer document changed?
ON
LY
Yes. In addition to loading and unloading activities, the trailer document now includes
coupling and uncoupling activities in the trailer hierarchy.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
175
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Freight Orders with Transportation Units
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
The figure, Freight Orders with Transportation Units, provides information about freight
orders with transportation units in SAP TM.
Figure 32: Freight Orders with Transportation Units
Train Composition
Rail freight orders make up the logistical processing of transports with trains. A rail freight
order can model a train with one or more locomotives and one or more railcars. You can
execute rail freight orders or award them as a subcontract.
A rail freight order includes the following items:
●
Locomotives (Vehicle Resources)
LY
If a train has several locomotives, you can model them using multi-items. During planning,
the system considers only the main locomotive that you have specified at header level. The
other locomotives are not taken into account during scheduling or when considering
incompatibilities.
●
Railcars (Passive Vehicle Resources)
ON
Railcar items can either result from the assigned railcar units or be created directly in the
rail freight order. The latter is true in less complex scenarios.
●
Cargo
You assign cargo items to your railcars.
Rail Freight Order Structure
General Data
●
176
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with Passive Vehicle Resources
-
-
Number of railcars. The actual number of railcars is displayed here. If you have agreed
scale prices with your carrier, you can enter the number of railcars for the respective
scale as the rating value once you have confirmed this with the carrier. The system then
calculates the tariff based on this amount instead of the actual value. When doing so, it
considers the calculation basis and rate table that you have defined.
Indicates if there are multiple executing carriers
Items
-
Position of a railcar in the train
-
Equipment group and type
-
Railcar details, such as whether the railcar belongs to the shipper or the carrier
ME
●
Source location and destination location (rail)
R
-
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
The Items tab page replaces the Cargo and Equipment tab pages. You can personalize your
user interface so that the system displays the old tab pages.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
177
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Create transportation units
●
Outline transportation unit planning
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
178
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Lesson 3
R
Planning Transportation Units with the
Optimizer
●
US
TO
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson examines the planning profiles and settings required to execute the optimizer in
SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM).
Apply optimizer settings to passive vehicle resources
Planning Profiles
Planning profiles are used to influence and control the outcome of the optimizer. A planning
profile must be specified for an optimizer run and takes into account the various settings of
the profile. These settings control different steps of the optimization process.
There are several sub-profiles which must be created for use in the planning profile.
RC
There are a number of planning profile assignments, as follows:
Selection profile for transportation units
●
Selection profile for freight orders
●
Selection profile for freight bookings
FO
●
Capacity selection settings
●
Optimizer settings
●
Load planning settings
●
Planning cost settings
●
Incompatibility settings
●
Carrier selection settings
LY
●
ON
Capacity Selection Settings
●
Vehicle resources
●
Container resources
●
Schedules
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
179
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
FO
RC
Figure 33: Incompatibility Settings
US
TO
ME
R
Incompatibility Settings
The figure, Incompatibility Settings, provides information about incompatibility settings in
SAP TM.
ON
LY
Automatic Planning
Figure 34: Optimizer Constraints
180
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Planning Transportation Units with the Optimizer
The vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer can create trailer documents as a result
of considering all constraints.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Apply optimizer settings to passive vehicle resources
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
181
Unit 4
Lesson 4
Planning Transportation with Container Units
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Create container units
ON
LY
FO
RC
Equipment Types
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn about freight unit creation using equipment types. You examine
container consolidation and container unit planning in the transportation planning process.
Figure 35: Equipment Types
Equipment types are the most integral part of the entire shipping industry. These shipping
containers store the various products that need to be shipped from one part of the world to
another.
182
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Planning Transportation with Container Units
Depending on the type of products that are shipped or the special services needed for them,
equipment types may vary in dimension, structure, materials, or construction. Various types
of shipping containers are used to meet the diverse requirements of the cargo shipping world.
The following are some of the most common types of shipping containers in use today:
Dry storage containers
●
Flat rack containers
●
Open-top containers
●
Tunnel containers
●
Open-side containers
●
Double-door containers
●
Refrigerated containers
●
Insulated and Thermal containers
US
TO
ME
R
●
Resources and Equipment Types
RC
In SAP TM, a resource can be linked to a piece of equipment. Equipment types determine the
type of truck or equipment that is requested to carry out the shipping. When your business
requires specific types of containers or equipment, you can include this factor in your
business process. With SAP TM, you can define equipment groups and specify different types
of shipping containers. For example, in the air industry, the term Universal Loading Device is
used to describe the type of container that is appropriate depending on the type of plane that
is used. In the ocean and road industry, it is the type of container or trailer that is required
based on the weight or dimension of the items being shipped.
In SAP TM you can define equipment groups as well as equipment types. Within an equipment
group, you define different types of equipment that have various limitations based on weight,
volume, or temperature.
FO
Equipment groups are specific to a transportation mode. Depending on the assigned
transportation mode, you can enter values for ocean-specific or land-specific containers, or
for air-specific unit load devices (ULDs).
Transportation Unit Resource
LY
An instance of a particular transportation unit, such as a container, you can use the
transportation unit resource to map the capacity and availability that you want to use for
transportation.
ON
You can choose up to eight dimensions and units of measurement to describe the capacity.
Note that the mass and volume are predefined by default. Planning can only take the
transportation unit resource capacity into account if these correspond to the dimensions and
units of measurement that you define in a freight unit building rule.
The equipment, and equipment group types, specify attributes such as the physical
properties of a certain kind of transportation unit resource. By creating a transportation unit
resource, you can do the following:
●
●
Use the type as a template to create transportation unit resources, copying the attributes
of the type to a new resource.
Request a special type of transportation unit resource in a forwarding order or in a booking
order.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
183
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
Transportation Unit Resource
Master data object to represent individual containers
●
Can be created with reference to equipment group type
●
Parameters for transportation unit resource resources include the following:
-
Minimum number of seals
-
Physical properties
-
Downtimes
-
Grouping attributes
-
Alternative names
Container Units
ME
Capacity
US
TO
-
R
●
You can use equipment groups and types when creating forwarding orders or forwarding
quotation items of the container category. Data that relates to the physical properties of the
container is then available in the forwarding order and subsequent business documents for
the planner. In addition, after you have entered the equipment group, the equipment type, and
the number of containers in the forwarding order, the system calculates the tare weight and
the capacity of the container in the twenty-foot equivalent unit (TEU), based on settings
applied in Customizing.
FO
RC
A container unit models the logistical handling of the transportation of one or several
containers. Each of these containers can contain several freight units.
A container unit must be assigned to a freight document before you can carry out the followon process. You assign the individual stages for the container unit to one or more freight
documents. You cannot subcontract container units. The container unit is used only for
logistical purposes and for the assignment of different subcontracting documents. Within the
transportation unit type, you configure the most important settings for the container unit.
Container units contain the same information as trailer units.
Container Unit Attributes
General Data
-
Source location and destination location
-
Number of containers
-
Number of assigned freight documents
ON
LY
●
-
●
●
184
Information about whether container provisioning and return is required
Freight and Container Details
-
Transportation unit resource
-
Equipment group and equipment type
-
Information about whether the container is owned by the shipper
Equipment
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Planning Transportation with Container Units
-
Seal information
-
Document references
Transportation Unit Creation Using Equipment Types
R
If a customer orders a full container and you have already defined the container items in the
forwarding order, the system can create a container unit instead of a freight unit during
freight unit building. The relevant item in the forwarding order must be of Passive Vehicle
Resource type, and you must have entered a transportation unit in the freight unit building
rule.
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
If you have not already created the container items in the forwarding order, you can use the
container unit as a consolidation document. This means that a freight unit is created based on
a product item. You must assign this product freight unit to a container unit. Alternatively, you
can assign the freight unit directly to a container that you have created in the freight
document.
Figure 36: Transportation Unit Creation Using Equipment Types
ON
You can also use freight unit building rules to take into account equipment groups and
equipment types as well as the physical properties of your equipment when creating
transportation units (TUs). During freight unit building, the system consolidates the business
document items into containers and displays them as transportation units. For these TUs, the
system copies the physical properties as well as the equipment group that you defined in
Customizing.
SAP TM only considers equipment for the business document of Package and Product Item
(schedule line) types. The system determines a freight unit building rule for these types of
item, and you have specified in this freight unit building rule that the system is to copy the
equipment from the business document item, an error message appears and the creation of
the freight units or transportation units is cancelled.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
185
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
For example, You have forwarding order with the following two items:
●
Item 10: Ten pallets at 10,000 kilograms each
●
Item 20: Nine pallets at 9,000 kilograms each
If you use the equipment type CNT_Example in the freight unit building rule, SAP TM creates
the following item:
Item 10: One container, CNT_EXAMPLE, gross weight: 22,000 kilograms, Tare weight:
3,000 kilograms
R
●
Incompatibilities for Container Units
●
●
●
Container unit — Vehicle resource: A container unit is not allowed on a vehicle resource,
for example, an equipment type is not allowed on a certain truck type.
Container unit — Transshipment location: A container unit is not allowed to be routed via a
transshipment location, for example, because of storage constraints.
Container unit — Freight booking: A container unit containing hazardous goods cannot be
booked on some freight bookings.
Container unit — Schedule: A container unit containing hazardous goods cannot be
booked on some schedules.
FO
RC
●
Container unit — Container unit (vehicle level): Two container units are not allowed on the
same level.
US
TO
●
ME
This item has two sub-items that correspond to the items of the forwarding order.
Manual Planning of Container Units
In the Transportation cockpit, you can plan and reassign container units by busing drag and
drop. Alternatively, you can reassign by selecting the relevant rows and choosing
Reassignment.
Table 49: Manual Planning — Container Units
Target (drop)
Action
CU stage
FO (railcar unit, trailer unit)
Assign CU stage to FO (railcar unit, trailer unit) and add
missing locations of FO (railcar unit, trailer unit)
Location in FO (railcar unit,
trailer unit)
Assign CU stage to FO (railcar unit, trailer unit) and add
missing locations at position
of drop location of FO (railcar
unit, trailer unit)
CU stage
Compartment in FO
Assign CU stage to compartment of FO and add missing
location to FO
CU stage
FB
Assign CU stage to FB and
Add missing locations t CU
LY
Source (drag)
ON
CU stage
186
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Planning Transportation with Container Units
In the layout settings for the Transportation cockpit, you defined a layout for which you have
selected the Reassignment checkbox on the Orders Area or Transportation Units Area tab
pages. Alternatively, you can select the Reassignment checkbox on the Hierarchies Area tab
page. You select the layout that you have defined in the layout settings for the Transportation
cockpit. In the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings screen area, you choose Dual View. You can
now execute your reassignment activities.
In Customizing, make relevant settings to configure your standard layout for reassignment in
the layout settings for the transportation cockpit.
●
●
ME
●
TUCNT for location-based reassignment of container units with the associated freight
units
TUCLD for location-based reassignment of container units with the associated freight
documents
TUCNS for reassignment of container units with the associated freight units based on the
freight unit stage
US
TO
●
R
The following hierarchy types are predefined for use with container units:
TUCSD for reassignment of container units with the associated freight documents based
on the freight unit stage
In addition, you can define your own hierarchy types.
Container Triangulation
FO
RC
Container triangulation can be used to save on transportation charges by combining a
request for empty provisioning, and a request for empty return. For example, you have to
organize the pickup and delivery of an empty container that is no longer required from a
consignee, and organize the subsequent transportation of this empty container to the
container yard. You have to organize the pickup of a second container of the same type from
the container yard and the provisioning of this empty container to another customer. By
combining both requests into one order, you have the first empty container transported
directly to the second customer.
ON
LY
Note:
Triangulation is supported for container units and railcar units only. Triangulation
is not supported for trailer units.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
187
Figure 37: Container Triangulation
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
FO
RC
Triangulation and Transportation Units
There are at least two transportation units, one for the empty provisioning and one for the
empty return (movement category Empty Return and Empty Provisioning). The two
transportation units must have the same equipment type. The transportation unit for the
empty provisioning must be unplanned.
LY
You can combine a transportation unit for the empty provisioning (empty provisioning TU)
and a transportation unit for the empty return (empty return TU) in a single transportation
unit (triangulation transportation unit). From a technical point of view, the system keeps the
empty return TU and deletes the empty provisioning TU. The new triangulation transportation
unit (triangulation TU) now refers to two forwarding orders and is assigned the movement
category Triangulation. As with any other transportation unit you can plan this transportation
unit on a freight order. When you revoke triangulation, the system dissolves the triangulation
TU into the two original transportation units.
Triangulation is supported for unplanned transportation units only.
ON
To perform triangulation, select a container unit or a railcar unit in the personal object worklist
for container units or railcar units, and choose Triangulation → Create Triangulation. If you
have selected the option for a container unit or railcar unit for the provisioning, the system
automatically proposes only container units or railcar units for the return, and vice versa.
You can also perform triangulation by selecting two container units, or two railcar units, (one
for the provisioning and one for the return), choose Triangulation → Create Triangulation.
188
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Exercise 18
Create Container Units
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support their planning scenarios. Sue, the
SAP consultant, must create a container unit and plan it on a truck transport.
Item
US
TO
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the data, created in a previous exercise as
follows:
Created in the Exercise
FU_SEL_3100_##
Execute Optimization to Determine
Means of Transport
TM211_PLAN_##
Create Transportation Units
RC
1. Create a transportation unit resource CONTAINER-## for a 40ft container. Use
equipment group CN and equipment type 42GP as a template. Use the information in the
following table:
Table 50: Transportation Unit Resource Details
Field
Value
CN
Equipment Type
42GP
Time Zone
CST
Factory Calendar
US
LY
FO
Equipment Group
2. Assign one of your unplanned freight units to your container CONTAINER-## manually
using drag & drop in the transportation cockpit to create a container unit.
ON
3. Use the optimizer to assign the container unit to your vehicle resource FTL-##.
4. Examine the freight order created in the previous step.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
189
Unit 4
Solution 18
Create Container Units
R
Business Example
ME
ABC Corporation wants to implement SAP TM to support their planning scenarios. Sue, the
SAP consultant, must create a container unit and plan it on a truck transport.
Item
FU_SEL_3100_##
TM211_PLAN_##
US
TO
Note:
This exercise requires you to use the data, created in a previous exercise as
follows:
Created in the Exercise
Execute Optimization to Determine
Means of Transport
Create Transportation Units
FO
RC
1. Create a transportation unit resource CONTAINER-## for a 40ft container. Use
equipment group CN and equipment type 42GP as a template. Use the information in the
following table:
Table 50: Transportation Unit Resource Details
Value
Equipment Group
CN
Equipment Type
42GP
Time Zone
CST
Factory Calendar
US
LY
Field
a) In NWBC, go to Master Data → Resources → Define Resources.
ON
b) In the Resource field, enter CONTAINER-##.
c) Choose Create Resources.
d) Open the Transportation Unit tab page.
e) Enter the data in the table provided.
f) Choose Copy Equipment/Type Data.
g) Choose Save.
190
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Planning Transportation with Container Units
2. Assign one of your unplanned freight units to your container CONTAINER-## manually
using drag & drop in the transportation cockpit to create a container unit.
a) In NWBC, go to Planning → Planning → Transportation Cockpit.
b) Select the line with the selection profile for FU FU_SEL_3100_##, planning profile
TM211_PLAN_##, and transportation cockpit layout LOAD_PLAN_LAYOUT_##.
c) Choose Continue.
R
d) In the upper right screen area, open the Container tab page.
e) Choose Insert.
ME
f) Enter CONTAINER-##, and choose Ok.
g) Drag an unplanned freight unit from the freight units stages area, and drop it on your
container CONTAINER-##.
h) In the middle left screen area, open the Container Unit tab page.
US
TO
i) To create the container unit, choose Save.
3. Use the optimizer to assign the container unit to your vehicle resource FTL-##.
a) In the upper right screen area, open the Truck tab page.
b) Choose Insert.
c) Enter FLT-##, and choose OK.
d) Select the line with FTL-## in the upper right screen area.
RC
e) Select the container unit created in the previous step in the middle left screen area.
f) Choose Optimizer Planning → Selected Entries Only.
g) Choose Accept.
FO
h) Choose Save.
4. Examine the freight order created in the previous step.
a) In the middle left screen area, select the freight order created in the previous step.
ON
LY
b) In the bottom screen area, on the Overview tab page, expand the freight order to see
the freight units in the container and the container on the truck.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
191
Unit 4: Transportation Unit Planning
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Create container units
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
192
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Learning Assessment
R
1. Which of the following are the allowed transportation unit categories?
A Container
X
B Railcar
X
C Trailer
X
D Vehicle resource
US
TO
X
ME
Choose the correct answers.
2. How can you create transportation unit documents?
Choose the correct answers.
A Manually, using a separate transaction
X
B Automatically, using the VSR optimizer
X
C Via drag-and-drop in the transportation cockpit
X
D Via drag-and-drop in a freight unit worklist
RC
X
FO
3. Is there any limitation related to the number of active and passive vehicle resources in a
truck and trailer scenario?
Choose the correct answer.
A Active vehicle resources: Exactly one; Passive vehicle resources: No limit
ON
LY
X
X
B Active vehicle resources: No limit; Passive vehicle resources: No limit
X
C Active vehicle resources: At least one; Passive vehicle resources: As specified in
means-of-transport customizing
X
D Active vehicle resources: Exactly one; Passive vehicle resources: As specified in
means-of-transport customizing
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
193
Unit 4: Learning Assessment
4. Is there any limitation related to the number of active and passive vehicle resources in a
rail scenario?
Choose the correct answer.
A Train: At least one; Railcars: No limit
X
B Train: No limit; Railcars: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
X
C Train: Exactly one; Railcars: No limit
X
D Train: At least one; Railcars: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
ME
R
X
5. In which transportation modes can you use container units?
A Rail
X
B Road
X
C Sea
X
D Air
X
E Pipeline
ON
LY
FO
RC
X
US
TO
Choose the correct answers.
194
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Learning Assessment - Answers
R
1. Which of the following are the allowed transportation unit categories?
A Container
X
B Railcar
X
C Trailer
X
D Vehicle resource
US
TO
X
ME
Choose the correct answers.
2. How can you create transportation unit documents?
Choose the correct answers.
A Manually, using a separate transaction
X
B Automatically, using the VSR optimizer
X
C Via drag-and-drop in the transportation cockpit
X
D Via drag-and-drop in a freight unit worklist
FO
RC
X
3. Is there any limitation related to the number of active and passive vehicle resources in a
truck and trailer scenario?
Choose the correct answer.
A Active vehicle resources: Exactly one; Passive vehicle resources: No limit
X
B Active vehicle resources: No limit; Passive vehicle resources: No limit
X
C Active vehicle resources: At least one; Passive vehicle resources: As specified in
means-of-transport customizing
X
D Active vehicle resources: Exactly one; Passive vehicle resources: As specified in
means-of-transport customizing
ON
LY
X
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
195
Unit 4: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. Is there any limitation related to the number of active and passive vehicle resources in a
rail scenario?
Choose the correct answer.
A Train: At least one; Railcars: No limit
X
B Train: No limit; Railcars: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
X
C Train: Exactly one; Railcars: No limit
X
D Train: At least one; Railcars: As specified in means-of-transport customizing
ME
R
X
5. In which transportation modes can you use container units?
A Rail
X
B Road
X
C Sea
X
D Air
X
E Pipeline
ON
LY
FO
RC
X
US
TO
Choose the correct answers.
196
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
UNIT 5
Carrier Selection
Lesson 2
211
217
US
TO
Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
Exercise 20: Configure Carrier Selection
198
205
ME
Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
Exercise 19: Execute Carrier Selection
R
Lesson 1
Lesson 3
Using Allocations
Exercise 21: Perform Carrier Selection based on Transportation Allocations
Lesson 4
223
229
236
241
RC
Using Business Shares
Exercise 22: Perform Carrier Selection Based on Business Shares
Lesson 5
247
FO
Improving Carrier Utilization
LY
UNIT OBJECTIVES
Execute carrier selection
●
Define carrier costs
●
Configure carrier selection
ON
●
●
Consider allocations
●
Perform carrier selection based on business shares
●
Explain continuous moves
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
197
Unit 5
Lesson 1
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Execute carrier selection
ON
LY
FO
RC
Carrier Selection Process
US
TO
●
ME
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you will execute carrier selection.
R
Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
Figure 38: Document Flow – Subcontracting
Carrier selection is used to determine the right combination of carrier and carrier
assignments based on cost, incompatibilities, priority, and business share goals. With carrier
selection, you can assign a suitable carrier to freight orders or freight bookings manually or
automatically.
Carrier Selection can be started from the following:
198
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
●
Freight order or freight booking UI
●
Transportation Cockpit (FOR/FB List)
●
Running freight optimization report /SCMTMS/BACKGRD_PLN
●
Running carrier selection report /SCMTMS/VSR_OPT_BGD in batch or online mode
US
TO
ME
R
Ultimately, the carrier is assigned to the freight order.
RC
Figure 39: Carrier Selection Process Flow
Once a freight order has been built, a shipper will need to choose (and communicate with) the
business partner responsible for moving the product. We will refer to this as carrier selection.
FO
Carrier selection is used to assign a suitable carrier to your subcontractable business
documents (for example, freight orders), either manually or automatically. The aim is to find a
carrier with the lowest costs under consideration of the defined constraints.
ON
LY
In manual carrier selection, you manually assign the required carrier to your business
documents. If you have configured a check against transportation allocations, the system
takes this into account and checks transportation capacities (transportation allocations) that
you have defined for the individual carriers. If, during the allocation, the system finds relevant
transportation allocations without capacity or that certain rules are violated by the allocation,
warning messages appear. A separate optimization is available for automatic carrier
selection. It takes selected optimization options into account when determining the most
cost-effective carrier for all business documents that you have selected. If none of the carriers
are available, the system does not assign any carrier to the relevant business documents.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
199
Figure 40: Carrier Availability
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Based on the carrier availability, the lanes are maintained in SAP Transport Management
(SAP TM) specific to means of transport.
FO
RC
A carrier can be available for a lane, but may be incompatible for a specific customer who
could exist on that lane. Similarly, a carrier can be incompatible with the order characteristics
if, for example, an order contains hazardous items but the carrier does not have any
experience in handling such items.
A carrier may be maintained on a lane, but could have met the allocation requirements for the
period and, for this reason, is not considered during carrier selection. The allocation
requirements can be specific to a means of transport or zone hierarchy.
Carrier availability can also be influenced by the purchasing organization the carrier is
associated with in the freight agreement. Thus, the carrier may be available only for a specific
purchasing organization within a company. This is based on the purchase organization
definition in SAP TM, as defined by the individual client requirement.
LY
You can define different carriers on an inbound or outbound lane. Every lane has a validity
period, and the lane-level validity applies to the carriers associated with that lane, which is
specific to the means of transport. A carrier availability can be turned on and off for a specific
lane by updating the validity.
Carrier Selection Strategies
ON
Strategy Options
During planning in SAP TM, strategies are defined which are optimization options for carrier
selection. The system takes these strategies into account during the automatic carrier
selection process.
You define strategies either in the transportation lane or in carrier selection settings. Initially,
the system considers the appropriate transportation lane for each freight order. This allows it
to consider different settings in one run. Taking strategies and settings into consideration, the
optimizer then creates a carrier ranking list containing the different carrier options. The
strategy options supported are as follows:
200
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
Cost and Priority
●
Business Share
●
Transportation Allocation
●
Continuous Move
US
TO
ME
R
●
Figure 41: Carrier Selection Strategies
As well as manually assigning a carrier to a freight order, you can also use automatic carrier
selection and influence it by different strategies and settings, as follows:
RC
Cost and Priority - the cost from either transportation charge management or planning
costs can be used to determine the carrier. The best carrier can be based on the following:
-
Cost * Priority
-
Cost + Priority
-
Priority if no cost is to be used
FO
●
-
●
Business shares – if a fixed percentage of freight business is to be allocated to a certain
carrier, then the business shares can be used.
Transportation Allocation – if there is either a minimum or a maximum restriction that
regulates how much business you are doing with a certain carrier in a certain region for a
certain means of transport.
LY
●
Cost only
ON
●
Continuous Moves – combine freight documents for subcontracting to achieve lower
rates.
Carrier Selection Strategies
The following strategies can be used for carrier selection:
●
Cost: All carriers that meet the criteria (based on valid lane, incompatibilities, business
share, and allocation) are selected and ranked in ascending order of the total cost
calculated based on TCM (freight agreement, calculation sheet, rate table/scale required
for the O/D pair, means of transport combination). Internal cost is maintained on the lane
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
201
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
or on the planning profile. Alternatively, the system can also be set up to assign the lowest
cost carrier to the FOR based on the settings in the carrier selection profile.
●
R
Cost + priority: The carriers are ranked in ascending order of their TCM/lane cost and the
priority assigned on the lane. The lowest-cost carrier is selected for automatic assignment.
However, for tendering, all the carriers in the ranking list are relevant (peer-to-peer/
broadcast) based on the specific flag maintained at carrier level in the lane.
ME
●
Priority: The business decides the preferred carriers for specific lanes and assigns a
priority ranking to each carrier per lane. Based on the lane settings or carrier selection
profile settings, the carriers that meet the criteria mentioned are selected and ranked in
descending order of their lane priorities. The highest-priority ranking (for example, 1 to 10,
with 1 being the highest priority) is picked up as the number 1 carrier in the ranking list. The
priority 1 carrier can then be assigned directly to the FOR based on the carrier selection
settings.
Cost * priority: The carriers are ranked in ascending order of their TCM/lane cost * the
priority assigned on the lane. The lowest-cost carrier is selected for automatic assignment.
However, for tendering, all the carriers in the ranking list are relevant (peer-to-peer/
broadcast), based on the specific flag maintained at the carrier level in the lane.
Carrier Selection Ranking
US
TO
●
ON
LY
FO
RC
When using automatic carrier selection, the system will create a carrier ranking list of the
relevant carriers for a particular freight order or freight booking. For each relevant carrier,
users can see a variety of information that influenced the selection process. This could
include the means of transport cost, delivery performance ratings, and others. After
automatic carrier selection has been performed, the ranking list will be visible in the freight
order.
Figure 42: Carrier Ranking List
202
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
US
TO
ME
R
Carrier Selection Result
Figure 43: Carrier Selection Result (Ranking List)
ON
LY
FO
RC
Based on the settings maintained earlier, when we perform carrier selection, the system
determines the least costly carriers and ranks them from lowest to highest cost, or from
lowest to highest priority. This ranking is then considered for tendering. It can, however, be
manually switched in the freight order. Additions and deletions are also possible.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
203
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
204
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Exercise 19
Execute Carrier Selection
R
Business Example
ME
You want to set up SAP TM so that carriers are selected automatically for a certain lane,
based on cost and priorities. The costs will be calculated using transportation charge
management.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
US
TO
Create a Sales Order
In this task, you will create a sales order, which will later be planned using optimizer.
1. In SAP ERP, create a sales order using the following data:
Field
Value
Order Type
Sales Organization
Division
3000
10
RC
Distribution Channel
ZT00
00
TM_CUST_00
PO Number
TM300-GRP##-1.1
Material
PRODTM-00
Order Quantity
300
FO
Sold-To Party
LY
Plan OTR and Verify Carrier Selection
In this task, you plan the OTR and verify that the selected carrier in the freight order is the one
with the lowest price based on the cost * priority strategy.
ON
1. Plan the OTR with the vehicle resource C_00_TRUCK_01, using the following profiles:
Field
Value
Planning Profile
GRP##_CARRIER_SELECTION
Selection Profile (FOs)
GRP##_NA_FO_SEL_PROF
Transportation Cockpit Layout
Standard Layout
Layout for Planning Results Screen
Standard Layout
Description
Carrier Selection COST AND PRIORITY
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
205
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
2. Open the freight order and calculate the charges. Verify that the charges are the same as
the proposed amount.
206
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Solution 19
Execute Carrier Selection
R
Business Example
ME
You want to set up SAP TM so that carriers are selected automatically for a certain lane,
based on cost and priorities. The costs will be calculated using transportation charge
management.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
US
TO
Create a Sales Order
In this task, you will create a sales order, which will later be planned using optimizer.
1. In SAP ERP, create a sales order using the following data:
Field
Value
Order Type
Sales Organization
Division
3000
10
RC
Distribution Channel
ZT00
00
TM_CUST_00
PO Number
TM300-GRP##-1.1
Material
PRODTM-00
Order Quantity
300
FO
Sold-To Party
LY
a) In SAP ERP, on the Easy Access screen, in the Command field, enter transaction code
VA01 and press Enter.
ON
b) In the Create Sales Order: Initial Screen, enter the following data:
Field
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
c) Choose Enter.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
207
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
d) On the Create TM100 Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following
information:
Field
Value
Sold-To Party
TM_CUST_00
PO Number
TM300-GRP##-1.1
Value
Material
PRODTM-00
Order Quantity
300
f) Choose Save and note the sales order number.
ME
Field
R
e) In the All items table, enter the following information:
US
TO
Plan OTR and Verify Carrier Selection
In this task, you plan the OTR and verify that the selected carrier in the freight order is the one
with the lowest price based on the cost * priority strategy.
1. Plan the OTR with the vehicle resource C_00_TRUCK_01, using the following profiles:
Field
Planning Profile
Selection Profile (FOs)
Value
GRP##_CARRIER_SELECTION
GRP##_NA_FO_SEL_PROF
Standard Layout
Layout for Planning Results Screen
Standard Layout
Description
Carrier Selection COST AND PRIORITY
FO
RC
Transportation Cockpit Layout
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose ERP Logistics Integration
→ Overview Transportation Requirements.
LY
b) Select the OTR based on the sales order that you created in the task Create a Sales
Order.
c) Choose Start Transportation Cockpit.
d) On the Transportation Cockpit: Profile and Layout Sets screen, check for a row with the
same profiles and layout settings as in the table. If it exists already, skip to step (h).
ON
e) If the profile row does not yet exist as shown in the table, choose New.
f) Enter the data provided in the table.
g) Choose Save.
h) Select the row corresponding to the entries in the table and choose Continue.
i) In the Freight Unit screen area, select the freight unit.
208
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Explaining the Carrier Selection Process
j) In the Vehicles screen area, select the vehicle resource C_00_TRUCK_01.
k) With both the freight unit and the vehicle resource selected, choose Optimizer Planning
→ Selected Entries Only.
l) On the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings screen area, select the freight order that has
just been created.
R
m) On the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings screen area, on top right, choose Maximize.
Scroll to the right and review the carrier assignment as a result of carrier selection,
which was executed as part of optimizer planning. On top right, choose Restore.
ME
n) On the Carrier Ranking tab, select the carrier with the lowest amount. It will be at the
top of the list.
Verify that this is the carrier that was assigned to the freight order automatically.
p) Choose Accept.
q) Choose Save.
US
TO
o) Verify that no charges were calculated for two carriers, and that these carriers have
been ranked at the end of the list.
2. Open the freight order and calculate the charges. Verify that the charges are the same as
the proposed amount.
a) In the Transportation Cockpit, in the Freight Order/Freight Booking screen area, open
the freight order.
RC
b) On the General Data tab, verify that the Carrier field displays carrier selected in the
previous step.
c) Open the Statuses tab, and verify that the Subcontracting Status is Carrier
Assigned.
d) Open the Subcontracting tab.
FO
e) On the Subcontracting tab, open the Carrier Ranking tab.
f) Note the amount for the carrier.
g) Open the Charges tab and choose Edit.
h) Choose Charges/Settlement → Calculate Charges.
LY
i) Note the charges in the Final Amount column. It should be the same as the amount
proposed by the carrier selection strategy.
ON
j) Choose Save.
k) Close the freight order window.
l) Close the Transportation Cockpit window.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Note:
During the next demonstrations and exercises, we will look at the settings
that led to this result.
209
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Execute carrier selection
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
210
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Lesson 2
R
Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and
Priorities
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Define carrier costs
●
Configure carrier selection
US
TO
●
ME
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you will define carrier costs and configure carrier selection.
ON
LY
FO
RC
Prerequisites for Carrier Selection
Figure 44: Influences To Carrier Selection
There are a number of factors that influence carrier selection, including the following:
●
Master data
●
Planning Profile
●
Lane settings
●
Incompatibilities
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
211
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Master data
●
●
●
Define available carriers in the transportation lane
Create allocation or business shares data if they are to be used during carrier
selection
Carriers either CIFed from SAP ERP or created in SAP TM
R
Note:
Only CIFed carriers can be used for settlement of cost back to SAP ERP
ME
Planning Profile
Selection profile for carrier selection defining how the freight orders will be selected
●
Planning Strategy setting
●
Carrier Selection settings
Lane Settings
●
●
US
TO
●
The lane settings identifies if cost will be considered, and if so, the origin of the
costs. It can also specify the settings for business shares and allocation.
If costs and priority will be used, the priority assigned to carriers can be specified here
as well
FO
RC
Incompatibilities
●
You can create incompatibilities such as carrier with product groups or carrier with
vehicles, and so on.
Carrier Selection Master Data
The following master data is required before performing carrier selection:
●
The prerequisite to lane creation is the setup of locations and zones, which can be
manually created in SAP TM, or created when the shipping points customers, and vendor
are CIFed from SAP ERP to SAP TM.
LY
●
Transportation lane has to be set up between two zones or location pairs, specific to a
means of transport. The validity period is defined per lane, and carriers are assigned to the
lane created.
The carrier is CIFed from SAP ERP or can also be locally maintained in TM, depending on
the scenario.
ON
●
Costs and Priorities in Carrier Selection
In carrying out carrier selection, the system can put more weight on priorities or costs.
In terms of priority, the system can determine the most favorable carrier based on the
priorities you have defined. In effect, this means that the system chooses the carrier with the
highest priority, while taking into account the various restrictions that may be in place.
Alternatively, the system can determine the carrier on the basis of lowest total cost. Costs in
this case can refer to internal costs or to charges calculated in charge management (we will
look at this option in a separate lesson).
212
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
Internal Costs
Internal costs draw on transportation costs and carrier costs as defined for your carriers. For
example, you may have defined a transportation cost per business document (freight order,
for example), or you could have defined a transportation cost per unit of weight or volume.
Carrier costs are typically defined per unit of distance (kilometers or miles). You define
internal costs in the transportation lane or in the carrier profile.
FO
RC
US
TO
Settings - Transportation Lane
ME
R
Note:
When we speak of internal costs here, we are not speaking of real world costs.
Internal costs are used for weighting only, as part of the carrier selection process.
LY
Figure 45: Settings - Transportation Lane
To carry out carrier selection based upon cost and priority, you must maintain the
appropriate setting on the lane as follows:
ON
●
Strategy must have Relevance to Carrier Selection selected
●
In the Priority/Costs field, specify the cost or priority setting
●
Define Cost Origin
Note:
For distance-based lane rating, if the fixed flag is maintained on the lane, the
distance is picked up from the lane. Otherwise, the distance will be recalculated
during optimization.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
213
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
US
TO
ME
R
Settings - Lane / Means of Transport
FO
RC
Figure 46: Settings - Lane / Means of Transport
On the transportation lane, for each carrier you can maintain internal costs in case the cost
origin is set to internal cost. If priorities are used as part of the strategy, a priority per carrier
can be maintained here as well
You have to maintain the tendering type relevance for a specific carrier at transportation line
level. Thus if the carrier is relevant to peer-to-peer tendering for the lane SP3100 - > USCUST-01, the peer-to-peer flag must be checked and the required priority maintained in the
lane. A similar setup is required for broadcast.
LY
To Define Carrier Costs
1. In NWBC, choose the Master Data folder and then choose Transportation Network
→ Transportation Lanes → Define Transportation Lane.
ON
2. Under Transp. Lane Maintenance, enter transportation lane values in the following fields
according to your requirements:
●
Start Location/Zone
●
Dest. Loc./Zone
3. Choose Change.
4. Note that carriers are assigned to a specific means of transport (MTr), and each carrier
can have a different cost per KM or mile.
214
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
5. Display details for a means of transport by double-clicking the means of transport in the
MTr column.
6. Note the carriers assigned to this MTr in the bottom left screen area.
7. Note the Unit column and that carrier costs can be defined per kilometer or mile unit.
8. Define the costs appropriately in the adjacent Carrier Costs column.
ME
FO
RC
US
TO
Carrier Selection Settings
R
9. Transportation costs can also be defined, and may use other units such as weight or
volume.
Figure 47: SAP TM Carrier Selection - Settings / Planning Profile
ON
LY
Carrier selection settings are included in optimization. Although some of the same settings
are available in the carrier settings on the transportation lane, these settings override settings
maintained directly on the lane. The settings in this profile are based on strategies such as
lowest cost, business share, and priority. It considers continuous move options and
equipment allocations and can tender automatically based on the tendering strategy. The
profile also contains more enhanced settings, such as the ability to automatically perform
carrier selection after vehicle scheduling and routing.
In the direct shipment options (DSO), carrier selection can be enabled at time of freight unit
building by using the carrier selection settings (additional setup is required to enable the DSO
functionality). The profile also allows carrier selection in the freight order, which then uses
this information for tendering.
Critical Carrier Selection Settings
●
Incompatibilities between order and carrier, or customer and carrier, can also be
maintained in the carrier selection settings.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
215
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
●
●
The system can be set up to use allocations, business share, and strategy for carrier
selection and for the determination of cost origin in two different ways: maintained on the
lane or maintained in the carrier selection settings. The carrier selection settings have
priority over the settings maintained on the lane.
You can also define if you want to stop at carrier ranking or continue with tendering. If so,
the system will prompt you to maintain the tendering manager and tendering profile. The
tendering profile contains the tendering type (peer-to-peer or broadcast).
●
●
ME
●
Maintain incompatibilities and associate these to the carrier selection settings. These
incompatibilities could be order versus carrier, or customer versus carrier incompatibility.
Transportation charge interpretation tells the system what to do when no charges are
found for a carrier.
Action after carrier selection alerts the system for the next action, based on the list above.
If automatic tendering is selected, you need to maintain the tendering manager and the
tender profile.
US
TO
●
R
Other Carrier Selection Settings
Manual assignments can be considered final, or can be changed based on the settings
maintained in the Advanced Settings tab.
To Create Carrier Selection Settings
FO
RC
1. In NWBC, choose the Application Administration folder and then choose
Planning → Planning Profile Settings → Carrier Selection Settings → Create Carrier
Selection Settings.
2. Make your settings as required under General Data, Other Settings, and Advanced
Settings. Required fields are marked with a red asterisk. Depending on your requirements,
the most important fields are typically as follows:
Incompatibility Settings
●
Allocation Usage
●
BS Usage (Business Share)
●
Strategy
LY
●
Carrier Cost Origin
ON
●
216
Note:
The settings maintained here take precedence over those maintained for a
transportation lane. For example, settings in relation to strategy and carrier
cost origin can be made for both carrier selection settings and transportation
lane settings, but those made here have priority.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Exercise 20
Configure Carrier Selection
R
Business Example
ME
You want to set up SAP TM so that carriers are selected automatically for a certain lane,
based on cost and priorities. The costs will be calculated using transportation charge
management.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
US
TO
Prepare Master Data for Carrier Selection Based on Cost and Priority
In this task, you verify the carrier selection related settings for a transportation lane. The lane
must be relevant for carrier selection with the appropriate cost origin and strategy defined.
1. Verify the carrier selection settings in the transportation lane and means of transport
using the following data:
Field
Value
Start Location/Zone
SP3100
CTM_96161
Means of Transport
TM_FB45
Relevant to Carrier Selection
Selected
Priority/Costs
Costs * Priority
Cost Origin
Costs calculated by component TCM
FO
RC
Destination Location/Zone
2. Verify the priority of the carriers assigned to the Means of Transport TM_FB45 as follows:
Means of Trans- Start date
port
End data
Priority
CARR-00-01
TM_FB45
01.01.2013
31.12.9999
1
CARR-00-02
TM_FB45
01.01.2013
31.12.9999
2
CARR-00-03
TM_FB45
01.01.2013
31.12.9999
3
CARR-00-04
TM_FB45
01.01.2013
31.12.9999
9
ON
LY
Business Partner
Configure Planning Profiles
In this task, you will verify the planning profile, and its subordinate profiles, with settings
relevant for carrier selection using Cost * Priority.
1. Display planning profile GRP##_CARRIER_SELECTION.
2. Verify the following optimizer settings:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
217
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Field
Value
Planning Strategy
VSR_1Step
Planning Strategy for Transp. Prop.
VSR_1Step
ME
R
3. Explain how the planning strategy VSR_1STEP affects carrier selection.
4. Verify that the carrier selection settings match the following data:
Value
Check Incompatibilities
Selected
Incompatibility Settings
C_NA_INCOMPAT_CARR_CUST_INCOMPAT
Strategy
Carrier Cost Origin
Planning Strategy
Optimizer Runtime
Costs*Priority
Use Transportation Charges from
TCM
TSPS_DEF
10
Keep
FO
RC
Action for Manual Ranking
US
TO
Field
Accept Carrier with Charges of
Zero as C. with Highest Costs
Common Currency
USD
Action After Carrier Selection Run
Assign Best Carrier
Continuous Move
Do Not Create Continuous Move
Continuous Move Information
Selected
ON
LY
Transportation Charge Interpretation
218
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Solution 20
Configure Carrier Selection
R
Business Example
ME
You want to set up SAP TM so that carriers are selected automatically for a certain lane,
based on cost and priorities. The costs will be calculated using transportation charge
management.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
US
TO
Prepare Master Data for Carrier Selection Based on Cost and Priority
In this task, you verify the carrier selection related settings for a transportation lane. The lane
must be relevant for carrier selection with the appropriate cost origin and strategy defined.
1. Verify the carrier selection settings in the transportation lane and means of transport
using the following data:
Field
Value
Start Location/Zone
SP3100
CTM_96161
Means of Transport
TM_FB45
Relevant to Carrier Selection
Selected
Priority/Costs
Costs * Priority
Cost Origin
Costs calculated by component TCM
FO
RC
Destination Location/Zone
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Master Data → Transportation
Network → Transportation Lanes → Define Transportation Lanes.
ON
LY
b) In the Define Transportation Lanes for Carrier Selection screen, enter the following
data:
Field
Value
Start Location/Zone
SP3100
Destination Location/Zone
CTM_96161
c) Press Enter and choose Display.
d) On the Display SP3100 -> CTM_96161 screen, double-click the Means of Transport
TM_FB45.
A panel displays showing the details of the Means of Transport.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
219
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
e) On the Strategy screen area of the panel, verify the following data:
Value
Relevant to Carrier Selection
Selected
Priority/Costs
Costs * Priority
Cost Origin
Costs calculated by component
TCM
f) Choose
R
Field
(Copy and Close).
ME
2. Verify the priority of the carriers assigned to the Means of Transport TM_FB45 as follows:
Means of Trans- Start date
port
End data
Priority
CARR-00-01
TM_FB45
01.01.2013
31.12.9999
1
CARR-00-02
TM_FB45
01.01.2013
31.12.9999
2
CARR-00-03
TM_FB45
01.01.2013
31.12.9999
3
CARR-00-04
TM_FB45
01.01.2013
31.12.9999
9
US
TO
Business Partner
a) In the Carrier for Means of Trans. TM_FB45 screen area, verify the data in the table.
b) Close the window.
FO
RC
Configure Planning Profiles
In this task, you will verify the planning profile, and its subordinate profiles, with settings
relevant for carrier selection using Cost * Priority.
1. Display planning profile GRP##_CARRIER_SELECTION.
a) In the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Application Administration → Planning
→ Planning Profiles → Display Planning Profiles.
b) Enter the planing profile and choose Continue.
2. Verify the following optimizer settings:
Value
Planning Strategy
VSR_1Step
Planning Strategy for Transp. Prop.
VSR_1Step
LY
Field
ON
a) On the Optimizer Settings tab, verify that the Planning Strategy is VSR_1STEP.
3. Explain how the planning strategy VSR_1STEP affects carrier selection.
The VSR_1STEP planning strategy performs carrier selection during planning and is th the
reason why carrier selection was automatically executed during optimizer planning in the
previous exercise.
4. Verify that the carrier selection settings match the following data:
220
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Selecting Carriers Based on Costs and Priorities
Value
Check Incompatibilities
Selected
Incompatibility Settings
C_NA_INCOMPAT_CARR_CUST_INCOMPAT
Strategy
Costs*Priority
Carrier Cost Origin
Use Transportation Charges from
TCM
Planning Strategy
TSPS_DEF
Optimizer Runtime
10
Action for Manual Ranking
Keep
Transportation Charge Interpretation
Accept Carrier with Charges of
Zero as C. with Highest Costs
Common Currency
USD
US
TO
ME
R
Field
Action After Carrier Selection Run
Assign Best Carrier
Continuous Move
Do Not Create Continuous Move
Continuous Move Information
Selected
a) On the Carrier Selection Settings tab, verify the data in the table.
ON
LY
FO
RC
b) Close the window.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
221
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Define carrier costs
●
Configure carrier selection
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
222
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Lesson 3
Using Allocations
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Consider allocations
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you will perform carrier selection based on transportation allocations.
Transportation Allocations
LY
FO
RC
Transportation allocations allow companies to assign defined quantities of capacity to certain
business partners. This includes set minimum or maximum capacity restrictions that regulate
how much business is allowed with a certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of
transport. A separate business object is used to model these allocations.
ON
Figure 48: Transportation Allocation
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
223
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
US
TO
ME
R
Transportation Allocations
Figure 49: Transportation Allocations
Often, firm relationships exist with carriers in the form of contracts. These contracts can
guarantee that an amount of business is allocated to a carrier, which if not met, results in
penalties. SAP TM has the tools to track these relationships or, alternatively, divide up
business between different carriers.
●
●
A carrier commits to at least 25 shipments or truckloads from Nashville each day.
However, for business reasons, the availability changes each day.
A carrier normally provides two trucks per day from Dayton, Ohio. For business reasons,
the carrier is able to offer, on Tuesday and Friday only, five trucks to the shipper.
A carrier can include additional capacity to the existing number of shipments by truck. For
example, a carrier could add five additional trucks during the week between Tuesday and
Thursday.
ON
LY
●
FO
RC
The following are examples of transport allocations:
224
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Using Allocations
US
TO
ME
R
Transportation Allocation Characteristics
Figure 50: Transport Allocations In Carrier Selection
Transportation Allocation Characteristics
Carrier capacity can be defined for any geographical level in arbitrary dimension. When
defining the allocation, the trade lane can be specified as follows:
Along
From
FO
Within
RC
●
Both source location/zone and destination location/zone
can be specified
Source location/zone only
Using zone hierarchy
Destination location/zone only
Inbound
Destination zone is specified
Outbound
Source zone is specified
LY
To
●
Extended carrier selection optimizer interface
ON
-
●
-
During carrier selection either using optimizer or manual planning, the allocation can be
checked
During tendering, the allocation can be checked
Carrier capacity and utilization can be extracted to SAP NetWeaver
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
225
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
US
TO
ME
R
Extended Scope of Transportation Allocation
Figure 51: Extended Scope of Transportation Allocations
FO
RC
In SAP TM, you can define a connection between allocations and the freight agreement for a
specific carrier. Only when a single trade lane has been defined for an agreement item, can an
allocation from the item of the single party freight agreement be created. The type of
allocation created is defined in the Agreement Type Customizing activity. If the carrier or
trade lane in the agreement is changed, the user receives a message in an alert box stating
that the allocation is no longer relevant.
Other Transportation Allocation Features
Transportation allocation types can be defined in Customizing.
●
●
●
Bucket quantities are extended - multiple dimensions for the same bucket can be
specified.
Handling code support.
LY
●
Transportation allocation supports air freight capacity check and the integration of
schedules. Further optional attributes can be specified.
●
Transportation mode/user-specific user interface capability.
ON
Trade Lanes
226
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Figure 52: Trade Lanes
US
TO
ME
R
Lesson: Using Allocations
A trade lane is an abstract representation of transport classification. A trade lane instance
does not represent a connection between any transportation network nodes (zone/location,
and so on), it is a context independent classification of any transportation-related activities.
RC
Trade Lanes may build up a hierarchy, that is, more generic trade lanes imply more specific
trade lanes (for example: “Within Germany using means of transport Truck” implies “Along
from Frankfurt to Hamburg using means of transport Chilled Truck” and “Within Bavaria using
means of transport Truck for liquids”).
ON
LY
FO
Trade lanes may overlap each other (for example, “From Germany using Airplane” and
“Within Europe using Airplane”). Trade lane hierarchies include transportation zone hierarchy
(for example: “From Germany“ implies “From Bavaria”, which implies“From Plant_Munich”),
means of transport hierarchy (for example: “Within Germany with Mtr Truck” implies “Within
Germany with Mtr Chilled_Truck”) and means of transport – mode of transport relations (for
example: “Within Germany with Mode of Transport Road” implies “Within Germany with Mtr
Chilled_truck”).
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
227
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
228
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Exercise 21
R
Perform Carrier Selection based on
Transportation Allocations
ME
Business Example
You want to define a transportation allocation for a new carrier. Before configuring the
settings, you would like to review the settings for the same scenario for an existing allocation.
Prepare the Lane to Use Transportation Allocation
Field
US
TO
1. Verify the carrier selection settings in the transportation lane and means of transport
using the following data:
Value
Start Location/Zone
SP3100
Destination Location/Zone
CTM_96161
Means of Transport
TM_FB48
Selected
RC
Relevant to Carrier Selection
Costs
Cost Origin
Costs calculated by Component TCM
Use Trp. Allocations
Selected
Planning Period
Day
FO
Priority/Costs
Configure Planning Profiles
1. Display planning profile GRP00_TM120_CARSEL_TAL.
ON
LY
2. Verify the following optimizer settings:
Field
Value
Planning Strategy
VSR_1Step
Planning Strategy for Transp. Prop.
VSR_1Step
3. Verify the following carrier selection settings:
Field
Value
Type of Carrier Selection Settings
General Carrier Selection
Allocation Usage
Use Transportation Allocations
BS Usage
Do Not Use Business Shares
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
229
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Field
Value
Strategy
Costs
Carrier Cost Origin
Use Transportation Charges from
TCM
Configure the Allocation Type
TAL Type
ZTM
Period
Daily
Full Calendar Units
Selected
Number Range
01
Use Carrier Selection
ME
Value
US
TO
Field
R
1. Verify that the transportation allocation type is configured for carrier selection using the
following data:
Selected
Carrier Selection Unit of Measurement
EA
Update Quantity Automatically
Selected
TAL BW Relevance
Not selected
FO
RC
Set up Allocations for Carrier
In this task, you display the worklist for transportation allocations and view the details of the
current allocation.
1. Display the most recent transportation allocation for the carrier CAR00-02 and means of
transport TM_FB48.
2. Record the values for the following fields of the allocation:
Field
Value
Allocation Type
Carrier
LY
Orientation
Source Type
Source
ON
Destination Type
Destination
Means of Transport
Maximum Pieces per Bucket
230
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Solution 21
R
Perform Carrier Selection based on
Transportation Allocations
ME
Business Example
You want to define a transportation allocation for a new carrier. Before configuring the
settings, you would like to review the settings for the same scenario for an existing allocation.
Prepare the Lane to Use Transportation Allocation
Field
US
TO
1. Verify the carrier selection settings in the transportation lane and means of transport
using the following data:
Value
Start Location/Zone
SP3100
Destination Location/Zone
CTM_96161
Means of Transport
TM_FB48
Selected
RC
Relevant to Carrier Selection
Costs
Cost Origin
Costs calculated by Component TCM
Use Trp. Allocations
Selected
Planning Period
Day
FO
Priority/Costs
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Master Data → Transportation
Network → Transportation Lanes → Define Transportation Lanes.
ON
LY
b) In the Define Transportation Lanes for Carrier Selection screen, enter the following
data:
Field
Value
Start Location/Zone
SP3100
Destination Location/Zone
CTM_96161
c) Press ENTER and then choose Display.
d) On the Display SP3100 -> CTM_96161 screen, double-click the Means of Transport
TM_FB48.
A panel displays showing the details of the Means of Transport.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
231
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
e) In the Strategy area of the panel, verify the following data:
Value
Relevant to Carrier Selection
Selected
Priority/Costs
Costs
Cost Origin
Costs calculated by component
TCM
R
Field
Field
Value
Use Trp. Allocations
Selected
Planning Period
Day
(Copy and Close).
Configure Planning Profiles
US
TO
g) Choose
ME
f) In the Transportation Allocation screen area of the panel, verify the following data:
1. Display planning profile GRP00_TM120_CARSEL_TAL.
a) In the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Application Administration → Planning
→ Planning Profiles → Display Planning Profiles.
b) Enter the planing profile and choose Continue.
FO
RC
2. Verify the following optimizer settings:
Field
Value
Planning Strategy
VSR_1Step
Planning Strategy for Transp. Prop.
VSR_1Step
a) On the Optimizer Settings tab, verify that the Planning Strategy is VSR_1STEP.
3. Verify the following carrier selection settings:
Value
Type of Carrier Selection Settings
General Carrier Selection
Allocation Usage
Use Transportation Allocations
BS Usage
Do Not Use Business Shares
Strategy
Costs
Carrier Cost Origin
Use Transportation Charges from
TCM
ON
LY
Field
a) On the Carrier Selection Settings tab, verify the data in the table.
b) Close the window.
Configure the Allocation Type
232
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Using Allocations
Value
TAL Type
ZTM
Period
Daily
Full Calendar Units
Selected
Number Range
01
Use Carrier Selection
Selected
Carrier Selection Unit of Measurement
EA
Update Quantity Automatically
Selected
TAL BW Relevance
Not selected
US
TO
ME
Field
R
1. Verify that the transportation allocation type is configured for carrier selection using the
following data:
a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP
Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Planning → General
Settings → Define Transportation Allocation Types.
b) Verify the settings and exit the function.
Set up Allocations for Carrier
In this task, you display the worklist for transportation allocations and view the details of the
current allocation.
FO
RC
1. Display the most recent transportation allocation for the carrier CAR00-02 and means of
transport TM_FB48.
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Planning → Worklist
→ >Overview Planning.
b) Choose the active query Transportation Allocations and refresh the query.
c) If the Quick Criteria Maintenance screen area is not already displayed, choose Show
Quick Criteria Maintenance.
d) Search for transportation allocations for means of transport TM_FB48 for carrier
CAR00-02 by entering these values in the search criteria.
LY
e) Choose Apply.
f) Choose Hide Quick Criteria Maintenance.
ON
2. Record the values for the following fields of the allocation:
Field
Value
Allocation Type
Carrier
Orientation
Source Type
Source
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
233
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Field
Value
Destination Type
Destination
Means of Transport
a) In the worklist, select the row for allocations and choose Display.
The values are as follows:
ME
b) Record the values and close the window.
Value
Allocation Type
ZTM
Carrier
CAR00-02
Source Type
Source
Destination Type
Destination
Along
Location
SP3100
Zone
CTM_96161
TM_FB48
FO
RC
Means of Transport
US
TO
Field
Orientation
R
Maximum Pieces per Bucket
Maximum Pieces Per Bucket
4
c) Review that, according to the planning period, daily buckets were created for the
validity period.
d) Review that minimum and maximum values can be maintained for different
dimensions or unit of measures.
ON
LY
e) Review that the current (actual) values will be displayed if the freight orders are
subcontracted to the carrier during the validity period of the transportation allocation.
234
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Using Allocations
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Consider allocations
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
235
Unit 5
Lesson 4
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Perform carrier selection based on business shares
Business Shares
US
TO
●
ME
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you will perform carrier selection based on business shares.
R
Using Business Shares
FO
RC
Selecting Carriers Based on Business Share
Figure 53: Selecting Carriers Based on Business Shares
Objectives of Business Shares
Assign defined percentages to certain business partners
●
Support negotiation of freight agreements
●
Avoid dependency on a single vendor
●
Consider the capacity of a carrier for a certain relation/route/geography
LY
●
ON
Like transportation allocations, business shares make use of trade lanes.
236
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Using Business Shares
US
TO
ME
R
Business Share (Example)
Figure 54: Selecting Carriers Based on BS and Transportation Allocation
RC
When defining the business share context, you create the business share buckets. The
percentage of business share a carrier can have for these individual buckets is the actual
business share a carrier is allowed to have. There are different types of bucket available
during business share creation. They are yearly, quarterly, monthly, weekly, and daily.
Example One
ON
LY
FO
Carrier A can have a weekly bucket of 75% of the business share on the lane between
Hamburg and Frankfurt between the validity periods March 1 2015 to 31 May 2015. In the
same context, Carrier B can have a weekly bucket of 25% defined.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
237
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Figure 55: Business Share Tolerances and Penalty Costs
FO
RC
Tolerances and penalty costs can be defined for business shares. As long as business shares
are within the tolerance limits, the cost calculations during carrier ranking are not affected.
Tolerances are always defined in percentages (%). If the total business share of the carrier
exceeds the defined tolerances, either shortfall or over, a penalty applies.
The shortage penalty costs are added to all carriers, other than the one selected. The excess
penalty costs are added to the carrier under consideration. Penalties are maintained as
numeric values in the business share. This number is multiplied by the deviation percentage
to arrive at the penalty cost.
It only makes sense to use business shares if you have defined penalty costs. It is
recommended to also always define tolerances to give the optimizer a certain amount of
leeway.
Example Two
ON
LY
There is a penalty of 1000 defined in the business share. An excess tolerance of 10% is also
defined. During business share calculation, if the excess is 12%, the excess liable for penalty is
2%. This 2 is multiplied by 1000 to arrive at the total excess penalty costs of 2000.
238
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Using Business Shares
Note:
When calculating the total costs for a carrier, if you are working with TCM costs,
there will be a currency assigned to the costs. To assign a currency to business
share penalty costs, go to: Carrier Selection Settings -> Advanced Settings ->
Common Currency .
R
For example, if you are working with carriers from multiple geographic locations
with multiple currencies to arrive at the correct ranking, the system uses the
common currency (maintained in the Carrier Selection Settings ) for all its
calculations. The currency displayed in the carrier ranking list is always the local
currency of the carrier (maintained in the freight agreement).
ME
All FORs in the business share context are selected for the business share penalty
calculations, though these FORs are not selected during the planning run.
US
TO
For example, assume in a business share context there are two carriers, A and B.
There are no tolerances defined. Carrier A is awarded a 60% business share and
Carrier B a 40% business share. There are already 10 freight orders awarded, of
which Carrier A is assigned six and Carrier B is assigned four.
Now let us perform carrier selection for the eleventh FOR. If Carrier B is assigned
this FOR, Carrier A will have a shortfall of business share, and the penalty cost for
the shortfall will be charged to Carrier B, on top of the usual costs determined
during carrier selection.
ON
LY
FO
RC
If Carrier A is assigned the eleventh FOR, Carrier B will have a shortfall of business
share, and the penalty cost will be charged to carrier A, on top of the usual costs
determined during carrier selection. Both options are evaluated by the system and
the ranking done accordingly.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
239
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
240
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Exercise 22
R
Perform Carrier Selection Based on Business
Shares
ME
Business Example
You want to define carrier selection for a new lane based on business share. Before
configuring the settings, you would like to review the settings for the same scenario for an
existing lane.
US
TO
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
Prepare Master Data for Carrier Selection Based on Business Share
In this task, you will define the settings for the transportation lane to perform carrier selection
based on business share.
1. Verify the carrier selection settings in the transportation lane and means of transport
using the following data:
Field
FO
RC
Start Location/Zone
Value
SP3100
CTM_96161
Means of Transport
TM_FB53
Relevant to Carrier Selection
Selected
Priority/Costs
Costs
Cost Origin
Costs calculated by Component TCM
Use Business Share
Selected
LY
Destination Location/Zone
Configure Planning Profiles
In this task, you will review the settings in the planning profile relevant to carrier selection.
ON
1. Verify the carrier selection settings in planning profile GRP##_CARR_SEL_BS.
Field
Value
BS Usage
Always Use Business Shares
View Business Share Details
In this task, you will display the worklist for business shares and view the details for a business
share.
1. Display the Business Share worklist for means of transport TM_FB53 for the year 2013.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
241
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
2. Display a particular business share for 2013 for means of transport TM_FB53.
3. List each carrier and respective target business share.
R
CAR00-01:
ME
CAR00-02:
US
TO
4. What steps would allow you to display or change multiple business share records within
the same screen?
5. Review that the current (actual) share is displayed when freight orders are subcontracted
to the carrier during the selected timeframe.
FO
RC
6. Review that penalty costs can be maintained separately for shortfall and exceeding the
target share. These costs will be considered when building the carrier ranking list.
ON
LY
7. Review that negative and positive tolerances can be defined separately to define a corridor
around the target share in which no penalty costs will be applied.
242
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Solution 22
R
Perform Carrier Selection Based on Business
Shares
ME
Business Example
You want to define carrier selection for a new lane based on business share. Before
configuring the settings, you would like to review the settings for the same scenario for an
existing lane.
US
TO
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
Prepare Master Data for Carrier Selection Based on Business Share
In this task, you will define the settings for the transportation lane to perform carrier selection
based on business share.
1. Verify the carrier selection settings in the transportation lane and means of transport
using the following data:
Field
FO
RC
Start Location/Zone
Value
SP3100
CTM_96161
Means of Transport
TM_FB53
Relevant to Carrier Selection
Selected
Priority/Costs
Costs
Cost Origin
Costs calculated by Component TCM
Use Business Share
Selected
LY
Destination Location/Zone
ON
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Master Data → Transportation
Network → Transportation Lanes → Define Transportation Lanes.
b) In the Define Transportation Lanes for Carrier Selection screen, enter the following
data:
Field
Value
Start Location/Zone
SP3100
Destination Location/Zone
CTM_96161
c) Choose Enter then choose Display .
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
243
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
d) In the Display SP3100 -> CTM_96161 screen, double-click the row corresponding to
TM_FB53.
A new Means of Transport panel appears.
Field
Value
Relevant to Carrier Selection
Selected
Field
Value
Use Business Share
Selected
(Copy and Close ).
h) Close the window.
US
TO
g) Choose
ME
f) In the Share of Business area of the panel, verify the following data:
R
e) In the Strategy area of the panel, verify the following data:
Configure Planning Profiles
In this task, you will review the settings in the planning profile relevant to carrier selection.
1. Verify the carrier selection settings in planning profile GRP##_CARR_SEL_BS.
Field
Always Use Business Shares
FO
RC
BS Usage
Value
a) In the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Application Administration → Planning
→ Planning Profiles → Display Planning Profiles.
b) On the Display Planning Profile screen, enter the profile then click Continue .
c) Open the Carrier Selection Settings tab.
d) Verify the fields for the table.
e) Close the window.
LY
View Business Share Details
In this task, you will display the worklist for business shares and view the details for a business
share.
1. Display the Business Share worklist for means of transport TM_FB53 for the year 2013.
ON
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Planning → Worklist
→ Overview Planning.
b) Choose the active query Business Shares and refresh the query
c) Choose Show Quick Criteria Maintenance if the Quick Criteria Maintenance is not
already displayed.
d) Search for business shares for means of transport TM_FB53 for 2013 by entering
TM_FB53 in the Means of Transport field, and a range of 01.01.2013 31.12.2013 in the Validity Start Time field.
244
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Using Business Shares
e) Choose Apply.
f) Choose Hide Quick Criteria Maintenance .
2. Display a particular business share for 2013 for means of transport TM_FB53.
a) In the worklist table, select the row for a period of your choice.
b) Choose Display.
R
3. List each carrier and respective target business share.
ME
CAR00-01:
50.0
US
TO
CAR00-02:
50.0
4. What steps would allow you to display or change multiple business share records within
the same screen?
RC
From the worklist, select the rows you want to view or change, then click Display or Edit .
The next screen will show all the business shares selected in the worklist. If you are in Edit
mode, you can update the carrier targets, penalties, tolerances, recalculate the booked
quantity, and insert carriers.
5. Review that the current (actual) share is displayed when freight orders are subcontracted
to the carrier during the selected timeframe.
FO
6. Review that penalty costs can be maintained separately for shortfall and exceeding the
target share. These costs will be considered when building the carrier ranking list.
ON
LY
7. Review that negative and positive tolerances can be defined separately to define a corridor
around the target share in which no penalty costs will be applied.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
245
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Perform carrier selection based on business shares
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
246
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Lesson 5
Improving Carrier Utilization
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Explain continuous moves
Continuous Moves
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you will improve carrier utilization with continuous moves.
Continuous move scenarios can identify opportunities to avoid empty runs or utilize capacity
more effectively. As part of automatic carrier selection, the system tries to combine freight
orders by forming continuous moves. The aim is to reduce the costs of subcontracting by
assigning additional freight orders to the same carrier.
If the carrier is providing a special discount for continuous move or round-trip move, the
discount percentage can be maintained at carrier level in the lane. Optimizer will pick this
additional discount during carrier selection for the continuous move or round-trip lane.
ON
LY
FO
RC
The system takes into account continuous moves during automatic carrier selection only.
Figure 56: SAP TM Carrier Selection: Continuous Move - Scenario Overview
As part of the automatic carrier selection, the system tries to combine freight order by
forming continuous moves. A continuous move is when the transportation service provider
(TSP) agrees to take on a completely new shipment straight after the completion of a freight
order. The aim is to reduce the costs of the by assigning additional freight orders to a carrier.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
247
Unit 5: Carrier Selection
Types of Continuous Moves
The following types of continuous move are available:
●
Simple continuous move
The carrier accepts one or more additional business documents and, after executing the
first business document, directly executes the following business documents one after the
other.
Round trip
R
●
ME
A round trip is a simple continuous move for which the source location of the first business
document and the destination location of the second business document are identical.
A round trip can only consist of exactly two business documents, the system cannot take
into account complex round trips where multiple source locations (pickup) or destination
locations (delivery) are served.
●
●
●
US
TO
The system can combine two or more business documents in a continuous move if the
following conditions are met:
The relevant carrier is available for both business documents.
The arrival date/time of the first business document lies in the departure window of the
second business document.
The departure date/time of the second business document lies in the arrival window of the
first business document.
FO
RC
Furthermore, the distance between the destination location of the first business document
and the source location of the second business document must not exceed the smaller
maximum distance that you have defined for the carrier in the transportation lanes.
Cost Calculation for Continuous Moves
The system first determines the costs per business document (for example, freight order).
Here it considers the strategy and origin of the carrier costs that you defined in the carrier
selection settings. The system then determines the discount per business document. When
doing so, it takes into account the settings that you have made in the transportation lane for
the carrier and the means of transport. The system deducts this discount from the costs
determined previously for each business document.
ON
LY
If you specified in the carrier selection settings that the system is to perform a recalculation of
costs from charge management for continuous moves, the system considers the discounts
for continuous moves for the business documents from charge management in the
recalculation, however, only for the carriers that offer continuous moves. The system saves
the result in the ranking list.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
●
248
Explain continuous moves
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Learning Assessment
R
1. Which of the following statements about carrier selection are correct?
ME
Choose the correct answers.
A Carrier selection based on business share means that a fixed percentage of
business is allocation to a certain carrier.
X
B Carrier selection based on transportation allocations is maintained on the
transportation lane level.
X
C Carrier selection based on transportation allocations means that there is either a
minimum or maximum restriction that regulates how much business you do with a
certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of transport.
X
D Available carriers are defined in the transportation lane.
US
TO
X
2. Which of the following factors influence carrier selection?
RC
Choose the correct answers.
A Master data
X
B Planning profile
X
C Lane Settings
X
D Freight order type
X
E Incompatibilities
FO
X
LY
3. Incompatibilities between order and carrier, or customer and carrier, can also be
maintained in the carrier selection settings.
ON
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
X
True
X
False
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
249
Unit 5: Learning Assessment
4. When defining transportation allocations, a trade lane can be specified.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
X
True
X
False
R
5. Based on what you have learned about business share in transportation planning, which of
the following statements is true?
ME
Choose the correct answer.
A Business share is an in-built mechanism in SAP TM for ensuring all carriers in a
region have sufficient business.
X
B Business share buckets provide a means of numerous shippers pooling together to
create merged (shared) freight orders.
X
C Business share settings define the percentage of business to be allocated to
various carriers. Costs are incurred for non-adherence and the system takes these
into account during optimization.
X
D A company may have working formalised relationships with a number of carriers.
Business share allocation ensures that all carriers receive the same amouont of
business from the comapany.
US
TO
X
FO
RC
6. What are the aims of continuous moves?
Choose the correct answers.
A To reduce the costs of the freight order.
X
B To utilize capacity more effectively.
X
C To reduce the costs of subcontracting.
X
D To ensure the lowest-cost carrier is always assigned.
ON
LY
X
250
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Learning Assessment - Answers
R
1. Which of the following statements about carrier selection are correct?
ME
Choose the correct answers.
A Carrier selection based on business share means that a fixed percentage of
business is allocation to a certain carrier.
X
B Carrier selection based on transportation allocations is maintained on the
transportation lane level.
X
C Carrier selection based on transportation allocations means that there is either a
minimum or maximum restriction that regulates how much business you do with a
certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of transport.
X
D Available carriers are defined in the transportation lane.
US
TO
X
2. Which of the following factors influence carrier selection?
RC
Choose the correct answers.
A Master data
X
B Planning profile
X
C Lane Settings
X
D Freight order type
X
E Incompatibilities
LY
FO
X
3. Incompatibilities between order and carrier, or customer and carrier, can also be
maintained in the carrier selection settings.
ON
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
X
True
X
False
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
251
Unit 5: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. When defining transportation allocations, a trade lane can be specified.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
X
True
X
False
R
5. Based on what you have learned about business share in transportation planning, which of
the following statements is true?
ME
Choose the correct answer.
A Business share is an in-built mechanism in SAP TM for ensuring all carriers in a
region have sufficient business.
X
B Business share buckets provide a means of numerous shippers pooling together to
create merged (shared) freight orders.
X
C Business share settings define the percentage of business to be allocated to
various carriers. Costs are incurred for non-adherence and the system takes these
into account during optimization.
X
D A company may have working formalised relationships with a number of carriers.
Business share allocation ensures that all carriers receive the same amouont of
business from the comapany.
FO
RC
US
TO
X
6. What are the aims of continuous moves?
Choose the correct answers.
A To reduce the costs of the freight order.
X
B To utilize capacity more effectively.
X
C To reduce the costs of subcontracting.
X
D To ensure the lowest-cost carrier is always assigned.
ON
LY
X
252
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson 1
Explaining the Tendering Process
Exercise 23: Tender a Freight Order
Lesson 2
254
261
269
275
US
TO
Configuring the Tendering Plan
Exercise 24: Create a Tendering Profile
R
Freight Tendering
ME
UNIT 6
Lesson 3
284
RC
Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
UNIT OBJECTIVES
Explain tendering types
●
Explain the tendering process in SAP TM
●
Tender a freight order
FO
●
Configure the settings to enable order tendering
●
Determine communication methods with carriers
●
Collaborate using the SAP TM collaboration portal
ON
LY
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
253
Unit 6
Lesson 1
Explaining the Tendering Process
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Explain tendering types
●
Explain the tendering process in SAP TM
●
Tender a freight order
LY
FO
RC
Order Tendering
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you will tender a freight order using different tendering processes.
Figure 57: Subcontracting: Tendering - Context Process Flow
ON
Once carrier selection has taken place, communication with the selected carrier needs to be
initiated. This process is referred to as order tendering. Different tendering processes can be
deployed depending upon the technology used by the carrier. You use this process to tender
(offer) a freight order to one or more potential transportation service providers (TSPs).
Tendering is a bidding process, in which you request one or multiple TSPs to submit a quote
for a transportation service that is defined in a freight order. You can select the TSP that you
want to execute the transportation service by evaluating the quotes. The main characteristics
of the tendering process are flexible configuration and the reduction of required manual
interaction to support ease of use and lower total cost of ownership (TCO).
254
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process
Figure 58: Order Tendering Process
ME
R
Order Tendering Process
The figure Order Tendering Process shows an example of the freight order tendering process.
Tendering Types
Peer-to-Peer Tendering
●
Broadcast Tendering
RC
●
US
TO
In general, there are two types of tendering, as follows: Long-term tendering is where
contracts are negotiated for a longer period, for example, a year. Long term tendering is a
process that is covered in Strategic Freight Management, which we will look at in the
Managing Freight Contracts lesson. Short term tendering is where tendering is executed
based on specific orders. This is known as order tendering. SAP TM supports the following
short term tendering scenarios:
The strategies for each are determined in tendering profiles in SAP TM.
Parties and Roles in the Tendering Process
FO
At least two parties are involved in the tendering process - a customer who wants to
subcontract a transportation service that is defined in a freight order, and a supplier
(subcontractor) or TSP, who potentially carries out the transportation service. There are two
roles on the customer side of the tendering process. The first is a transportation dispatcher,
who is responsible for the transportation service, that is, the freight order. The second is the
tendering manager, who is responsible for configuring and executing the tendering process
and acquiring an acceptable quote from a TSP to perform the transportation service.
LY
Manual and Automatic Tendering
ON
When a transportation dispatcher initiates the tendering process, they have two options:
manual process configuration or automatic tendering. If they want to tender only a single
freight order, the transportation dispatcher can choose between the two options. If they
initiate a tendering process using manual configuration, the tendering manager must
configure and start the tendering process manually. If the transportation dispatcher wants to
tender more than one freight order, they must initiate automatic tendering and use the
automatic tendering configuration in the system.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
255
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Figure 59: Peer to Peer Tendering
US
TO
ME
R
Peer-to-Peer Tendering
FO
RC
Peer-to-peer tendering is a process whereby freight orders are tendered sequentially or
“offered” to preselected carriers or transportation service providers (TSPs). Peer-to-peer
tendering involves the sequential sending of freight requests for quotation (freight RFQs) to
each proposed carrier. The system waits until the carrier sends a freight quotation (FQ) or
until the maximum response time has passed. If the TSP does not send a quote within the
maximum response time, the peer-to-peer tendering process continues, and the system
sends a request for quote to the next TSP. If peer-to-peer tendering ends without an
acceptable quote, the tendering process continues with the next tendering process step that
you have configured. If the TSP sends a quote before the maximum response time has
elapsed, the system evaluates the quote and can either accept or reject it. In the case of
rejection, a new RFQ is sent out. The process continues until at least one acceptable FQ has
been received. The system awards this a Quotation Acceptable evaluation result and the
process ends successfully. There are two types of peer-to-peer tendering: response required
and no response required.
Broadcast Tendering
ON
LY
Broadcast tendering is a tender process whereby freight orders are simultaneously tendered
(offered) to preselected TSPs. All TSPs have to respond within a given maximum response
time. There are two types of broadcast tendering: best offer and first acceptable offer.
Depending on which one of these is being used, either the first acceptable quote wins or, after
the maximum response time, the system evaluates all the acceptable quotes and selects the
TSP that has submitted the quote with the lowest price. If broadcast tendering ends without
an acceptable quote, the tendering process continues with the next tendering process step
that you have configured.
256
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
US
TO
ME
R
Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process
Figure 60: Broadcast Tendering
Tender Types Available in SAP TM
●
●
●
Peer–to– Peer Tendering – Response Required: If a Carrier does not respond in a given
amount of time, it is automatically considered a rejection.
Peer–to– Peer Tendering – No Response Required: If a Carrier does not respond in a
given amount of time, it is automatically considered an acceptance.
RC
●
Broadcast Tendering – Best Offer: Out of all responses within the given timeframe, the
best offer (that is, lowest) is accepted.
Broadcast Tendering – First Acceptable Offer: The first response is accepted
FO
A typical setup is a two-step tendering process. The first step is enabled for Peer-to-Peer
Tendering with a max response time of 30 minutes per carrier. If no response is received from
any of the carriers then the second step is started. The second step is broadcast tendering,
where all carriers will receive the tender request and the tender will be awarded to the carrier
who responds first or offers the best price.
LY
RFQ-Based Tendering Process
Available Tendering Processes
ON
The following tendering processes are available, based on the settings maintained in the
tendering profile:
●
RFQ-based, award manually
●
RFQ-based, award automatically
●
Direct tendering, send freight order directly
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
257
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Figure 61: Process: RFQ-based Tendering
FO
RC
This process is common in European regions where you send an RFQ to the carrier, and the
carrier then quotes their price for the tender in the form of a freight quotation.
ON
LY
You either accept or reject the freight quote manually or automatically, based on the
parameters set in the tendering profile. Acceptance is then sent to the awarded carrier.
258
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process
US
TO
ME
R
Direct Tendering Process
RC
Figure 62: Process: Direct Tendering
You can use a direct tendering process to send a freight order (FO) directly to a specified
carrier without creating a freight RFQ. Carriers can confirm or reject the FOs.
FO
If a carrier does not respond within a certain period of time, the tender can be considered as
accepted automatically. If required, confirmation can be sent as an e-mail to the confirmed
carrier.
Direct and RFQ tendering are separate tendering processes, but can be combined if required.
LY
Facilitated Discussion: Carrier Tendering Criteria
Freight Order Tendering
ON
A tendering process starts if you or the system determine more than one possible carrier.
This tendering process can use a mixture of different modes of tendering (peer-to-peer or
broadcast tendering). You can define a timeout in the system, so that it either tenders the
freight order to another carrier or switches from one tendering type to the next. The tendering
process results in one carrier being selected to execute the freight order.
Carriers can accept or decline these freight RFQs and change data, such as the price, when
they return the freight quotations. You can then automatically accept the tendering and send
the freight order back to the awarded carrier.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
259
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
260
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Exercise 23
Tender a Freight Order
R
Business Example
ME
A large consumer electronics manufacturer has a core carrier program in place. Dedicated
carriers handle most of the freight. As part of the SAP TM implementation, the logistics
transportation manager would like to be able to tender the freight to core carriers first. During
December, in case the core carriers are unable to meet the demands, the plan is to broadcast
the freight to other carriers.
US
TO
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
1. In SAP ERP, create a sales order using the following data:
Field
Order Type
Sales Organization
Distribution Channel
ZT00
3000
10
00
FO
RC
Division
Value
Sold-To Party
TM_CUST_00
PO Number
TM300-GRP##-2.1
Material
PRODTM-00
Order Quantity
300
2. Plan the OTR using the following profiles:
ON
LY
Field
Value
Planning Profile
GRP##-NA-FU-PLAN-PROF
Transportation Cockpit Layout
Standard Layout
Layout for Planning Results Screen
Standard Layout
Description
Planning without carrier selection
3. Create a ranking list with the following data:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
261
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Table 51: Carrier Ranking tab, for peer-to-peer tendering relevance
Field
Value
Carrier
CAR00-01
Values
Carrier
CAR00-02
Carrier
CAR00-03
Carrier
CAR00-04
4. Perform tendering using the TM120_00_TEND_PROFILE.
ME
Field
R
Table 52: Carrier Ranking tab, for broadcast tendering relevance
US
TO
5. Perform “Reject / Accept RFQ” . Reject the first tender (peer to peer) due to no time .
Accept the tendering broadcast for all carriers.
6. In the SAP TM system, the RFQ is awarded. Note the carrier that was selected.
ON
LY
FO
RC
Note:
The tendering responses are evaluated by a background report that runs every
5 minutes on this system. Therefore, it might take up to 5 minutes for your
freight order to be updated. Please keep refreshing the freight order until you
see the described results.
262
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Solution 23
Tender a Freight Order
R
Business Example
ME
A large consumer electronics manufacturer has a core carrier program in place. Dedicated
carriers handle most of the freight. As part of the SAP TM implementation, the logistics
transportation manager would like to be able to tender the freight to core carriers first. During
December, in case the core carriers are unable to meet the demands, the plan is to broadcast
the freight to other carriers.
US
TO
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
1. In SAP ERP, create a sales order using the following data:
Field
Order Type
Sales Organization
Distribution Channel
ZT00
3000
10
00
FO
RC
Division
Value
Sold-To Party
TM_CUST_00
PO Number
TM300-GRP##-2.1
Material
PRODTM-00
Order Quantity
300
a) In SAP ERP, on the Easy Access screen, in the Command field, enter transaction VA01
and choose Enter .
ON
LY
b) In the Create Sales Order: Initial Screen , enter the following data:
Field
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
c) Choose Enter.
d) In the Create TM100 Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following information:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
263
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Field
Value
Sold-To Party
TM_CUST_00
PO Number
TM300-GRP##-2.1
Value
Material
PRODTM-00
Order Quantity
300
f) Choose Save and note the sales order number.
2. Plan the OTR using the following profiles:
Planning Profile
Value
US
TO
Field
ME
Field
R
e) In the All items table, enter the following information:
GRP##-NA-FU-PLAN-PROF
Transportation Cockpit Layout
Standard Layout
Layout for Planning Results Screen
Standard Layout
Description
Planning without carrier selection
FO
RC
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose ERP Logistics Integration
→ Overview Transportation Requirements.
b) Select the OTR based on the sales order that you created in step 1.
c) Choose Start Transportation Cockpit .
d) On the Transportation Cockpit: Profile and Layout Sets screen, check for a row with the
same profiles and layout settings as in the table. If it exists, already, skip to step (h).
If the Profile and Layout Sets screen is not displayed, choose Change Profile Selection
→ Profile Selection Screen.
e) If the profile row does not yet exist as shown in the table, choose New.
LY
f) Enter the data in the table.
g) Choose Save.
ON
h) Select the row corresponding to the entries in the table and choose Continue.
i) In the Freight Unit screen area, select the freight unit.
j) Choose Optimizer Planning → Selected Entries with All Resources.
k) In the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings screen area, select the freight order that has
just been created.
l) Choose Accept.
m) Choose Save.
264
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process
3. Create a ranking list with the following data:
Table 51: Carrier Ranking tab, for peer-to-peer tendering relevance
Field
Value
Carrier
CAR00-01
Values
Carrier
CAR00-02
Carrier
CAR00-03
Carrier
CAR00-04
ME
Field
R
Table 52: Carrier Ranking tab, for broadcast tendering relevance
US
TO
a) In the Transportation Cockpit , in the Freight Order/Freight Booking screen area, open
the freight order.
b) Choose the Subcontracting tab and choose Edit.
c) In the Subcontracting Data screen area, choose the Carrier Ranking tab.
d) To insert the carrier for peer-to-peer tendering, choose Insert Carrier.
RC
e) For carrier CAR00-01, for peer-to-peer relevance, select the Peer-to-Peer Tendering
Relevance checkbox.
Note:
Ensure the Broadcast Tendering Relevance checkbox is not selected.
FO
f) To insert the carriers for broadcast tendering, choose Insert Carrier.
LY
g) For carriers, CAR00-02, CAR00-03 and CAR00-04, for broadcast relevance, select
the Broadcast Tendering Relevance checkbox.
Note:
Ensure the Peer-to-Peer Tendering Relevance checkbox is not selected.
h) Save and choose Edit.
ON
4. Perform tendering using the TM120_00_TEND_PROFILE.
a) Choose Subcontracting -> Automatic Tendering .
b) In the Tendering dialog box, enter TM120_00_TEND_PROFILE in the Tendering Profile
field. Choose OK.
c) On the Subcontracting tab, choose the Tendering Overview tab and review the two
tendering steps that have been created.
d) Save your entries.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
265
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Note:
An RFQ for your freight order has been created. Make a note of your RFQ
number:_________________________
R
Caution:
Leave the freight order screen open. You need it in the next exercise step.
ME
5. Perform “Reject / Accept RFQ” . Reject the first tender (peer to peer) due to no time .
Accept the tendering broadcast for all carriers.
a) In NWBC for SAP TM, on the Freight Order Management tab, choose Road -> Overview
Tendering.
US
TO
b) In the Active Queries screen area, for Freight RFQs , choose Open and refresh the
query.
c) Now reject the RFQ for Carrier 01. Select the row of your Freight RFQ. Choose Create
Freight Quotation -> Reject (no time).
d) In the Reject Request for Quotation dialog box, choose OK .
FO
RC
e) In the freight order, choose Refresh. On the Subcontracting tab, choose the Tendering
Overview tab. The new status in the tendering plan is Closed for the RFQ for Carrier 01.
Step 2 of your tendering plan has been started automatically.
Note:
The tendering responses are evaluated by a background report that runs
every 5 minutes on this system. Therefore, it might take up to 5 minutes for
your freight order to be updated. Please keep refreshing the freight order
until you see the described results.
f) Three new RFQs are now shown. You can see them by expanding the first column.
Make note of the new RFQ numbers.
LY
Caution:
Leave the freight order screen open. You need it in the next exercise step.
ON
g) To accept the broadcast tendering for Carriers 02 - 04, go back to the Overview
Tendering worklist.
h) In the Active Queries screen area, for Freight RFQs , choose Open .
i) Choose Refresh.
j) Select the three newly shown RFQs (for carriers CAR00-02, CAR00-03, CAR00-04).
k) Choose Create Freight Quotation → Accept.
l) In the Accept without Changes dialog box, choose OK .
266
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Explaining the Tendering Process
6. In the SAP TM system, the RFQ is awarded. Note the carrier that was selected.
Note:
The tendering responses are evaluated by a background report that runs every
5 minutes on this system. Therefore, it might take up to 5 minutes for your
freight order to be updated. Please keep refreshing the freight order until you
see the described results.
R
a) Go to the freight order. On the Subcontracting tab, choose the Tendering Overview tab.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
b) Choose Refresh. Note the carrier that was awarded the tender and assigned to the
freight order.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
267
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Explain tendering types
●
Explain the tendering process in SAP TM
●
Tender a freight order
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
268
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Lesson 2
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Configure the settings to enable order tendering
US
TO
●
ME
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you will configure the settings to enable order tendering.
R
Configuring the Tendering Plan
FO
RC
Configuration Settings for Tendering
Figure 63: General Settings for Tendering
LY
The standard settings for tendering are defined in the Define General Settings for Tendering
Customizing activity. You can also specify the tendering communication and process settings
that you can use in the Define Freight Order Types Customizing activity.
ON
In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation
Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Tendering
→ Define General Settings for Tendering.
In the 01 - Visibility Settings view, you can select the settings that determine the visibility level
of a price limit, submitted price, and stop dates in a tendering process.
In the 02 - Rejection Reason Codes view, you can define reason code identifiers (IDs) and
descriptions to classify the reasons for rejecting freight request for quotations (freight RFQs).
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
269
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
US
TO
ME
R
E-Mail and SMS Content Settings
FO
RC
Figure 64: Tendering Profile: E-Mail and SMS
In the 03 - E-mail and SMS Content view, you can define the following settings:
Documents for Notifications
You can specify the names of the documents that the system uses to create e-mails. You
can specify separate documents for the e-mail subject field, the e-mail body text, and
SMS text content. You can also specify additional information that the system adds to
other e-mail body text or SMS text. The system uses the e-mail or SMS type to determine
where it adds the additional text. You must define the documents that you use in this
view as General text documents in transaction SE61.
Triggering Notifications at Process Events
LY
You can specify that the system sends an e-mail or an SMS message to a carrier when an
event occurs in the tendering process. Events include sending a freight RFQ to a carrier
and awarding a freight quotation (FQ).
Bundling Notifications
ON
You can schedule the sending of e-mails and SMS messages in a batch report. With this,
the contact person for the carrier receives e-mails or SMS messages only when the batch
report runs in your system.
The e-mails or SMS messages contain information about all the new events that have
taken place since the last bundle of e-mails or SMS messages were sent. This means that
the carrier does not receive 10 separate e-mails for new freight RFQs, but one e-mail
containing the information on all 10 new freight RFQs.
Process Settings
In the 04 - Process Settings view, you can specify the following process settings for tendering:
270
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan
Default tendering manager
●
Visibility settings
●
Tendering profile
●
Carrier selection settings
●
Maximum response duration
●
Considering the calling hours of a business partner
R
●
ME
You can use the process and communication settings that you define in the Define Freight
Order Types Customizing activity to specify the tendering settings for each freight order type.
The following are the settings in the freight order type that the system uses to determine the
Customizing settings for tendering:
Default, where the system uses the system default settings
●
Freight order type, where the system uses the type of freight order
●
Conditions, where the system uses the runtime characteristics of a freight order
Communication Settings
US
TO
●
In the 05 - Communication Settings view, you can specify the following communication
settings for tendering:
●
●
Use EDI messages to communicate with carriers
Send particular types of e-mails to carriers. (Types include e-mails for freight RFQs, FQ
cancelations, and FQ awards)
Send freight RFQs as e-mails or SMS messages
ON
LY
FO
●
Send alerts to tendering managers whether or not the managers have subscribed to a
tendering alert category
RC
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
271
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
US
TO
ME
R
Carrier-Specific Communication Settings
Figure 65: Tendering Profile: Carrier Communication and Defaults
In the 06 - Carrier -Specific Communication Settings view, you can define communication
settings for a particular carrier that are different from the general communication settings
defined in the 05 - Communication Settings view.
●
●
FO
RC
This includes the following settings:
Send EDI messages to this carrier and not to other carriers
Send particular types of e-mails and SMS messages to this carrier and not to other
carriers
In the 07 - Default Settings view, you must specify one default set of process settings and one
default set of communication settings for your tendering processes.
The system uses these settings if it cannot determine specific settings based on the freight
order type. You can also enable the system to create change documents to record the
changes you make to the tendering profiles that you edit.
ON
LY
Tendering Profiles
Figure 66: Tendering Profile Setup
The tendering profile contains basic tendering data and is a prerequisite for automatic
tendering. You can use a tendering profile when you manually create a tendering plan. Within
the profile, you can define multi-step tendering. This allows a company to mix tendering
272
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan
types. For example, you can first use peer-to-peer tendering, and if this is unsuccessful you
can use broadcast tendering.
US
TO
ME
R
Tendering Profile Details
Figure 67: Tendering Profile Details
RC
To create a new tendering profile, in SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, on the
Application Administration tab, choose Tendering → Tendering Profiles → Create Tendering
Profile.
The tendering profile is set up according to business requirements.
Parts of the Tendering Profile
FO
The following are the main parts of a tendering profile:
Tendering step
You can specify one or more tendering steps
Tendering type
The following are the tendering types:
Peer-to-Peer Tendering — Response Required
●
Peer-to-Peer Tendering — No Response Required
●
Broadcast Tendering — Best Offer
●
Broadcast Tendering — First Acceptable Offer
ON
LY
●
Tendering process mode
The following are the tendering process modes:
●
Freight RFQ Based, Award Manually
●
Freight RFQ Based, Award Automatically
●
Direct Tendering, Send Freight Order Directly
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
273
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Carrier/Carrier Assignment Method
The assignment of a carrier is optional in a tendering profile. When you use a profile to
create a new tendering plan, the system can retrieve a carrier according to the carrier
assignment strategy.
The following are the standard carrier assignment strategies:
Get Carriers from Ranking List
●
Get Carriers from the Transportation Lane Master Data
●
Get Assigned Carrier from Freight Order
●
Assign Carriers Manually
You can set a relative price limit for each tendering step.
Maximum response duration
ME
Relative price limit
R
●
Manual evaluation
US
TO
This is the longest period of time within which a carrier must respond
This requires the tendering manager to manually evaluate each freight quotation (FQ).
Carrier-specific freight agreement (FA)
ON
LY
FO
RC
Visibility settings
274
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Exercise 24
Create a Tendering Profile
R
Business Example
ME
A large TV plasma manufacturer has a core carrier program in place. Dedicated carriers
handle most of the freight. As part of the SAP TM implementation, the logistics transportation
manager would like to be able to tender the freight to core carriers first. During December, in
case the core carriers are unable to meet the demands, the plan is to broadcast the freight to
other carriers.
US
TO
To do this, you must:
1. In Customizing for SAP TM, create a visibility setting as outlined in Task 1.
2. In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, create a 2-step tendering profile as outlined
in Task 2.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
RC
Create a Visibility Setting
Before a tendering profile can be created, you have to create the visibility setting in
Customizing.
1. In Customizing for SAP TM, create the visibility settings with the following data:
Field
Value
Visibility Settings
FO
TM300_##_VIS
TM300 Group ## visibility settings
Stop Dates Visib.
Editable, for information only
Price Limit
Not Relevant
LY
Vis. Stngs Desc.
Subm. Price Visib
Hidden
Lowest Price
Hidden
ON
Create a 2-Step Tendering Profile
In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, create a 2-step tendering profile.
Tendering type
Tendering process
Carrier assignment
method
Visibility Settings
Freight RFQ-Based,
Award Automatically
Get Carriers from
Ranking list
TM300_##_VIS
Step 1
Peer-2-Peer Tendering – Response Required
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
275
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Tendering type
Tendering process
Carrier assignment
method
Visibility Settings
Freight RFQ-Based,
Award Automatically
Get Carriers from
Ranking list
TM300_##_VIS
Step 2
Broadcast Tendering
– First acceptable offer
Field
Description
Tendering Type
Determines how ten- Peer-to-Peer
dering is carried out Tendering, Response Required
Tendering Process
Tendering process
mode
-Freight RFQBased, Award Automatically
Carrier
Carrier
Blank
--
Freight RFQ Sequence Number
Freight RFQ sequence number
Blank
--
Carrier Assignment
Method
Determines how car- Get Carriers
riers are assigned to from Ranking
the freight order
List
A ranking list is provided from which
carriers are selected
Carrier-Specific
Freight Agreement
Carrier-specific
freight agreement
--
Maximum Response
Duration
Maximum time with- 00:05
in which the carrier
must respond to an
RFQ
FO
RC
LY
ON
276
Description
Tender is sent to one
carrier and a confirmation is required
from this carrier
US
TO
Value
ME
2. Enter your data for Step 1 based on the following data:
R
1. In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, create a new two-step tendering profile,
TM300_##_TEND_PROFILE.
Deselect checkbox
The RFQ is confirmed in the freight
order when the program that checks
the responses is
executed. If you
want to run this report manually, on
the SAP Easy Access
screen, choose Application Administration -> Background
Reports -> Background Processing of
Tendering .
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan
Description
Value
Description
Visibility Settings
Defines the visibility
setting for RFQ, that
is, whether prices
are displayed,
whether the carrier
can change the prices, and so on
TM300_##_VIS
--
3. Enter your data for Step 2 based on the following data:
Description
Tendering Type
Determines how ten- Broadcast TenTender is sent to all
dering is carried out dering – First
carriers
Acceptable Offer
Tendering Process
Tendering process
mode
Freight RFQBased, Award Automatically
Carrier
Carrier
Blank
Freight RFQ Sequence Number
Freight RFQ sequence number
Blank
Carrier Assignment
Method
Determines how car- Get Carriers
riers are assigned to from Ranking
the freight order
List
RC
Carrier-specific
freight agreement
Maximum Response
Duration
Maximum time with- 00:05
in which the carrier
must respond to an
RFQ
ON
LY
FO
Carrier-Specific
Freight Agreement
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Description
ME
Field
US
TO
Value
R
Field
A ranking list is provided from which
carriers are selected
Not selected
The RFQ is confirmed in the freight
order when the program that checks
the responses is
executed. If you
want to run this report manually, on
the SAP Easy Access
screen, choose Application Administration -> Background
Reports -> Background Processing of
Tendering .
277
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Description
Value
Description
Visibility Settings
Defines the visibility
setting for RFQ, that
is, whether prices
are displayed,
whether the carrier
can change the prices, and so on
TM300_##_VIS
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Field
278
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Solution 24
Create a Tendering Profile
R
Business Example
ME
A large TV plasma manufacturer has a core carrier program in place. Dedicated carriers
handle most of the freight. As part of the SAP TM implementation, the logistics transportation
manager would like to be able to tender the freight to core carriers first. During December, in
case the core carriers are unable to meet the demands, the plan is to broadcast the freight to
other carriers.
US
TO
To do this, you must:
1. In Customizing for SAP TM, create a visibility setting as outlined in Task 1.
2. In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, create a 2-step tendering profile as outlined
in Task 2.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
FO
RC
Create a Visibility Setting
Before a tendering profile can be created, you have to create the visibility setting in
Customizing.
1. In Customizing for SAP TM, create the visibility settings with the following data:
Value
Visibility Settings
TM300_##_VIS
Vis. Stngs Desc.
TM300 Group ## visibility settings
Stop Dates Visib.
Editable, for information only
Price Limit
Not Relevant
ON
LY
Field
Subm. Price Visib
Hidden
Lowest Price
Hidden
a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP
Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order
Management → Tendering → Define General Settings for Tendering.
b) Choose 01 - Visibility Settings.
c) To create a new profile, choose New Entries. Enter the data from the table in this step.
d) Save your entries and exit Customizing.
Create a 2-Step Tendering Profile
In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, create a 2-step tendering profile.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
279
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Tendering type
Tendering process
Carrier assignment
method
Visibility Settings
Freight RFQ-Based,
Award Automatically
Get Carriers from
Ranking list
TM300_##_VIS
Freight RFQ-Based,
Award Automatically
Get Carriers from
Ranking list
TM300_##_VIS
Step 1
Peer-2-Peer Tendering – Response Required
ME
Broadcast Tendering
– First acceptable offer
R
Step 2
1. In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, create a new two-step tendering profile,
TM300_##_TEND_PROFILE.
US
TO
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, on the Application Administration tab,
choose Tendering → Tendering Profiles → Create Tendering Profile.
b) In the Tendering Profile field, enter TM300_##_TEND_PROFILE.
c) In the Tendering Profile Description field, enter TM300 Group ## Tendering
Profile.
d) Proceed with the next exercise step without saving.
2. Enter your data for Step 1 based on the following data:
Description
Value
Description
Tendering Type
Determines how ten- Peer-to-Peer
dering is carried out Tendering, Response Required
Tendering Process
Tendering process
mode
-Freight RFQBased, Award Automatically
Carrier
Carrier
Blank
--
Freight RFQ Sequence Number
Freight RFQ sequence number
Blank
--
Carrier Assignment
Method
Determines how car- Get Carriers
riers are assigned to from Ranking
the freight order
List
A ranking list is provided from which
carriers are selected
Carrier-specific
freight agreement
--
ON
LY
FO
RC
Field
Carrier-Specific
Freight Agreement
280
Deselect checkbox
Tender is sent to one
carrier and a confirmation is required
from this carrier
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan
Description
Value
Maximum Response
Duration
Maximum time with- 00:05
in which the carrier
must respond to an
RFQ
Visibility Settings
Defines the visibility
setting for RFQ, that
is, whether prices
are displayed,
whether the carrier
can change the prices, and so on
Description
The RFQ is confirmed in the freight
order when the program that checks
the responses is
executed. If you
want to run this report manually, on
the SAP Easy Access
screen, choose Application Administration -> Background
Reports -> Background Processing of
Tendering .
--
US
TO
TM300_##_VIS
FO
RC
a) Choose Insert Step.
ME
R
Field
b) Enter the data provided in the table.
c) Proceed with the next exercise step without saving.
3. Enter your data for Step 2 based on the following data:
Description
Tendering Type
Determines how ten- Broadcast TenTender is sent to all
dering is carried out dering – First
carriers
Acceptable Offer
Tendering Process
Tendering process
mode
Freight RFQBased, Award Automatically
Carrier
Carrier
Blank
Freight RFQ Sequence Number
Freight RFQ sequence number
Blank
Carrier Assignment
Method
Determines how car- Get Carriers
riers are assigned to from Ranking
List
the freight order
Carrier-Specific
Freight Agreement
Carrier-specific
freight agreement
ON
LY
Field
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Value
Description
A ranking list is provided from which
carriers are selected
Not selected
281
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
Description
Value
Maximum Response
Duration
Maximum time with- 00:05
in which the carrier
must respond to an
RFQ
Visibility Settings
Defines the visibility
setting for RFQ, that
is, whether prices
are displayed,
whether the carrier
can change the prices, and so on
Description
The RFQ is confirmed in the freight
order when the program that checks
the responses is
executed. If you
want to run this report manually, on
the SAP Easy Access
screen, choose Application Administration -> Background
Reports -> Background Processing of
Tendering .
US
TO
TM300_##_VIS
FO
RC
a) Choose Insert Step.
ME
R
Field
b) Enter the data provided in the table.
c) Save your entries.
ON
LY
d) Exit the function.
282
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring the Tendering Plan
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Configure the settings to enable order tendering
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
283
Unit 6
Lesson 3
R
Identifying the Tendering Collaboration
Scenarios
US
TO
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you will look at different tendering collaboration scenarios and ways to
communicate with carriers.
●
Determine communication methods with carriers
●
Collaborate using the SAP TM collaboration portal
Tendering Communication Methods
FO
RC
As part of the tendering process, it is important to review the communication methods that
support the tendering scenarios. For carriers who may not be able to support EDI (electronic
data interchange) scenarios, SAP has developed a Web-based collaboration portal to improve
communication. This requires subcontractors to log on to SAP TM using the Web in order to
process a freight order. On a periodic basis, each subcontractor views their RFQs (modeled as
tendering requests) and submits quotations (modeled as tendering responses). Each
subcontractor is provided with their own user IDs and passwords, as well as the relevant
authorization to restrict visibility to only the loads that have been tendered to them.
Additional methods are supported, such as receiving RFQs by e-mail and SMS and submitting
quotations by e-mail without the need to access an SAP TM system at all. In this case, an RFQ
is sent to a carrier by e-mail or SMS message. The carrier responds to the e-mail using a
regular e-mail client on a PC or a mobile device. The e-mail is then converted (using PI) into a
quotation. Carriers can accept RFQs directly, reject them with a specified reason, or accept
them with changes.
ON
LY
Mobile tendering using a smartphone app is also supported and allows a mobile device to
receive new RFQs, respond to RFQs, and include changes to dates and prices. Users can
check addresses and routes on a map, e-mail or phone the contact person, create a calendar
entry for awarded tenders, and check other appointments in the calendar.
284
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
US
TO
ME
R
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
Figure 68: Tendering Communication Methods
Advanced Communication
If a subcontractor is more technically advanced, B2B communication can be used.
FO
RC
In this situation, a copy of the freight order is created for the carrier (the tendering manager
or system administrator can control what is included in the copy that is visible to the carrier).
The copy is persisted in the system to retain what was communicated to the carrier. A freight
request for quotation (tendering request) is sent via PI and received as a forwarding quotation
in the supplier’s SAP TM system. The carrier can accept the order directly or, if the first
carrier rejects the order, the freight order will be sent to the next carrier. Finally, a quotation
confirmation is sent back to the customer and is converted into a quotation (tendering
response) in the customer’s SAP TM system. The Change Controller allows you to react to
changes in the FO, for example, by stopping tendering when there are major changes in the
FO.
ON
LY
Tendering via B2B Messages
Figure 69: Connection of RFQ-based Tendering and Forwarding Quotation via B2B Messages
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
285
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
In RFQ-based tendering via business-to-business (B2B) messages, a freight request for
quotation (modeled as a “tendering request”) is received by the supplier's TM system as a
forwarding quotation.
The quotation confirmation is sent back to the customer and is converted into a quotation
(“tendering response”) in the customer’s TM system.
US
TO
ME
R
Direct Tendering via B2B Messages
Figure 70: Connection of Direct Tendering and Forwarding Order via B2B Messages
FO
RC
In direct tendering via B2B messages, the freight order is sent directly to the carrier, where is
it received as a forwarding order. The carrier can accept the order directly. If the carrier
rejects the order, the freight order will be sent to the next carrier.
ON
LY
Tendering via Email and SMS
Figure 71: Tendering via E-mail and SMS
In the Tendering via E-mail and SMS scenario, an RFQ (modeled as a "tendering request") is
sent to a carrier by e-mail or SMS. The carrier responds to the e-mail using a regular e-mail
client on a PC or a mobile device and sends it back to the ordering party. The e-mail is then
converted into a quotation (modeled as a "tendering response").
286
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
You can define communication settings for a particular carrier that are different from the
general communication settings.
Mobile Tendering
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Freight RFQs can easily be integrated with carriers who cannot implement a complex B2B
integration. Mobile tendering allows a mobile device to receive new RFQs, respond to RFQs,
and include changes to dates and prices. Users can check addresses and routes on the map,
e-mail or phone the contact person, create a calendar entry for awarded tenders, and check
other appointments in the calendar.
Figure 72: Mobile Tendering
To Tender with a Mobile App
FO
1. Download the SAP Transport Tendering app from the Apple App Store.
2. Open the app and follow the instructions to complete the installation. To run the app on
real data, you need to connect to your company's SAP server by entering the server
address.
ON
LY
3. Requests are grouped under four headings, as follows:
●
Open
●
Quoted
●
Completed
●
All
4. Choose any of the headings to view details of requests in that category.
5. Use the app as appropriate to accept or reject quotes.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
287
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
US
TO
ME
R
SAP TM Collaboration Portal
Figure 73: SAP TM Collaboration Portal
The SAP Transportation Management collaboration portal for carriers (SAP TM Collaboration
Portal) supports collaborative business processes.
FO
RC
As a carrier working with several shippers that use the SAP TM collaboration portal, you have
separate access to each of your shippers. In each case, you can work with one shipper only.
The shipper can provide you with access to the following areas in the SAP TM collaboration
portal:
●
In the Freight Settlement area, you can enter differences in logistical item quantities,
charge amounts in a freight order, and create a freight settlement dispute case against the
shipper.
LY
●
In the Freight Order Management area, you can take part in a tendering process started by
a shipper. You can view your shipper's freight requests for quotation, and submit freight
quotations to the shipper. You can accept, change, or reject the shipper's freight requests
for quotation. You can report planned and unexpected events for a freight order as well as
enter quantity deviations.
In the Freight Agreement Management area, you can respond to your shipper's freight
agreement RFQs with your rates for the transportation services.
ON
●
Note:
In this training course we focus on the tendering functionality. Other Collaboration
Portal functionalities are covered in other TM training courses.
The following browsers are supported:
●
288
Windows
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
●
-
Internet Explorer 9 and upwards, including IE10
-
Firefox 24 (Firefox Extended Support Release - ESR) and latest version
-
Chrome (latest version)
MAC OS X
-
Safari 5.1 and upwards
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
SAP TM Collaboration Portal - Topics Overview
Figure 74: SAP TM Collaboration Portal - Topics Overview
The main benefits of the SAP TM Collaboration Portal are:
Small and mid-size carriers do not need to have SAP TM installed
LY
●
●
ON
●
●
●
Full browser based solution means that carrier even does not need to have access to
shipper’s network (that is connection via VPN, and so on)
All common browsers are supported (Internet Explorer 9, Mozilla Firefox, Safari, Google
Chrome)
Carrier does not have to install anything, but just log in into the collaboration portal with
the access (login and password) provided by the shipper as SAP TM collaboration portal
owner/host
Carrier can see only request for quotations (RFQ) assigned to it and his transmitted
quotations
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
289
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
●
User settings in the portal are stored and available after re-logon to increase the usability
of the portal by the carrier
As a carrier, you enter the SAP Transportation Management collaboration portal through the
Home screen. This screen displays a worklist with the key performance indicators (KPIs) for
the available areas in the form of tiles. From the tiles, you can navigate to the individual areas
to continue your work.
You can see only the areas that are relevant for you.
●
Pending freight quotations: the number of freight quotations that you have submitted to
the shipper and for which a decision about the award is pending
Open freight orders for execution: the number of open freight orders for which you still
have to report at least one event
US
TO
●
Open freight RFQs: the number of freight RFQs to which you can respond with a freight
quotation
ME
●
R
The following KPIs are available for Freight Order Management:
ON
LY
FO
RC
SAP TM Collaboration Portal - Process Overview
Figure 75: SAP TM Collaboration Portal - Process Overview
As a carrier, you can display the freight requests for quotation (RFQs) that you have received
from a shipper. You can also display the freight quotations that you submitted to your shipper
for a specific freight RFQ.
If you do not make any changes you can accept one or more freight RFQs. If you make
changes you can accept only one freight RFQ. You can reject one or more freight RFQs and
provide a reason for rejection. Furthermore, you can display the details about the tendered
freight order, such as item details, location information, and business partner.
290
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
The business process of tendering in the Freight Order Management area in the SAP
Transportation Management collaboration portal corresponds to the tendering process in the
standard SAP TM system.
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Technical Architecture of the SAP TM Collaboration Portal
Figure 76: Freight Requests for Quotation (RFQs)
FO
On the Freight Requests for Quotation screen, you can view all freight requests for quotation
that you have received from a specific shipper. You can display open and closed freight RFQs.
From the toolbar, you can apply the quick filter to filter freight RFQs by their status (open,
closed, all).
In the table view, you can apply a filter to those fields that support the filter function by
entering a filter value in accordance with the SAP UI5 standard. You can show or hide
individual columns and change their sequence by using drag and drop.
LY
You can find freight RFQs using the search field in the toolbar. The system returns all freight
RFQs that contain the search term in a field (fuzzy search) irrespective of whether the field is
shown or hidden.
ON
If a field can be sorted, you can display the contents of the individual columns in ascending or
descending order.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
291
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
FO
RC
Figure 77: RFQs Details
US
TO
ME
R
RFQs Details
On the Freight Requests for Quotation screen, you have the following options:
●
●
●
●
You can accept one or more freight RFQs at the same time.
You can reject one or more freight RFQs at the same time and specify a reason for
rejection.
You can accept a freight RFQ with changes.
You can view the stop sequence and the tendering details (cargo information, locations,
and business partners).
You can display the source location and destination location of a freight RFQ on a map.
●
You can view the lowest suggested price submitted by another carrier.
●
You can export the content of a freight RFQ from the table view to a Microsoft Excel file.
ON
LY
●
292
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
US
TO
ME
R
Accept RFQ with Changes
RC
Figure 78: Accept RFQ with Changes
The stop sequence view enables you to see which cargo items were loaded and unloaded at
each stop.
FO
For each stop in the stop sequence, you can view the expected arrival and departure times, as
well as the gross weight and volume of the truck once the loading or unloading operation has
been completed at a specific location.
You can also view the weight, volume, quantity, and dimensions for each separate cargo item,
and see whether the item is classified as dangerous goods. You can also see whether each
cargo item is to be loaded or unloaded at the specific location.
LY
On the Freight Requests for Quotation screen, the table view and detail view show the
calculated gross weight and volume for the entire freight order. You can view the calculated
quantity in the table view only.
ON
When your shipper sends a freight request for quotation (RFQ), you can accept it without
making any changes, accept it with changes, or reject it.
Accepting Freight RFQ Without Changes
If you are in agreement with the freight RFQ, you can accept it without making any changes.
Accepting Freight RFQ with Changes
Depending on the tendering settings, you can use the following functions:
●
If you want to accept a freight RFQ with changes, you can change the price and dates. You
can suggest your own price in relation to the price limit of the shipper. You can change
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
293
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
both the amount and the currency. Your suggested price appears on the freight quotation
as the submitted price.
●
You can overwrite dates (start and end date) requested by the shipper. These appear on
the freight quotation as the submitted dates. Acceptable dates are fixed limits defined by
the shipper and are used to delimit the requested dates. You cannot change the
acceptable dates.
If you reject several freight RFQs at the same time, each one is assigned the same rejection
reason.
ME
●
R
Rejecting a Freight RFQ
●
If you reject a freight RFQ, you can specify a rejection reason.
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
Freight Quotations
Figure 79: Freight Quotations
ON
You can display all of the freight quotations that you have sent to a shipper. If you want to
display information about a specific freight quotation in the detail view, you must select a
single row.
If you have accepted a freight RFQ with changes, your suggested price is shown on the freight
quotation as the submitted price. On the Freight Request for Quotation screen, the system
always displays the information from the freight RFQ most recently submitted.
You can display the source location and destination location of a freight quotation on a map.
You can view the lowest suggested price submitted by another carrier.
You can export the content of a freight quotation from the table view to a Microsoft Excel file.
294
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying the Tendering Collaboration Scenarios
Facilitated Discussion: SAP TM Collaboration Criteria
List the ways your organization can use the different collaboration methods during tendering.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Determine communication methods with carriers
●
Collaborate using the SAP TM collaboration portal
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
295
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 6: Freight Tendering
296
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Learning Assessment
True
X
False
ME
X
US
TO
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
R
1. Broadcast tendering refers to a process whereby all quotations received (in response to
an RFQ) are broadcast to all carriers in an effort to improve transparency.
2. During the tendering process, a shipper sends a freight order directly to a specific carrier
without creating a freight RFQ. What tendering process is the shipper using?
Choose the correct answer.
A Direct tendering
X
B Broadcast tendering
X
C Best offer tendering
X
D First response tendering
RC
X
3. Which of the following statements about freight order tendering are correct?
FO
Choose the correct answers.
A During the tendering process, only one tendering mode can be used.
X
B During the tendering process, carriers can update prices when the return freight
quotations.
ON
LY
X
X
C The tendering process results in one carrier being selected to execute the freight
order.
X
D The tendering process starts if you or the system determine more than one
possible carrier.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
297
Unit 6: Learning Assessment
4. In the standard settings for tendering, which settings control the information from a
freight RFQ that can be seen and edited by a carrier?
A Visibility Settings
X
B Carrier -Specific Communication Settings
X
C E-mail and SMS Content Setting
X
D E-mail and SMS Content Setting
ME
X
R
Choose the correct answer.
5. When does the system use the settings defined in the Default Settings view?
Choose the correct answer.
A When the system cannot determine a freight order type specific settings.
X
B When the system is performing automatic tendering.
X
C When carrier does not have its own SAP TM system.
X
D When the system receives a freight RFQ rejection from a carrier.
US
TO
X
6. A carrier does not have an SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) system. What
tendering scenario can be used between the carrier and the shipper?
FO
RC
Choose the correct answer.
X
A Tendering via E-mail
X
B Tendering via SMS
X
C Tendering via B2B messages
X
D Tendering via Collaboration Portal
7. To use the Collaboration Portal, a carrier must have SAP TM installed.
LY
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
X
False
ON
X
298
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Learning Assessment - Answers
True
X
False
ME
X
US
TO
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
R
1. Broadcast tendering refers to a process whereby all quotations received (in response to
an RFQ) are broadcast to all carriers in an effort to improve transparency.
2. During the tendering process, a shipper sends a freight order directly to a specific carrier
without creating a freight RFQ. What tendering process is the shipper using?
Choose the correct answer.
A Direct tendering
X
B Broadcast tendering
X
C Best offer tendering
X
D First response tendering
RC
X
FO
3. Which of the following statements about freight order tendering are correct?
Choose the correct answers.
A During the tendering process, only one tendering mode can be used.
X
B During the tendering process, carriers can update prices when the return freight
quotations.
ON
LY
X
X
C The tendering process results in one carrier being selected to execute the freight
order.
X
D The tendering process starts if you or the system determine more than one
possible carrier.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
299
Unit 6: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. In the standard settings for tendering, which settings control the information from a
freight RFQ that can be seen and edited by a carrier?
A Visibility Settings
X
B Carrier -Specific Communication Settings
X
C E-mail and SMS Content Setting
X
D E-mail and SMS Content Setting
ME
X
R
Choose the correct answer.
5. When does the system use the settings defined in the Default Settings view?
Choose the correct answer.
A When the system cannot determine a freight order type specific settings.
X
B When the system is performing automatic tendering.
X
C When carrier does not have its own SAP TM system.
X
D When the system receives a freight RFQ rejection from a carrier.
US
TO
X
FO
RC
6. A carrier does not have an SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) system. What
tendering scenario can be used between the carrier and the shipper?
Choose the correct answer.
X
A Tendering via E-mail
X
B Tendering via SMS
X
C Tendering via B2B messages
X
D Tendering via Collaboration Portal
LY
7. To use the Collaboration Portal, a carrier must have SAP TM installed.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
ON
X
X
300
True
False
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
UNIT 7
Freight Orders in
Transportation Management
R
Lesson 1
List the methods of creating freight orders in SAP TM
ON
LY
FO
RC
●
US
TO
UNIT OBJECTIVES
302
ME
Creating Freight Orders
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
301
Unit 7
Lesson 1
Creating Freight Orders
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
List the methods of creating freight orders in SAP TM
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn the different methods of creating freight orders in SAP TM.
ON
LY
FO
RC
Role of Freight Orders in Transportation
Figure 80: SAP TM Document Flow
Depending on the scenario in which SAP TM is used, different types of transportation
requests can be created in SAP TM to start the transportation process. These requests can
include forwarding orders (FWO), order-based transportation requirements (OTR), and
delivery-based transportation requirements (DTR).
Upon receiving the requests, freight units are created to become the basic element for
planning the movement through the network. The freight unit is a logical transport unit used
302
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders
in planning. This transportation unit can be a pallet or container, but it can also be two pallets
that need to be transported together, for example, for customs reasons.
Freight orders record the manual or system-generated transportation planning (intermodal)
activities. These freight orders are the result of planning and the consolidation of freight units
on a vehicle-booked capacity or scheduled means of transport. Once freight orders are
created, the carrier's short-term tendering works with additional business documents,
Requests for Quotation (RFQs). Once this has been completed, transport order execution can
be triggered and follow-on settlement processing can begin.
FO
RC
US
TO
Freight Orders and Freight Bookings
ME
R
Freight Orders and Freight Bookings are both the result of transportation planning and the
freight document for execution. Different follow-up processes can be triggered based on
Freight Orders, including subcontracting (carrier selection, tendering), charge calculation,
ERP delivery and shipment creation, and tracking and tracing.
LY
Figure 81: Freight Orders / Freight Bookings
Freight orders/bookings contain the following:
ON
●
Planning information, for example, planned means of transport and stages, routing,
planned pickup and delivery dates, durations and distances
●
Document dependencies, as well as predecessor and successor documents
●
Transportation charges and cost distribution
●
●
Cargo information: quantities and weights, goods information; corresponding freight
orders; pick-up and delivery freight orders
Execution information
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
303
Unit 7: Freight Orders in Transportation Management
●
Business partner information
●
Output management
●
Customs-relevant information
●
Status information and blocking information
●
Subcontracting
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Integration of Freight Orders / Booking to other Applications or Components
Figure 82: Integration of Freight Orders / Booking to other Applications or Components
In a freight order, execution is planned by a carrier or the shipper.
The freight order contains the following:
The plan for the logistical processing, for example, when and onto which vehicle freight
units are to be loaded
LY
●
●
Planned departure times for the vehicles
●
Execution data, and so on
ON
Above all, freight orders are used for land transportation.
You can perform carrier selection for freight orders. You can then either subcontract freight
orders directly to a carrier, or you can first perform tendering. Change controllers can be used
to define how the system reacts to changes.
On the other hand, in freight booking the execution is planned by a carrier, such as a ship
owner. The freight booking contains the plan for the logistical processing, such as the fixed
departure times of the ship. A freight booking is used to reserve freight space on a ship or in
an airplane or can be created during transportation planning. The freight booking is also the
document for the actual execution.
304
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Freight Order Creation Methods
Figure 83: Creating Freight Orders
You have the following four options of creating freight orders (FOs):
1. Manual Creation
FO
2. Creation from Transportation Planning
3. Direct Creation from a Business Document in Forwarding Order Management (FWM)
4. Creation by Copying
LY
Manual Creation
Manual creation is generally used when you already know the most important transportation
data, such as source location, destination location, and business partner, because you
regularly transport goods for a certain customer using a certain carrier.
ON
To manually create a freight order, you require the following information: general data for the
freight order (shipper, consignee, carrier, resource, locations, dates and times, schedules,
and terms of payment), information about any additional intermediate stops, the items
involved (add freight units to the freight order or enter the items directly on the freight order),
and information about the charges involved (as calculated, or configure the system to
calculate charges).
Once the required information has been entered, you can check the consistency and save the
freight order. The freight order can then be sent over to the carrier and confirmed or rejected
on behalf of the carrier. Necessary documents can be printed, and a freight settlement
document created after the execution.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
305
Unit 7: Freight Orders in Transportation Management
A possible variant of this process is that you simply enter the general data. You then call the
transportation cockpit and assign freight units to your freight order. You then perform all
additional planning steps in the transportation cockpit: for example, you can have the system
calculate the transportation charges and you perform carrier selection or tendering.
Creation from Transportation Planning
Many companies responsible for shipping large volumes of products can use the optimizer
planning in SAP TM. This gives planners a high-level perspective of their transportation
demands.
You can perform planning either manually or automatically.
ME
R
In planning, freight orders are created based on business documents, such as forwarding
orders. To do this, freight units are first created from the inbound business documents.
Capacities are then assigned to these freight units. Various constraints are taken into
account, such as requested delivery dates. Freight orders are the result of the planning.
US
TO
Vehicle Scheduling and Routing (VSR) optimization is used to generate optimized freight
orders. This generation is based, on the one hand, on minimization of the defined costs (for
example, vehicle costs and distance-dependent vehicle costs). It also considers the selected
constraints (for example, windows for delivery and incompatibilities). VSR optimization can
be scheduled in the background.
The optimizer evaluates all options for consolidation and all possible ways through the
transportation network to obtain an optimal plan based on the cost settings made in the
Planning Cost Settings area of the planning profile.
Direct Creation from a Business Document in Forwarding Order Management (FWM)
FO
RC
Freight orders can also be created directly from a business document in forwarding order
management (FWM business documents).
It is possible to create a freight order directly for a forwarding order stage from within the
forwarding order screen.
The system creates a freight order directly when you save an FWM business document
(forwarding order, order-based or delivery-based transportation requirement) if the following
requirements have been met:
●
The FWM business document can be delivered in one freight order, meaning there is no
pre-carriage or on-carriage.
LY
●
The FWM business document is subcontracted and not consolidated with other FWM
business documents.
●
The FWM business document only has one source location and one destination location.
The various options by which freight orders can be created directly are the following:
FWM business document type determines the freight order creation.
●
FWM business document stage type determines the freight order creation.
●
FWM business document attributes determine the freight order creation.
ON
●
Creation by Copying
You can create a freight order by copying an existing one (a reference document). The system
copies the header data and the logistical data. However, it does not copy references to freight
units and execution information.
306
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders
Other Creation Methods
There are also other methods for freight order creation, such as creation via Web Service,
creation from ERP shipment, bill of lading creation, creation of pick-up and delivery freight
order from booking, and creation from a customer pick-up or self-delivery stage.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
List the methods of creating freight orders in SAP TM
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
307
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 7: Freight Orders in Transportation Management
308
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 7
Learning Assessment
ME
Choose the correct answer.
R
1. Which method of freight order creation is best suited for companies who are shipping
large volumes of products?
A Manual Creation
X
B Creation from Transportation Planning
X
C Direct Creation from a Business Document in Forwarding Order Management
(FWM)
X
D Creation by Copying
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
X
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
309
Unit 7
Learning Assessment - Answers
Choose the correct answer.
ME
R
1. Which method of freight order creation is best suited for companies who are shipping
large volumes of products?
A Manual Creation
X
B Creation from Transportation Planning
X
C Direct Creation from a Business Document in Forwarding Order Management
(FWM)
X
D Creation by Copying
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
X
310
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
UNIT 8
Freight Order Setup
Lesson 2
Lesson 3
334
RC
Determining Business Partners
324
327
US
TO
Configuring Freight Order Type Determination
Exercise 26: Determine Freight Order Types
312
319
ME
Configuring Freight Order Types
Exercise 25: Create Freight Order Types
R
Lesson 1
UNIT OBJECTIVES
Use freight order types
●
Determine organizational units in freight orders automatically
●
Create freight order types
FO
●
Set up freight order type determination based on the appropriate usage
●
Identify the business partner roles assigned to freight orders
●
Determine business partners in freight orders
ON
LY
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
311
Unit 8
Lesson 1
Configuring Freight Order Types
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how create, configure and use freight order types. You also learn how
to determine organizational units in freight orders automatically.
Use freight order types
●
Determine organizational units in freight orders automatically
●
Create freight order types
ON
LY
FO
RC
Freight Order Types
US
TO
●
Figure 84: Freight Order Types
A freight order type defines parameters that influence how the system processes the freight
order. When manually creating a freight order, the user has to select a freight order type.
Freight Order Type Settings
Here are some of the settings that can be configured in the freight order type:
312
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Types
Basic Settings
Enabling charges and settlement
●
Determining shipper and consignee
●
Specifying if a freight order can be subcontracted
●
Defining whether a freight order is to be deleted or only canceled
●
Specifying if the freight order is to be used for customer self-delivery or pickup
R
●
Execution Settings
●
ME
●
Define whether the system is to perform the execution steps within SAP
Transportation Management.
Specify additional conditions that need to be fulfilled so that the status Ready for
Execution can be set.
Define the settings for integration with SAP Event Management.
Tendering Settings
●
US
TO
●
You can define process and communication settings or define a condition to
determine these settings.
Organizational Unit Determination
●
You can define how the system determines the purchasing organization and the
execution organization.
●
RC
Change Controller Settings
You can define settings for the change controller, for example, a default change
strategy and a condition for change strategy determination.
Service Level Determination
If you have not defined a condition or you have defined one and the system cannot
determine a result, the system uses the default service level.
FO
●
Default Means of Transport Determination
If you have not defined a condition or you have defined one and the system cannot
determine a result, the system uses the default means of transport.
LY
●
Output Settings
●
You can define an output profile and a text schema, for example.
ON
Additional Settings
●
Dangerous goods profile
●
Default FSD Type, internal settlement document type
●
Carrier selection settings
●
Enable compliance checks
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
313
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
●
Partner determination profile
●
Number range for house bill of ladings
In the freight order type, you can specify if a freight order is to be used for customer selfdelivery or pick-up.
Freight Order Type Customizing
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
The freight order type determines how a freight order is processed in SAP TM. There are
some basic settings allowing for flexible customization options.
Figure 85: Freight Order Type Customizing
ON
LY
Freight Order Type
Figure 86: Freight Order Type
314
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Types
The figure, Freight Order Type, shows a system view of some of the options related to
customizing freight order types.
US
TO
ME
R
Usage of Different Types of Freight Orders and Freight Bookings
RC
Figure 87: Freight Order/Booking Types in the Document Flow
The figure gives an overview of how different types of freight orders and freight bookings can
be used in a transportation scenario and the document flow.
FO
The freight orders for pick-up and delivery represent the freight documents for the initial or
final phase of the main carriage respectively. Such transfer orders can be created out of the
freight booking document.
To Use Freight Order Types
1. In SAP TM, In the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Freight Order Management.
LY
2. Choose Road → Overview Freight Orders.
3. In the Active Queries area, choose the All query.
4. In the Document Type column, note the freight order type.
ON
5. In the Document column, click the hyperlink to open a freight order.
6. Open the General Data tab.
7. In the Document Type field, note the freight order type.
8. Close the freight order document.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
315
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
US
TO
ME
R
Freight Order Organizational Unit Determination
Figure 88: Determination of Organizations in Freight Documents
It is possible to configure the automatic determination of the purchasing/execution
organizations in the freight documents.
FO
RC
Automatic determination can be customized in the freight order or freight booking document
types in the following ways: with a default organization assignment, based on the user
assignment, and by specifying an organization determination condition of type /SCMTMS/
TOR_ORGUNIT.
Organizational Unit Conditions for Freight Orders
The system first checks the Condition field. If you have not entered a condition, or if the
condition does not return a result, the system checks whether the Consider Organization Unit
of User checkbox is selected, and whether the user is assigned to a purchasing organization
and an execution organization. If the checkbox is not selected or the user is not assigned to a
purchasing organization and an execution organization, the system uses the data maintained
in the Default Org Unit area.
To View Organizational Units in the Freight Order
LY
1. In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Freight Order Management.
2. Choose Road → Edit Road Freight Order.
3. In the Freight Order field, enter the freight order number and choose Continue.
ON
4. Open the General Data tab.
5. Scroll to the Organizational Data section.
6. In the Purchasing Organization field, the purchasing organization is specified.
7. In the Purchasing Group field, the purchasing group is specified.
8. In the Planning and Execution Organization field, the planning and execution organization
is specified.
9. In the Planning and Execution Group field, the planning and execution group is specified.
316
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Types
10. Close the freight order document.
Freight Order Type Creation
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
The freight order type, freight booking type, freight unit type, transportation unit type, and
service order type need to be unique across these five business document categories. For
example, you cannot create a freight unit type 0003 and a freight order type 0003.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
317
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
318
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 8
Exercise 25
Create Freight Order Types
R
Business Example
ME
The freight order type defines the most important settings for the freight order. In this
exercise, you can practice creating freight order types.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
US
TO
1. In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, open the screen where you define
freight order types.
2. Create a freight order type using the following data and configure the settings based on
the business requirements:
Field
Freight Order Type
Value
TO##
TM310 Group ## Freight Order
Sequence Type of Stops
Defined and Linear
FO
RC
Freight Order Description
Default Change Strategy
DEF_CHACO
Output Profile
/SCMTMS/TOR
Add. Output Profile
/SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD
Purchasing Org.
50000808
Business requirements:
External carriers could be assigned to the freight order.
●
The shipper and consignee are based on predecessor documents.
●
The user can delete the freight order if necessary.
●
The user can calculate the transportation charges in the freight orders.
●
The freight orders are to be settled.
ON
LY
●
●
The freight order numbers should be numbers between 6100000000 and
6199999999.
●
The freight order number should be determined when saving.
●
The units of measure in the freight order should default to US Pound and Cubic Foot.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
319
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
●
The Default FSD Type should be set to Default Freight Settlement Document
(0001).
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
The transportation mode for the freight orders should default to road.
320
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 8
Solution 25
Create Freight Order Types
R
Business Example
ME
The freight order type defines the most important settings for the freight order. In this
exercise, you can practice creating freight order types.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
US
TO
1. In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, open the screen where you define
freight order types.
a) In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation
Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order Management
→ Freight Order → Define Freight Order Types.
2. Create a freight order type using the following data and configure the settings based on
the business requirements:
Field
Value
TO##
RC
Freight Order Type
TM310 Group ## Freight Order
Sequence Type of Stops
Defined and Linear
Default Change Strategy
DEF_CHACO
Output Profile
/SCMTMS/TOR
Add. Output Profile
/SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD
Purchasing Org.
50000808
FO
Freight Order Description
ON
LY
Business requirements:
●
External carriers could be assigned to the freight order.
●
The shipper and consignee are based on predecessor documents.
●
The user can delete the freight order if necessary.
●
The user can calculate the transportation charges in the freight orders.
●
The freight orders are to be settled.
●
The freight order numbers should be numbers between 6100000000 and
6199999999.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
321
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
●
The freight order number should be determined when saving.
●
The units of measure in the freight order should default to US Pound and Cubic Foot.
●
The transportation mode for the freight orders should default to road.
●
The Default FSD Type should be set to Default Freight Settlement Document
(0001).
a) Choose New Entries.
R
b) Enter the data provided in the table.
Value
Freight Order Type
TO##
Freight Order Description
TM310 Group ## Freight Order
Enable Settlement
Selected
Default FSD Type
Default Freight Settlement
Document (0001)
US
TO
ME
Field
Relevant for Subcontracting
Shipper/Consignee Determination
Determination based on Predecessor Documents
Freight Order Can be Deleted
Selected
Sequence Type of Stops
Defined and Linear
FO
RC
Freight Order Can be Subcontracted
Draw number when saving document
Number Range Interval
FO
Default Unit of Measure for Weigh
US pound (LB)
Default Unit of Measure for Volume
Cubic foot (FT3)
Enable Charge Calculation
Selected
Default Change Strategy
DEF_CHACO
Transportation Mode
01(Road)
LY
Time for Drawing
/SCMTMS/TOR
Add. Output Profile
/SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD
Purchasing Org.
50000808
ON
Output Profile
c) Save and exit the function.
322
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Types
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Use freight order types
●
Determine organizational units in freight orders automatically
●
Create freight order types
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
323
Unit 8
Lesson 2
Configuring Freight Order Type Determination
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Set up freight order type determination based on the appropriate usage
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to set up and configure freight order type determination based
on the appropriate usage.
FO
RC
Freight Order Type Determination
Figure 89: Freight Order Type Determination
It is possible to assign a freight order type to the following:
Forwarding order stage types
●
Freight unit types (direct shipment options)
●
Freight unit building rules (short-cut planning)
●
Freight booking types (to create pickup and delivery transfer orders)
●
Planning profiles
LY
●
ON
Freight Order Determination
The system determines freight order types in one of the following ways:
●
●
324
If freight orders are created during planning and the freight order type is configured in the
Business Document Type area of the planning profile, then the system determines the
freight order type according to your settings.
If freight orders are created from forwarding order stages, the system determines the
freight order type based on the Customizing activity Define Default Freight Document
Types for Stages.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Type Determination
●
●
If freight units are converted into freight orders when direct shipment options (DSO) are
determined, the system uses the freight order type that you specified for DSO in the
freight unit type.
If the system cannot identify the freight order type, then it uses the default freight order
type that is defined in the Customizing activity.
US
TO
ME
R
Business Rule Framework (BRF) and Conditions
Figure 90: FO Type Determination Based on BRF and Conditions
The business rule framework (BRF) and conditions can be used for determining freight order
types, based on various business rules or needs.
For determining freight order types based on BRF and conditions, set up the freight order
type Determination Condition /SCMTMS/TOR_TYPE. This condition can be assigned to the
freight unit type (for direct shipment options) or the planning profile.
ON
LY
FO
RC
During the creation of the freight order, the system evaluates the BRF and condition, and then
identifies the freight order type based on the available data.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
325
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
326
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 8
Exercise 26
Determine Freight Order Types
R
Business Example
ME
There are a number of ways to determine freight order types automatically. In this exercise,
you will practice the various methods.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
US
TO
1. Determine if there is a freight order type (for direct shipment) associated with the freight
unit type EPFU.
2. When is a freight order type directly specified in a freight unit building rule?
FO
RC
3. Determine how the freight order type is determined when planning with the GRP##-NAFU-PLAN-PROF planning profile.
4. Identify the freight order type that is determined when planning road freight orders using
the GRP##-NA-FU-PLAN-PROF planning profile.
5. Navigate to where you can assign the freight order type for delivery or pickup to the freight
booking type FB##.
6. In SAP ERP, create a new sales order using the data provided in the following table:
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Org.
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
TM310-GRP##-2.2
Material
PRODTM-00
Quantity
20
Unit of Measurement
Box
ON
LY
Field
7. Navigate to Overview Transportation Requirements.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
327
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
8. In the worklist, select the OTR for your sales order and start the Transportation Cockpit.
9. In the Transportation Cockpit: Profile and Layout sets screen, create an entry using the
data provided in the following table:
R
Note:
If the screen is not displayed, choose Change Profile Selection → Profile
Selection Screen.
Value
Planning Profile
GRP##-NA-FU-PLAN-PROF
Transportation Cockpit Layout
Standard
Layout for Planning Result Screen
Standard
Description
TM310 Group ## Profile and Layout
Set
US
TO
ME
Field
10. In SAP TM, plan the newly created sales order with vehicle resource US-FTL-01.
11. What is the freight order type of the freight order what was just created?
ON
LY
FO
RC
12. In this scenario, how was the freight order type determined?
328
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 8
Solution 26
Determine Freight Order Types
R
Business Example
ME
There are a number of ways to determine freight order types automatically. In this exercise,
you will practice the various methods.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
US
TO
1. Determine if there is a freight order type (for direct shipment) associated with the freight
unit type EPFU.
a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP
Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Planning → Freight
Unit → Define Freight Unit Types.
b) In the list, select the freight unit type.
c) Choose
(Details).
RC
d) In the Direct Shipment Options section, in the Freight Order Type field, note any freight
order type specified.
Yes. Freight order type EPFO has been specified.
FO
2. When is a freight order type directly specified in a freight unit building rule?
A A freight order type is directly specified in the freight unit building rule to configure a
shortcut planning scenario.
LY
3. Determine how the freight order type is determined when planning with the GRP##-NAFU-PLAN-PROF planning profile.
ON
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Application Administration
→ Planning → Planning Profiles → Display Planning Profile.
b) Enter the profile and choose Continue.
c) In the Planning Profile , select the Planning Profile tab.
d) In the Business Document Type section, look in the Type Determination Rule field.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
329
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
The freight order type is determined as Defined per Category in the Planning Profile.
4. Identify the freight order type that is determined when planning road freight orders using
the GRP##-NA-FU-PLAN-PROF planning profile.
a) In the Business Document Type section, look in the Default Type for Road FO field.
R
T0##.
ME
5. Navigate to where you can assign the freight order type for delivery or pickup to the freight
booking type FB##.
a) In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation
Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order Management →
Freight Booking → Define Freight Booking Type.
US
TO
b) Select the freight booking type.
c) To view the details of the freight booking type, choose
(Details).
d) In the Additional Settings section:
●
In the Default FO Type for Delivery field, you can specify the freight order type for
delivery.
FO
RC
●
In the Default FO Type for Pick-Up field, you can specify the freight order type for
pick-up.
6. In SAP ERP, create a new sales order using the data provided in the following table:
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Org.
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
TM310-GRP##-2.2
Material
PRODTM-00
Quantity
20
Unit of Measurement
Box
ON
LY
Field
a) In SAP ERP, in the Command field, enter transaction code VA01 and press Enter.
(Alternatively, in SAP ERP, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Sales
and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create).
b) In the Order Type field, enter ZT00.
330
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Type Determination
c) In the Sales Organization field, enter 3000.
d) In the Distribution Channel field, enter 10.
e) In the Division field, enter 00.
f) Choose Enter.
g) In the Sold-to Party field, enter CUST00-25.
R
h) In the PO Number field, enter TM310-GRP##-2.2.
j) In the Quantity field, enter 20 .
k) In the Unit of Measurement field, enter BOX .
ME
i) In the Material filed, enter PRODTM-00.
l) Save and note the sales order number. You will need this number in the next step.
US
TO
7. Navigate to Overview Transportation Requirements.
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose ERP Logistics Integration
→ Worklist → Overview Transportation Requirements .
8. In the worklist, select the OTR for your sales order and start the Transportation Cockpit.
a) Based on the sales order number in the Original Order column, select the row
corresponding to your sales order number.
b) Choose Start Transportation Cockpit.
RC
9. In the Transportation Cockpit: Profile and Layout sets screen, create an entry using the
data provided in the following table:
FO
Note:
If the screen is not displayed, choose Change Profile Selection → Profile
Selection Screen.
Value
Planning Profile
GRP##-NA-FU-PLAN-PROF
Transportation Cockpit Layout
Standard
ON
LY
Field
Layout for Planning Result Screen
Standard
Description
TM310 Group ## Profile and Layout
Set
a) In the SAP Transportation Cockpit: Profile and layout set screen, enter the data
provided in the table.
b) Choose Save.
c) Select the entry, and choose Continue.
You will now see the Transportation Cockpit: Standard Layout. There are 4 quadrants
on this screen:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
331
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
Top Left = Freight Units
Bottom Left = Vehicle tab /Trailers tab /Schedule tab
Top Right = Freight Order/Freight Booking
Bottom Right = Overview/Stages/Carrier Ranking/Allocation/Charge
10. In SAP TM, plan the newly created sales order with vehicle resource US-FTL-01.
a) Choose the freight unit.
b) On the Vehicle tab, select the vehicle resource US-FTL-01.
R
c) Choose Optimizer Planning → Selected Entries Only.
e) Note the freight order number.
ME
d) Accept the proposal and choose Save.
11. What is the freight order type of the freight order what was just created?
US
TO
a) In the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings area, click the link in the Document column to
open your newly created freight order.
b) Open the General Data tab, and look in the Document Type field.
T0##.
FO
RC
12. In this scenario, how was the freight order type determined?
ON
LY
The freight order type was determined by the planning profile settings.
332
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Type Determination
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Set up freight order type determination based on the appropriate usage
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
333
Unit 8
Lesson 3
Determining Business Partners
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to identify the business partner roles assigned to freight orders.
You will also learn how to determine business partners in freight orders.
Identify the business partner roles assigned to freight orders
●
Determine business partners in freight orders
US
TO
●
FO
RC
Freight Order Business Partners
LY
Figure 91: Freight Orders Default Business Partners
By default, there are a number of party roles specified in a freight order, such as a carrier,
executing carrier, shipper, consignee, and communication party.
ON
In addition, other party roles can be either manually added or automatically determined by
the system.
334
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Determining Business Partners
US
TO
ME
R
Business Partner Roles Assignment
Figure 92: Business Partners In Freight Orders
It is possible to maintain different party roles within the freight order business document.
From a business perspective, there are a number of relevant and required party roles, such as
a carrier, shipper, or consignee.
RC
Carrier Information Maintenance
Carrier information can be maintained in the following ways:
Entered manually
●
Determined based on the carrier selection process
FO
●
●
Determined based on the tendering process
●
Copied over into the freight document when selecting a schedule
●
Determined from Partner Determination functionality
LY
The shipper and consignee information is primarily required when a house bill of lading is
generated for the business document. A house bill of lading serves as a receipt to the shipper
for the goods that are being shipped.
Shipper and Consignee Maintenance
ON
Shipper and consignee information can be maintained in the following ways:
●
●
●
Entered manually
Determined from the predecessor business document (related forwarding order, OTR or
DTR)
Determined using the Partner Determination functionality
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
335
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
US
TO
ME
R
Business Partner Determination
Figure 93: Business Partner Determination
FO
RC
Based on various factors, the business partners relevant for a business process can vary.
Factors affecting the business partners and the partner roles can be, for example, shipment
type, traffic direction, mode of transportation, and so on. In addition, sometimes certain
control mechanisms need to be in place, which influence how and when it is possible to
modify business partners.
For this purpose, partner determination procedures can be used. Partner determination
procedures are sets of rules for how the system works with business partners during a
business process. It brings together partner functions, and also includes additional
information on the behavior of the business partners.
Automatic determination of the relevant business partners results in a more efficient system
and also reduces the chance of manual errors.
Configuring a Partner Determination Procedure
ON
LY
It is possible to define a partner determination procedure and assign it to different document
categories at a document-type level. Then, when you create documents of that type, the
system works with the partners involved according to the rules specified in the procedure.
Therefore, the system can automatically handle partners for an internet sales transaction
differently than it handles a business activity, for example, without end users concerning
themselves with these differences. The settings in the procedure apply both to partners
determined automatically and those entered manually.
The steps involved in configuring a partner determination procedure are the following:
1. Set up the relevant and required party roles in the system.
2. Define partner determination profiles and assign required settings to the party role (for
example mandatory, or optional) and specify the logic for determining the party role value
(for example, reference another party role, determined from BAdI).
3. Assign the partner determination profile in the freight order/freight booking document
type in Customizing.
336
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Determining Business Partners
The partner determination profile influences the following:
●
The party roles available in a business document.
●
The level of control the user has in entering the party role.
●
Depending on the settings you define in Customizing, whether you change or delete a
party role, or add one from a list of available party roles. You can also specify settings that
prevent specific party roles from being changed or deleted.
How the system determines business partners for the party roles.
Business Partner Determination: Relationships
R
●
Party role and source party role
ME
The system uses one of the following relationships, which you specify in Customizing, to
determine a business partner:
US
TO
A party role can be specified as the source party role for a particular party role. In the
application, a business partner is entered in the field that is specified as the source party
role, and the system automatically copies the business partner to the associated party
role.
For example, in Customizing, you specify the party role as Invoicing Party, the source
type as Party Role, and the source role as Carrier. In the application when the carrier is
maintained as ABC, the system assigns ABC as the business partner for the invoicing
party.
Party role and the source party role in business partner master data (relationship)
RC
The system uses the relationship between organizations and business partners in the
Customer Partner Determination and Vendor Partner Determination tabs in the BP
(Maintain Business Partner) transaction to determine a business partner in a business
document.
FO
For example, take a logistics service provider (LSP), which has a business with a business
partner APP_1. In the BP (Maintain Business Partner) transaction of APP_1 with partner
function Sold-to Party, maintain on the Customer Partner Determination tab of the BP
transaction for APP_1, and create a relationship between sales organization 561234 and
the business partner APP_INV (APP_INV fulfills the role of invoicing party for APP_1). In
the profile Customizing, specify the party role as Invoicing Party, the source type as BP
Relationship, and the source role as Ordering Party.
LY
In a forwarding order, you specify the organization as 561234 on the General Data tab
and the ordering party as APP_1 on the Business Partner tab. The system checks the
business partner master data for APP_1. On the Customer Partner Determination tab, it
finds that APP_1 uses APP_INV as the invoicing party for organization 561234. It assigns
APP_INV as the business partner for the invoicing party.
ON
BAdI
There is also an option to determine business partners based on BAdIs. If business
partners are determined based on special business rules or conditions, then the BAdI can
be implemented and pointed to the relevant party role.
To Configure Business Partner Determination
Note that, in this procedure, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
337
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
1. To view the standard party roles available in the SAP TM.
a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP
Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Master Data
→ Business Partners → Define Party Roles.
b) Go back.
2. To configure the business partner determination profile.
R
a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP
Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Master Data
→ Business Partners → Define Partner Determination Profiles.
c) In the Part. Det. Prof. column, enter PP##.
ME
b) On the Change View "Define Partner Determination Profile": Overview screen, choose
New Entries.
d) In the Description column, enter GRP## - Partner Determination Profile.
US
TO
e) Press Enter.
f) Select the new entry.
g) In the Dialog Structure, double-click Assign Party Roles.
h) Choose New Entries.
i) Enter the following data:
Edit Level
1
Ordering 1
Party
6
Shipper
Srce Type
Srce Role
Not Mod.
Mandato- Party
ry
Role
--
Selected
2
Mandato- Party
ry
Role
--
Selected
5
Consign- 3
ee
Optional Party
Role
--
Selected
12
Carrier
4
Mandato- Party
ry
Role
--
Selected
10
Bill-to
Party
5
Choose
from
List
6
--
203
Notify
Party
6
Optional Party
Role
12
--
TM001
Additional
Notify
Party
7
Optional Party
Role
5
–
ON
LY
FO
RC
Party Role Party Role Sequence
Desc.
Party
Role
j) Save and exit the function.
3. To assign the business partner profile to a freight order type.
338
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Determining Business Partners
a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP
Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order
Management → Define Freight Order Types.
b) Select and open freight order type T0##.
c) In the Additional Settings section, in the Partner Determination Profile field select
GRP## - Partner Determination Profile.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
ME
R
d) Save and exit the function.
Identify the business partner roles assigned to freight orders
●
Determine business partners in freight orders
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
339
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 8: Freight Order Setup
340
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 8
Learning Assessment
True
X
False
US
TO
X
ME
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
R
1. A freight order type defines the parameters that influence how the system processes a
freight order.
2. When automatically determining organizational units in freight orders, which of the
following does the system check first?
Choose the correct answer.
A Whether the user is assigned to a purchasing organization
X
B Whether the Consider Organization Unit of User checkbox is selected
X
C Whether there is a condition in the Condition field
X
D Whether the user is assigned to an execution organization
RC
X
3. Which of the following statements about organizational units are correct?
FO
Choose the correct answers.
A Organizational units are used to represent the organizational structure of a
company.
X
B Organizational units are used to allocate revenue and costs to different groups
within a company.
ON
LY
X
X
C Organizational units in SAP TM are determined by organizational units in SAP ERP.
X
D Organizational units can be determined automatically based on predefined
conditions.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
341
Unit 8: Learning Assessment
4. If the system is unable to determine a freight order type, the default freight order type
specified in the customizing activity is chosen.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
X
True
X
False
R
5. Which of the following party roles are specified by default in a freight order?
ME
Choose the correct answers.
A Carrier
X
B Shipper
X
C Consignee
X
D Communication party
X
E Purchasing organization
US
TO
X
6. The partner determination profile influences how the system determines business
partners for party roles.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
X
False
ON
LY
FO
RC
X
342
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 8
Learning Assessment - Answers
X
True
X
False
ME
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
R
1. A freight order type defines the parameters that influence how the system processes a
freight order.
US
TO
That is correct. A freight order type defines the parameters that influence how the system
processes a freight order.
2. When automatically determining organizational units in freight orders, which of the
following does the system check first?
Choose the correct answer.
A Whether the user is assigned to a purchasing organization
X
B Whether the Consider Organization Unit of User checkbox is selected
X
C Whether there is a condition in the Condition field
X
D Whether the user is assigned to an execution organization
FO
RC
X
3. Which of the following statements about organizational units are correct?
Choose the correct answers.
A Organizational units are used to represent the organizational structure of a
company.
ON
LY
X
X
B Organizational units are used to allocate revenue and costs to different groups
within a company.
X
C Organizational units in SAP TM are determined by organizational units in SAP ERP.
X
D Organizational units can be determined automatically based on predefined
conditions.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
343
Unit 8: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. If the system is unable to determine a freight order type, the default freight order type
specified in the customizing activity is chosen.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
X
True
X
False
R
5. Which of the following party roles are specified by default in a freight order?
ME
Choose the correct answers.
A Carrier
X
B Shipper
X
C Consignee
X
D Communication party
X
E Purchasing organization
US
TO
X
6. The partner determination profile influences how the system determines business
partners for party roles.
FO
RC
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
X
False
ON
LY
X
344
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
UNIT 9
Freight Order Integration
R
Lesson 1
Lesson 2
350
355
US
TO
Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
Exercise 27: Create Freight Order-Based Shipments
346
ME
Integrating Freight Orders with Shipments
Lesson 3
Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
Lesson 4
367
380
RC
Communicating Freight Orders to Other Companies
UNIT OBJECTIVES
Describe the integration scenarios between freight orders and shipments
FO
●
Explain the business scenarios for freight order-based shipments
●
Configure the settings to enable freight order-based shipments
●
Create shipment-based freight orders
●
Configure settings to enable shipment-based freight orders
●
Explain the business scenarios for business-to-business communication
ON
LY
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
345
Unit 9
Lesson 1
Integrating Freight Orders with Shipments
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Describe the integration scenarios between freight orders and shipments
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn about the integration scenarios between freight orders and
shipments.
LY
FO
RC
Shipment Integration Scenarios
ON
Figure 94: Freight Order - Shipments Integration
Note:
The terms inbound and outbound , in the context of SAP ERP shipment
integration, are from the perspective of SAP TM.
The shipment integration process is typically used when customers have multiple systems.
SAP Enterprise Resource Planning (SAP ERP) performs tasks such as the purchasing of
material from external and internal suppliers, the storage of material in plant warehouses, and
the shipping of these materials to customers. Transport to and from the warehouse can be
managed by a transport module or transport system.
346
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating Freight Orders with Shipments
Transport planning is performed in an external system - SAP Transportation Management
(SAP TM). SAP TM can be used to perform certain functions of the transportation process
(such as planning, tendering, and charge calculation). However, transportation management
as a whole is performed in SAP ERP.
Shipment Scenarios
There are two possible variations of this business scenario:
●
Shipment integration outbound
Shipment integration inbound
US
TO
●
ME
R
In this scenario, SAP ERP has deliveries (inbound or outbound), which contain the
necessary information for the fulfillment of the orders. The deliveries are transmitted to
SAP TM, where they become delivery based transport requests (DTR). Planning is
performed in SAP TM resulting in freight orders. These freight orders are then sent back to
SAP ERP, where they become SAP ERP shipments so the execution can proceed. In this
scenario, the transportation planning is performed in SAP TM and the SAP ERP shipment
is used only for execution.
In this scenario, sales orders created in SAP ERP result in deliveries that are relevant for
transportation. A shipment is created for the deliveries. When the shipment is ready for
tendering, indicated by its status, and saved, the shipment is sent to SAP TM and a freight
order is created. Tendering is then carried out in SAP TM. The tendering result is sent
back to SAP ERP and the shipment is updated with the proper forwarding agent.
RC
Both of these scenarios are used by customers who have already implemented and are using
SAP LE-TRA, the transportation component of SAP ERP, and have invested in enhancements
development and want to protect these investments. In such cases, they use SAP TM only for
specific purposes. The terms inbound and outbound, in the context of SAP ERP shipment
integration, are from the perspective of SAP TM.
FO
There is a 1:1 relation between the SAP ERP shipment document and the SAP TM freight
order.
LY
Hint:
It is also possible to use SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) for
the purpose of execution. SAP EWM integration is covered in a different
enablement.
ON
Enhancements for Shipment Integration
Figure 95: Enhancements for Shipment Integration
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
347
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
There are many Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) available, which customers can use to the extend
the standard functionality of SAP TM to match their business processes.
BAdIs for Outbound Integration
●
BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMExecutionRequest_Out
You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service
interface TransportationOrderSCMExecutionRequest_Out.
●
BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMExecutionCancellationReq_Out
BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMExecutionConfirmation_In
ME
●
R
You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service
interface TransportationOrderSCMExecutionCancellationRequest_Out.
You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service
interface TransportationOrderSCMExecutionConfirmation_In.
●
BAdI for TranspOrderSCMExecutionStatusNotification_In
●
US
TO
You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service
interface TransportationOrderSCMExecutionStatusNotification_In.
BAdI for TranspOrderSCMExecDeliveryAssignmentChngdNotif_In
You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service
interface TransportationOrderSCMExecutionDeliveryAssignmentChangedNotification_In.
●
BAdI for TranspOrderSCMExecutionItmPckgAssgnmtChngdNotif_In
FO
RC
You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service
interface TransportationOrderSCMExecutionItmPckgAssgnmtChangedNotification_In.
BAdIs for Inbound Integration
●
BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMRequest_In
You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service
interface TransportationOrderSCMRequest_In. This BAdI contains the method
CHANGE_MODIFICATION. You can use this method to handle new fields within the
inbound service interface TransportationOrderSCMRequest_In. For example, if you extend
a business object in the sending system, you can use this method to extend the inbound
service interface. You can then map the new fields to existing or new fields in the
transportation order business object.
BAdI for TransportationOrderSCMCancellationRequest_In
LY
●
You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service
interface TransportationOrderSCMCancellationRequest_In.
BAdI for TranspOrderSCMTenderingResultNotification_Out
ON
●
You can use this BAdI to change or extend the data transferred through the service
interface TransportationOrderSCMTenderingResultNotification_Out.
In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, you can access the BAdIs by choosing
SAP Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Business Add-Ins
(BAdIs) for Transportation Management → Integration → Enterprise Services → ERP
Logistics Integration → ERP Shipment Integration .
Facilitated Discussion: Integration Scenarios
348
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating Freight Orders with Shipments
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Describe the integration scenarios between freight orders and shipments
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
349
Unit 9
Lesson 2
Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn about freight order-based shipment scenario and how to configure
the settings to enable freight order-based shipments.
Explain the business scenarios for freight order-based shipments
●
Configure the settings to enable freight order-based shipments
US
TO
●
ON
LY
FO
RC
Freight Order-based Shipments Scenarios
Figure 96: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
In this scenario, you carry out transportation planning in SAP Transportation Management
(SAP TM) for transportation activities that are based on deliveries received from SAP ERP.
You can then carry out transportation execution in SAP ERP for the freight orders that were
created during transportation planning.
350
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
Note the following:
SAP TM creates a delivery-based transportation requirement (DTR) for each delivery
received from SAP ERP. There is always a one-to-one relationship between an ERP delivery
and a DTR.
●
SAP ERP creates an ERP shipment for each freight order received from SAP TM. There is
an n-to-one relationship between DTRs and a freight order; and, therefore, between the
ERP deliveries that were originally sent to SAP TM and the ERP shipment that SAP ERP
creates based on a freight order.
R
●
Outbound integration of shipment processing enables you to do the following:
Transfer freight orders from SAP TM to SAP ERP and create shipments in SAP ERP based
on the freight orders.
ME
●
Update a freight-order-based shipment in SAP ERP if the relevant freight order is changed
in SAP TM and the changes are transferred to SAP ERP.
●
Delete a freight-order-based shipment in SAP ERP if the relevant freight order is deleted in
SAP TM.
US
TO
●
Send a confirmation from SAP ERP to SAP TM when a shipment is created in SAP ERP
based on a freight order in SAP TM.
●
Update the execution status of a freight order in SAP TM based on the overall status of the
corresponding shipment in SAP ERP using a status notification.
●
Update a freight order in SAP TM based on a notification about changes to deliveries
assigned to a shipment in SAP ERP.
RC
●
Update a freight order in SAP TM based on a notification about changed item and handling
unit assignments to container handling units of a shipment in SAP ERP.
●
When the freight order is updated, the related shipment document is updated automatically.
LY
FO
Note:
The outbound integration scenario can also be used when the execution is
performed in SAP EWM (instead of SAP ERP). In this case the EWM system needs
the packaging material information for planning purposes. The necessary
information for creating handling units must be sent from SAP TM to SAP ERP and
is essential for scenarios where an EWM system is used to pick/pack/load.
Process
ON
1. You send ERP deliveries to SAP TM, and the SAP TM system creates delivery-based
transportation requirements (DTRs) for the deliveries.
2. You plan the transportation process in SAP TM based on the DTRs. During planning, you
create freight orders.
3. You carry out tendering for the freight orders in SAP TM (optional).
4. You send the freight orders to SAP ERP to carry out transportation execution.
5. SAP ERP creates a shipment for each freight order.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
351
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Figure 97: Freight Order Based Shipment Creation
In a freight order-based shipment, the freight order can be created using SAP TM. The freight
order creation can be based upon sales orders sent to SAP TM as Order Transportation
requests (OTRs).
FO
RC
The delivery may be created via the delivery proposal process in SAP TM. The delivery
proposal can be triggered using a batch job or online in the POWL of the Order Transportation
Request or in the Transportation Cockpit. When the delivery is created in SAP ERP, the
TRDO output is created. The output triggers the Delivery Transportation Request (DTR) to be
created in SAP TM.
ON
LY
Once the DTR is created in SAP TM, the freight order is automatically enabled for shipment
creation.
352
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
Figure 98: Shipment Creation
US
TO
ME
R
Shipment Creation
The shipment can be triggered from SAP TM fright order using the following processes:
●
Batch job Process Freight Orders (/SCMTMS/TOR_FO_PROC). When you use this report,
you can select freight orders using a selection profile or by specifying selection criteria
explicitly.
RC
●
In the freight order UI, you can choose to trigger the shipment directly. Note that you do
not have to be in Change mode to trigger this process.
ON
LY
FO
Freight Order Shipment Integration
Figure 99: FreightOrderShipmentIntegration_image.pptx
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
353
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
When integrating the SAP TM freight order with SAP ERP shipment, configure the following
settings:
●
In SAP ERP, determine output condition types for confirmation and status notification
●
Determine partner profile for message type SHPMNT05 with the following message codes:
-
CNF – to process confirmation message. This message updates the shipment number
reference in the TOR Root
STA – to process the status change messages from SAP ERP
-
UPD – to update the SAP ERP with the changes from SAP TM
ME
-
Generate output condition records from SAP ERP for confirmation and status changes
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
●
CRE – to create the SAP ERP shipment the first time
R
-
354
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 9
Exercise 27
Create Freight Order-Based Shipments
R
Business Example
ME
You are a logistics specialist assigned to the SAP TM implementation team. As part of your
role, you will set up the integration between SAP TM and SAP ERP so shipments are created
in SAP ERP based on the planning results in SAP TM. This exercise will help you understand
the integration process and the settings required to perform this function.
US
TO
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
Create Sales Orders in SAP ERP
1. In SAP ERP, create two sales orders with one item each using the data in the table.
Field
Value
Order type
Sales Organization
Division
Product
3000
10
RC
Distribution Channel
ZT00
00
PRODTM-00
FO
Quantity
20
Create the sales orders using the data in the table.
Sold-to Party
PO Number
Sales Order 1
CUST00-25
TM310-GRP##-3.2-25
Sales Order 2
CUST00-26
TM310-GRP##-3.2-26
LY
Sales Order
Execute Transportation Planning to Create a Freight Order
The sales orders have been transferred to SAP TM. In this task, you will plan the sales order.
ON
1. Navigate to Overview Transportation Requirements.
2. In the worklist, select your OTRs and start the Transportation Cockpit.
3. On the Transportation Cockpit: Profile and Layout sets screen, choose an entry using the
data in the table.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
355
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Note:
If the screen is not displayed, choose Change Profile Selection → Profile
Selection Screen.
Value
Planning Profile
GRP##-NA-FU-PLAN-PROF
Transportation Cockpit Layout
Standard
Layout for Planning Result Screen
Standard
Description
TM310 Group ## Profile and Layout
Set
ME
R
Field
US
TO
4. In SAP TM, use Optimizer Planning to create the freight order.
Create and Send Delivery Proposals
After having planned the sales orders in SAP TM, we will create delivery proposals in SAP TM
and send the delivery proposals to SAP ERP to create deliveries based on the results of
transportation planning.
1. Trigger delivery creation in SAP ERP from SAP TM.
RC
Create the ERP Shipment from the TM Freight Order
After creating deliveries in SAP ERP, we now create a shipment in SAP ERP from SAP TM
based on the freight order.
1. In SAP TM, trigger shipment creation from the freight order.
2. In SAP ERP, view the ERP shipment that was created in the previous step.
Assign a carrier to the Freight Order and update the Shipment
FO
1. In SAP TM, assign the carrier to the freight order and then send to SAP ERP.
ON
LY
2. In SAP ERP, view the ERP shipment again and verify that the carrier has been updated in
the shipment.
356
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 9
Solution 27
Create Freight Order-Based Shipments
R
Business Example
ME
You are a logistics specialist assigned to the SAP TM implementation team. As part of your
role, you will set up the integration between SAP TM and SAP ERP so shipments are created
in SAP ERP based on the planning results in SAP TM. This exercise will help you understand
the integration process and the settings required to perform this function.
US
TO
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
Create Sales Orders in SAP ERP
1. In SAP ERP, create two sales orders with one item each using the data in the table.
Field
Order type
Sales Organization
ZT00
3000
10
FO
RC
Distribution Channel
Value
Division
00
Product
PRODTM-00
Quantity
20
Create the sales orders using the data in the table.
Sold-to Party
PO Number
Sales Order 1
CUST00-25
TM310-GRP##-3.2-25
Sales Order 2
CUST00-26
TM310-GRP##-3.2-26
LY
Sales Order
a) In SAP ERP, in the Command field, enter transaction code VA01 and press Enter.
ON
b) Enter the data provided in the following table:
Field
Value
Order type
ZT00
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
357
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Field
Value
Division
00
c) Press Enter.
The Create TM100 Standard Order: Overview screen opens.
d) In the Create TM100 Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following data (all
other fields must be left as default):
Value
Sold-to Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
TM310-GRP##-3.2-25
Order Quantity
PRODTM-00
US
TO
Material
ME
e) In the All Items section, enter the following data:
R
Field
20
f) Save the sales order and record your sales order number.
g) Repeat steps d to f to create the second sale orders using the data in the table.
Sold-to Party
PO Number
Product
Quantity
Sales Order 2
CUST00-26
TM310PRODTM-00
GRP##-3.2-26
20
RC
Sales Order
Execute Transportation Planning to Create a Freight Order
The sales orders have been transferred to SAP TM. In this task, you will plan the sales order.
FO
1. Navigate to Overview Transportation Requirements.
a) In SAP TM, choose ERP Logistics Integration.
b) Choose Overview Transportation Requirements.
2. In the worklist, select your OTRs and start the Transportation Cockpit.
LY
a) Based on the sales order numbers in the Original Order column, select the rows
corresponding to your sales order numbers.
b) Choose Start Transportation Cockpit.
ON
3. On the Transportation Cockpit: Profile and Layout sets screen, choose an entry using the
data in the table.
358
Note:
If the screen is not displayed, choose Change Profile Selection → Profile
Selection Screen.
Field
Value
Planning Profile
GRP##-NA-FU-PLAN-PROF
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
Field
Value
Transportation Cockpit Layout
Standard
Layout for Planning Result Screen
Standard
Description
TM310 Group ## Profile and Layout
Set
R
a) On the SAP Transportation Cockpit: Profile and layout sets screen, enter the data
provided in the table.
ME
b) Choose Save.
c) Select the entry, and choose Continue.
You will now see the Transportation Cockpit: Standard Layout. There are 4 quadrants
on this screen, as follows:
US
TO
Top Left = Freight Units
Bottom Left = Vehicle tab /Trailers tab /Schedule tab
Top Right = Freight Order/Freight Booking
Bottom Right = Overview/Stages/Carrier Ranking/Allocation/Charge
4. In SAP TM, use Optimizer Planning to create the freight order.
a) In the Transportation Cockpit, in the Freight Unit quadrant, select the two freight units.
b) In the Vehicles quadrant, select Resource US-FTL-01.
RC
c) Choose Optimizer Planning → Selected Entries Only.
d) Choose Accept.
e) Choose Save.
FO
f) Note the freight order created.
Create and Send Delivery Proposals
After having planned the sales orders in SAP TM, we will create delivery proposals in SAP TM
and send the delivery proposals to SAP ERP to create deliveries based on the results of
transportation planning.
LY
1. Trigger delivery creation in SAP ERP from SAP TM.
ON
a) On the Transportation Cockpit main screen, select the newly created freight order and
then choose Create Delivery Proposals in the main toolbar.
b) In the Transportation Cockpit: Delivery Proposal Overview screen, review the two
delivery proposals.
Why have two proposals been created for the one freight order?
Because two different customer locations are shipped to.
c) On the Transportation Cockpit: Delivery Proposal Overview screen, click Send Delivery
Proposal to ERP.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
359
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
d) Choose Back to return to the Transportation Cockpit main screen.
e) In the Freight Unit Stages area, scroll to the right to review the numbers in the
Requirement Document column. These are the numbers of the documents, on which
the freight units are based. After choosing Refresh, the numbers should change - the
old OTR numbers (starting with 110...) are replaced by the DTR numbers (starting with
119...) after the deliveries have been created in SAP ERP and have been transferred to
SAP TM.
ME
R
Hint:
You may need to wait for a few minutes before the numbers change.
Choose Refresh a few times.
US
TO
Create the ERP Shipment from the TM Freight Order
After creating deliveries in SAP ERP, we now create a shipment in SAP ERP from SAP TM
based on the freight order.
1. In SAP TM, trigger shipment creation from the freight order.
a) Navigate to the Freight Orders / Freight Booking quadrant and select the freight order
that was created.
b) Open the freight order and choose Edit.
c) Choose Follow Up → Create/Update ERP Shipment.
d) In the Warning dialog box, choose OK.
FO
RC
e) Navigate to the Statuses tab and review the Transmission-to-ERP Status.
The transmission starts and the transmission date and time is entered.
f) Refresh the freight order until the Transmission-to-ERP Status changes to
Transmission Successful.
g) On the Document Flow tab, review that the ERP Shipment has been added as a
successor business document of the freight order. Leave the freight order screen open
(in Display mode).
2. In SAP ERP, view the ERP shipment that was created in the previous step.
a) In SAP ERP, in the Command field, enter transaction code VT03N and press Enter.
LY
b) In the Shipment Number field, enter the freight order number and press Enter.
c) Review the shipment including the overall status, the Forwarding Agent, the shipping
type, and the planning dates.
ON
d) Go to the Stages tab and review the stages.
e) Double-click the stages to review the stage details like the duration, distances, and the
deliveries in stage.
Assign a carrier to the Freight Order and update the Shipment
1. In SAP TM, assign the carrier to the freight order and then send to SAP ERP.
a) In SAP TM, go back to the freight order screen and choose Edit.
360
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
b) On the General Data tab, in the Carrier field, enter US-CAR-03.
c) Click Follow Up → Create/Update ERP Shipment.
d) In the Warning dialog box, select OK.
e) On the Statuses tab, review the new status Re-transmitted After Changes in
TM and the updated transmission date/time.
R
2. In SAP ERP, view the ERP shipment again and verify that the carrier has been updated in
the shipment.
a) In SAP ERP, in the Command field, enter transaction code VT03N and press Enter.
c) Open the Processing tab.
ME
b) In the Shipment Number field, enter the freight order number and press Enter.
d) In the FwdAgent field, the carrier should be specified. Verify that it has been updated.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
Hint:
It may take a few minutes for the carrier to appear in the shipment.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
361
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
US
TO
ME
R
Freight Order-Based Shipment Settings
FO
RC
Figure 100: Outbound Shipment Integration - Settings
Settings and Prerequisites in SAP ERP
●
●
Adopt route and determine legs -these settings prevent the system from carrying out
additional calculations related to transportation stages when it creates a shipment. Data
about stages is taken from the IDoc.
Maintain transportation planning point ‘1000’ - SAP TM does not use transportation
planning points. Transportation planning point 1000 is, therefore, transferred by default to
SAP ERP. If you require other transportation planning points that are stored with the SAP
ERP shipment, implement BAdI BADI_LE_SHIPMENT to determine and save the correct
transportation planning point for the shipment.
LY
●
Set up an external number range that matches the freight order (FO) number range.
Ensure that the delivery types are relevant for transportation planning
●
Set up shipment types
ON
●
362
Note:
If you also want to integrate SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM),
set up an external number range with the same interval for transportation units
(TUs) in SAP EWM. This ensures that, in the context of outbound shipment
integration, a freight order in SAP TM has the same number as the corresponding
shipment in SAP ERP and transportation unit in SAP EWM. For more information,
see the respective scenario configuration guides.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
●
Assign an output profile to the FO types.
●
Choose the correct Document Creation Relevance field:
-
Shipment creation in SAP ERP
-
Shipment creation with HUs for vehicles and containers
-
Shipment creation with HUs for vehicles only
-
Shipment creation with HUs for containers only
Each DTR should contain all items from the corresponding delivery.
●
The FO are based on DTRs only.
ME
●
R
Settings and Prerequisites in SAP TM
US
TO
The FO should contain all freight units (FUs) from each related DTR (no subsequent
delivery split in SAP ERP).
●
The FO must contain FUs that are derived from either exclusively inbound deliveries or
exclusively outbound deliveries.
●
The FO contains FUs that are related to deliveries from the same ERP system.
●
The FO should be In Process and not have one of the following statuses: Blocked for
execution, Blocked for planning or Marked for deletion.
●
Packaging Information
RC
If you want the shipments in SAP ERP to contain packaging information in the form of
handling units, specify that packaging information is to be sent to SAP ERP along with the
other freight order data.
Packaging information is required if you want to send the shipments from SAP ERP to SAP
EWM to carry out warehouse planning and execution.
FO
If you select shipment creation with handling units, configure the required settings for vehicle
resources or containers, as follows:
To enable SAP ERP to generate a handling unit for a vehicle resource, assign a packaging
material in the resource master data. In SAP NWBC, choose Master Data → Resources
→ Define Resource . You specify the packaging material on the Transport tab.
LY
●
To enable SAP ERP to generate a handling unit for a container, assign a packaging material
to the container's equipment type and group. This can be done in Customizing for
transportation management under Master Data → Resources → Define Equipment
Groups and Equipment Types → Equipment Type.
ON
●
To Configure Settings Freight Order-based Shipments
1. Enable Freight Order types for ERP Shipment Integration Outbound.
a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP
Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order
Management → Freight Order → Define Freight Order Types.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
363
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
b) Select the row for the freight order type and choose
(Details).
c) Check if the Number Range Interval is an internal number range. In the field, press F4
and make a note of the From number and the To number.
d) In the Additional Settings section, in the Document Creation Relevance field, enter
Shipment Creation in SAP ERP, or Shipment Creation with HUs for
Vehicles and Containers or Shipment Creation with HUs for
Containers Only or Shipment Creation with HUs for Vehicles Only.
R
e) Save and exit the function.
ME
2. Create shipment type in SAP ERP for ERP Shipment Integration Outbound.
a) In SAP ERP, in Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution
→ Transportation → Shipments → Define Number Ranges for Shipments.
b) Choose Change intervals.
US
TO
c) If required, define a new external number range for the freight order using the same
number range that was used in the ERP shipment.
d) Click Save and exit the function.
e) In Customizing, choose Define Shipment Types.
f) Choose New Entries.
g) Create a new shipment type T0##, with the following details:
Value
RC
Field
T0##
Description
GRP## Ship. Int. Outbound
NR int. assgnt
01
No. range ext.
FO
ShpmtComplType
Loaded Outbound Shipment
Shipping Type
01 (Truck)
Service Level
Load
Process Control
Individual shipment using one
mode of transport
Leg Indicator
Direct Leg
Adopt route
Do not adopt stages
Determine legs
Blank. No legs to be determined
GR-RelevanceInd
Normal
Pick check
Shipment completion only for
full picking
Weight unit
LB
ON
LY
FO
Shipment Type
364
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
Field
Value
Volume unit
CDM
h) Save and exit the function.
3. Maintaining transportation planning points.
R
a) In SAP ERP, in Customizing for Enterprise Structure, choose Definition → Logistics
Execution → Maintain Transportation Planning Point.
b) Create transportation planning point 1000 by copying the existing transportation
planning point 0001 to be used for SAP TM integration.
US
TO
ME
SAP TM does not use transportation planning points. Transportation planning point
1000 is, therefore, transferred by default to SAP ERP. If you require other
transportation planning points that are stored with the SAP ERP shipment, implement
BAdI BADI_LE_SHIPMENT to determine and save the correct transportation planning
point for the shipment.
c) In SAP ERP, in Customizing for Enterprise Structure, choose Definition → Logistics
Execution → Maintain Transportation Planning Point for External Systems.
An entry for the transportation planning point defined above should exist.
4. Maintain the output control settings.
a) Configure output control settings to send shipments from SAP ERP to SAP TM in the
context of SAP TM Outbound Shipment Integration.
RC
This involves Customizing activities for maintaining field catalogs, condition tables,
access sequences, condition types, and schemas. For detailed information, refer to the
integration guide Basic Settings and Integration for SAP ERP.
5. Configure inbound and outbound processing.
ON
LY
FO
Configure the settings for inbound communication to SAP ERP (inbound IDocs) and
outbound communication from SAP ERP (outbound IDocs). For detailed information, refer
to the integration guide Basic Settings and Integration for SAP ERP.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
365
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Explain the business scenarios for freight order-based shipments
●
Configure the settings to enable freight order-based shipments
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
366
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 9
Lesson 3
Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn about shipment-based freight order scenarios and how to configure
the settings to enable shipment-based freight orders.
Create shipment-based freight orders
●
Configure settings to enable shipment-based freight orders
US
TO
●
ON
LY
FO
RC
Shipment-Based Freight Order Scenarios
Figure 101: Inbound Shipment Integration
In the shipment-based freight order scenario, the transportation planning functions are
carried out in SAP ERP or a third party logistics system and not in SAP TM. SAP ERP
shipments are created as a result of this process.
The SAP ERP shipment is then integrated with SAP TM for one or more of the following
scenarios:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
367
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
●
To perform tendering functions
●
For freight costing and rating purposes
To carry out the inbound shipment integration, do the following:
●
ME
●
The shipment to be integrated to SAP TM must have the output created. The output
should be set up to create IDOC of type SHPMNT05.
SAP Integration system , SAP PI must be setup to process and map the SHPMNT05 to the
appropriate message for SAP TM.
Customizing must be established in both SAP ERP and SAP TM.
US
TO
●
R
Note:
There is a one-to-one relationship between an SAP ERP shipment and an SAP TM
freight order. An SAP TM freight order must be synchronized with an SAP ERP
shipment if it is used for freight costing purposes.
The interface shown in the figure, is based on services (inbound and outbound) in SAP TM
and IDocs in SAP ERP. PIs are connected to an XI system integration process. These services
and IDocs are not covered in this training.
LY
FO
RC
Inbound Shipment Integration Message Flow
ON
Figure 102: Inbound Shipment Integration Message Flow
The figure, Inbound Shipment Integration Message Flow, shows the message flow between
SAP ERP and SAP TM. When a shipment's tendering status is New Offer from the Carrier, the
process is triggered. An output generates IDoc SHMPNT05, which is mapped to an SOA
message TransportationOrderSCMRequest_In. In SAP TM, during the inbound proxy
processing, a freight order is created.
You can choose to trigger carrier selection from SAP TM. To do so, specify the means of
transport for the freight order and set up the appropriate transportation lane. Once these
settings are in place, you can trigger the tendering process if the freight order is set up as
368
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
Relevant for Subcontracting. The tendering result can be passed to an SAP ERP shipment
using the message TransportationOrderSCMTenderingResultNotification_Out, which can be
mapped to SHPMNT.SHPMNT05.
If you have found and accepted a carrier, the enterprise service sends the following data:
Carrier
●
Price
●
Confirmed dates and times
●
Tendering status
R
●
ME
If you have not found a carrier, the enterprise service sends the corresponding tendering
status.
US
TO
If the SAP ERP shipment document already contains a carrier, the carrier information is sent
to SAP TM. Ensure that the carrier partner is CIFed from SAP ERP to SAP TM. Once SAP TM
receives the shipment, a freight order is created and the tendering process can be carried out.
During tendering, the carrier can submit a quotation to SAP TM. The price in this quotation
can be passed back to SAP ERP and stored in the shipment document.
LY
FO
RC
Freight Costing and Cost Distribution
Figure 103: Freight Costing and Cost Distribution
ON
To integrate SAP ERP shipments into SAP TM for freight costing and cost distribution
purposes, create the necessary transportation charge management (TCM) master data, such
as agreements and rate tables; and configure the system for cost distribution and settlement
functions.
To Create Shipment-Based Freight Orders
1. In SAP ERP, create a sales order using the data in the table.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
369
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to-Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
TM310-GRP00-3.3
Product
PRODTM-00
Quantity
20
UoM
BOX
US
TO
ME
Field
R
Table 53: Sale Order Data
a) In SAP ERP, in the Command field, enter transaction code VA01 and press Enter.
b) Enter the data provided in the table.
Field
Order Type
Sales Organization
ZT00
3000
10
FO
RC
Distribution Channel
Value
Division
00
c) Press Enter.
d) In the Create TM100 Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following data: (All
other fields must be left with default values.)
Value
Sold-to Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
TM310-GRP00-3.3
LY
Field
ON
e) On the All Items section, enter the following data:
Product
Quantity
UoM
PRODTM-00
20
BOX
f) Take note of the delivery date.
g) Choose Save.
h) Record the sales order number.
2. Create deliveries for the sales order.
370
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
a) In SAP ERP, on the SAP Easy Access screen, in the Command field, enter transaction
code VL01N and press Enter.
b) In the Create Outbound Delivery with Order Reference screen, in the Shipping Point
field, enter 3100.
c) In the Order field, enter the sales order number.
d) In the Selection Date field, enter the delivery date of the sales order and press Enter.
f) Record the deliver number.
Value
Transport. Planning Point
3000
Shipment Type
T100
US
TO
Field
ME
3. Create a shipment for the delivery using the data in the table.
R
e) Click Save.
a) In SAP ERP, on the SAP Easy Access screen, in the Command field, enter transaction
code VT01N and press Enter.
b) Enter the data from the table.
c) Choose Select Deliveries.
RC
d) In the dialog box, in the W. ref. to area, in the Outbound Delivery field, enter the delivery
number in the first field.
e) Choose Execute.
f) Save the shipment and note the shipment number.
g) Exit the function.
FO
4. Send the shipment to SAP TM for tendering.
a) In the Command field, enter transaction code VT02N and press Enter.
b) Enter the shipment number and press Enter.
LY
c) On the Processing tab, in the Forwarding Agent field, enter CARR-00-01.
d) In the Stages tab, click Leg determination.
ON
e) Click Continue to accept the proposal.
f) On the Stages tab, scroll to the right and enter the Planned Shipment Start and
Planned Shipment End Date according to the delivery dates.
g) Open the Tender tab.
h) In the Tender status field, choose New Offer from Shipper.
i) Save the shipment.
5. In SAP TM, view the freight order created from the shipment.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
371
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Freight Order Management
→ Road → Overview Road Freight Orders.
b) Select the query All Created from ERP Shipment.
c) Choose Refresh.
d) In the query list, use the ERP Shipment column, and locate the shipment number.
e) The freight order number, is in the Document column on the same row.
R
6. Open the freight order.
a) In the query list, select the row for the freight order.
ME
b) Choose Edit.
c) Open the General Data tab.
d) In the Document Type field, you will see the freight order type.
US
TO
e) In the Carrier field, you see that the carrier information has been carried over from the
shipment.
f) Open the Document Flow tab.
Here you will see the predecessor documents.
7. Send the freight order for tendering.
a) In the freight order, choose Subcontracting → Automatic Tendering.
b) In the dialog box, enter the following data:
Value
FO
RC
Field
Tendering Manager
Your User ID
Tendering Profile
TM310-BROADCAST-1STEP
c) Save the freight order.
d) Open the Subcontracting tab, and open the Tendering Overview tab.
e) Note the RFQ numbers created for carriers CARR-00-01 and CARR-00-02.
8. Accept and award the tender to CARR-00-02.
LY
a) In SAP TM, in the NetWeaver Business Client, choose Freight Order Management
→ Road → Overview Tendering.
b) In the Freight RFQs query section, select Open.
ON
c) Click Refresh.
d) Select the RFQ corresponding to carrier CARR-00-01.
e) Choose Create Freight Quotation → Reject (other).
f) In the dialog box, click OK.
g) Select the RFQ corresponding to carrier CARR-00-02.
h) Choose Create Freight Quotation → Accept.
372
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
i) In the dialog box, choose OK.
j) Open or refresh the freight order.
k) Open the Subcontracting tab.
l) In the Tendering Overview tab, select the RFQ for CARR-00-02.
R
m) Look at the Award Status, it has changed to Awarded. Look at the Carrier field, carrier
CARR-00-02 has been assigned to the freight order now.
ME
Note:
The quotations are evaluated by a background report which is scheduled to
run every five minutes on this system. Therefore, it might take up to five
minutes until the quotation is awarded and the new carrier is assigned.
US
TO
n) Review the changed carrier in the SAP ERP shipment.
Shipment-Based Freight Order Settings
Configuring Inbound Shipment Integration Settings in SAP TM
Assign Freight Order Types to ERP Shipment Types
●
Maintain suitable output profile for the freight order
●
Specify Freight Order Type as Relevant for Sub-Contracting
●
RC
●
Specify Document Creation Relevance for Freight Order Type as Freight Order Created
from SAP ERP Shipment.
Configuring Inbound Shipment Integration Settings in SAP ERP
Set necessary delivery types as relevant for transportation
FO
●
●
Associate the necessary output type to the shipment type
●
Maintain condition types for service agents
LY
Configuring Inbound Shipment Integration Settings in SAP NetWeaver XI
Set up the inbound integration scenario TM_ERPShipmentIntegration_In
ON
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
373
US
TO
Figure 104: Configuration for Multiple Processing
ME
R
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
You can configure the SAP ERP shipment output for multiple processing so that critical
changes are transferred to SAP TM. This is especially important when using SAP TM for
freight costing and cost distribution purposes.
To do this, set up a partner profile with consideration to the following settings:
●
Message Code
FO
RC
1. CRE/UPD for triggering creation or update of TM freight order
2. TND to receive tendering result notifications from SAP TM
3. CNC for triggering cancelations in SAP TM
●
Process Code
1. SD11 for all scenarios
To trigger the cancellation of freight orders after the shipment is canceled or deleted, activate
SHIPPL.TPSSHP01. Depending upon your scenario, there are 2 variants for canceling the
freight order.
LY
Variant 1
If you reset the tender status in shipments to CN and you want to delete shipments in ERP,
use this variant. Depending on the type of freight order, this will either delete the freight order
in SAP TM, or its status will be changed to Canceled .
ON
To configure this variant, proceed as follows:
1. Create a Business Add-In (BAdI) implementation for the BAdI BADI_LE_SHIPMENT in the
method BEFORE_UPDATE. For this, use the source code that is described in the manual
correction instructions 936359. When you delete the shipment or change its tender status
to CN, the IDoc TPSSHT01 is created with the output type SHIPPL in the method.
2. Create a new database table to be able to determine the logical system for the IDoc
TPSSHT01. Open transaction SE11 and create a new database table with the following
fields:
374
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
Key
Initial value
Data element
Short description
MANDT
X
X
MANDT
Client
TPLST
X
X
TPLST
Transportation
planning point
SHTYP
X
X
SHTYP
Shipment type
VTPARN
EDI_VTPARN
Partner number
VTPART
EDI_VTPART
R
Field
ME
Partner type
3. Modify the function module IDOC_OUTPUT_SHIPPL that is called in the BAdI
implementation as described in the manual correction instructions 1298598.
Variant 2
US
TO
Use this variant if you only want to reset the tender status in the shipment to CN. Shipments
are never deleted in SAP ERP in your process. Depending on the type of the freight order, this
mean that, in SAP TM, the freight order deleted or the status is changed to canceled.
With this output type, an IDoc is created with the basic type SHPMNT05 and the message
variant CNC. This IDoc is used in SAP PI for a web service that deletes or cancels a freight
order in SAP TM.
You can create the output type, for example ZTND, using the settings listed below.
Table 54: Output Configuration: General Data
Value
RC
Field
ZTND
Access Sequence (on the General tab)
Z001
Access to Conditions (on the General tab)
Selected
FO
Output Type
Selected
Dispatch Time (on the Default Values tab)
Send Immediately (4)
Transmission Medium (on the Default Values
tab)
EDI (6)
Partner Function (on the Default Values tab)
SP
LY
Multiple Issuing (on the General tab)
Table 55: Output Configuration: Processing Routines
Value
Program
RSNATED
From Routine
EDI_PROCESSING
ON
Field
Table 56: Output Configuration: Partner Functions
Open the Partner Functions folder and create a new entry with the following data:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
375
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
Field
Value
Medium
EDI (6)
Function
SP
Name
Forwarding Agent
Table 57: Output Procedure: General Data
ME
In the Control Data folder, create a new entry with the following data:
R
Variant 2 Output Procedure
Value
Step
Numerical value
Counter
Numerical value
Output type
ZTND (TNDR)
US
TO
Field
Requirement
52
In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution → Transportation
→ Basic Transportation Functions → Output Control → Maintain Output Determination for
Shipments → Maintain Output Types.
You can customize your access sequence according to your business requirements.
RC
After the output type has been successfully created, assign it to the output determination
procedure.
In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution → Transportation
→ Basic Transportation Functions → Output Control → Maintain Output Determination for
Shipments → Maintain Output Determination Procedure.
FO
To send the updates to SAP TM, create another output type, for example ZUPD. To prevent
the message from being generated if the tender status has not changed, create a
requirement. There is an example for a requirement in the manual correction instruction in
SAP OSS note 1298755.
LY
To Configure Settings for Shipment-Based Freight Orders
Note that, in this procedure, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor
ON
1. In SAP ERP, in Customizing for Logistics Execution create a shipment type for ERP
Shipment Integration Inbound with the following information:
376
Field
Value
Shipment type
T1##
Description
GRP## ShipInt Inbnd
NR int. assgnt
01
ShpmtComplType
Loaded Outbound Shipment
Shipping Type
01 (Truck)
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
Value
Service Level
Load
ProcessControl
Individual shipment using one
mode of transport
Leg Indicator
Direct Leg
Adopt Route
Adopt All stages
Determine Legs
Legs determined according to departure point & itinerary
GR- RelevanceInd
Normal
Pick check
Shipment completion only for full
picking
Weight Unit
LB
Copy Routine
ME
US
TO
Volume Unit
R
Field
CDM
7 (Service Agent/Route)
a) In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution → Transportation
→ Shipments → Define Shipment Types.
b) Choose New Entries.
RC
c) Enter the data provided in the table.
d) Save the shipment type.
2. Assign the output determination procedure for shipment type using the following data:
Field
Value
T1##
Output Determination Procedure
ZSHIP1
FO
Shipment Type
LY
a) In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution → Transportation
→ Basic Transportation Functions → Output Control → Maintain Output
Determination for Shipments → Assign Output Determination Procedure.
b) Navigate to your shipment type T1##.
ON
c) Save the assignment.
3. Assign the text determination procedure for shipment type using the following data:
Field
Value
Shipment Type
T1##
Text Determination Procedure
03
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
377
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
a) In Customizing for Logistics Execution, choose Logistics Execution → Transportation
→ Basic Transportation Functions → Text Control → Define and Assign Text
Determination Procedure.
b) Choose Shipment → Header.
c) Choose Change.
d) In the Dialog Structure, double-click Text Procedure Assignment.
R
e) Navigate to your shipment type and assign the text determination procedure as shown
in the table.
ME
f) Save the assignment.
4. Create condition records for shipments with the following data:
Shipment Carrier
Type
TNDR
T1##
TNCN
ZSHP
Function
Partner
Medium
Date
Language
CARR-00 LS
-01
XI_00_8
00
6
4
EN
T1##
CARR-00 LS
-01
XI_00_8
00
6
4
EN
T1##
CARR-00 LS
-01
XI_00_8
00
6
4
EN
US
TO
Output
Type
RC
a) In SAP ERP, in the Command field, enter transaction code VV71 and press Enter.
b) Create condition records using the data in the table.
c) Save the condition records.
Field
Value
Freight Order Type
T1##
Reference Freight Order Type
T100
Description
TM120 ## For Inbound Integration
LY
FO
5. Create a freight order type for Inbound ERP Integration by copying an existing freight
order type. Use the following data:
Default Type for ERP Shipment Integration
Blank
ON
a) In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation
Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order Management
→ Freight Order → Define Freight Order Types.
b) Choose the row for T100.
c) Choose
(Copy As).
d) Update the Freight Order Type , Description and the Default Type for EPR Shipment
Integration fields with the data in the table.
378
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating Freight Orders from Shipments
Caution:
Do not change any other settings in the new freight order type but take
over the settings from freight order type T100.
e) Choose Copy.
f) Save the freight order type.
Value
ERP Shipment Type
T1##
Freight Order Type
T1##
ME
Field
R
6. Map ERP shipment types to TM freight order types with the following data:
US
TO
a) In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation
Management → Transportation Management → Integration → ERP Logistics
Integration → Shipment Integration → Assign Freight Order Types to ERP Shipment
Types.
b) Create a new entry using the data provided in the table.
c) Save the mapping.
FO
RC
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Create shipment-based freight orders
●
Configure settings to enable shipment-based freight orders
ON
LY
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
379
Unit 9
Lesson 4
R
Communicating Freight Orders to Other
Companies
●
US
TO
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn about the different business scenarios for business-to-business
communication.
Explain the business scenarios for business-to-business communication
FO
RC
Freight Order Communication
LY
Figure 105: SAP TM Usage with Shippers and LSPs
ON
When looking at shippers that use SAP TM, we talk about ERP logistics integration and
planning that creates freight orders. When looking at LSP business in SAP TM, we talk about
forwarding orders from customers. We can now put the perspectives of the shipper and the
LSP together; a shipper using SAP TM communicates with an LSP using SAP TM. In this case,
the shipper creates freight orders and sends them to the carrier assigned to the freight order.
In the shipper‘s TM system, an XML message is created and sent to the middleware system
that takes care of routing the message to the right business partner.
In the LSP‘s TM system, when the shipper‘s XML message is received, a forwarding order is
created based on the information in the shipper‘s freight order. If the LSP confirms the
forwarding order, this confirmation is sent back to the shipper and the freight order is
updated.
380
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Communicating Freight Orders to Other Companies
US
TO
Figure 106: Sending Freight Orders to Carriers
ME
R
Freight Order Sending
The freight order can be sent from the freight order UI as the figure shows. Choose Send to
Carrier; the follow up activity depends on the technical setup of the system landscape. The
SAP TM system creates an XML message with all information about the freight order and
sends it to the assigned middleware.
RC
When the LSP sends a confirmation outside of the system (that is via E-mail, telephone, or
fax), the confirmation can be entered in the freight order manually by choosing Set to
confirmed by carrier. When the LSP sends a confirmation electronically, the confirmation is
logged in the freight order automatically.
FO
Note:
In case of tendering processes, the freight RFQ of the shipper is again sent to the
LSP‘s TM system, where a forwarding quotation is created. When the forwarding
quotation is processed and responded to by the LSP, it is sent back to the shipper
where the freight RFQ is updated.
LY
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Explain the business scenarios for business-to-business communication
ON
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
381
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 9: Freight Order Integration
382
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 9
Learning Assessment
ME
Choose the correct answer.
R
1. Which of the following statements is an example of the shipment outbound scenario?
A When transportation activities based on deliveries transferred from SAP ERP are
planned in SAP TM.
X
B When transportation activities based on deliveries that are transferred from SAP
ERP are booked in SAP TM.
X
C When transportation activities are booked and planned in SAP ERP.
X
D When transportation activities are booked and planned in SAP ERP.
US
TO
X
2. Inbound integration of shipment processing enables you to do which of the following
tasks?
RC
Choose the correct answers.
A Transfer shipments from SAP ERP to SAP TM and create freight orders in SAP TM
based on the shipments.
X
B Update shipment-based freight orders in SAP TM if the relevant shipment in SAP
ERP changes or if a delivery within the shipment changes.
FO
X
C Transfer the tendering result for a freight order from SAP TM to the shipment in
SAP ERP.
X
D Cancel freight orders in SAP TM if the relevant shipment in SAP ERP is deleted or
the tendering status is reset.
LY
X
E Create shipments in SAP ERP based on the freight orders transferred from SAP TM
to SAP ERP.
ON
X
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
383
Unit 9: Learning Assessment
3. In the outbound integration scenario, identify the order in which the following tasks are
performed.
Arrange these steps into the correct sequence.
0 Send ERP deliveries to SAP TM.
0 Plan the transportation process in SAP TM.
0 Shipments created in SAP ERP.
0 Transport execution in SAP ERP.
ME
0 Send the freight orders to SAP ERP.
R
0 Tender the freight orders in SAP TM.
Choose the correct answers.
US
TO
4. For freight order-based shipments, which of the following settings must be maintained in
SAP ERP?
A Set up an external number range object that matches the freight order number
range.
X
B Adopt route and determine legs.
X
C Maintain transportation planning point ‘1000’.
FO
RC
X
D Ensure that the delivery types are relevant for transportation execution.
X
E Set up shipment types.
ON
LY
X
384
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 9
Learning Assessment - Answers
ME
Choose the correct answer.
R
1. Which of the following statements is an example of the shipment outbound scenario?
A When transportation activities based on deliveries transferred from SAP ERP are
planned in SAP TM.
X
B When transportation activities based on deliveries that are transferred from SAP
ERP are booked in SAP TM.
X
C When transportation activities are booked and planned in SAP ERP.
X
D When transportation activities are booked and planned in SAP ERP.
US
TO
X
That is correct. A shipment outbound scenario is when transportation activities based on
deliveries transferred from SAP ERP are planned in SAP TM.
RC
2. Inbound integration of shipment processing enables you to do which of the following
tasks?
Choose the correct answers.
A Transfer shipments from SAP ERP to SAP TM and create freight orders in SAP TM
based on the shipments.
X
B Update shipment-based freight orders in SAP TM if the relevant shipment in SAP
ERP changes or if a delivery within the shipment changes.
X
C Transfer the tendering result for a freight order from SAP TM to the shipment in
SAP ERP.
X
D Cancel freight orders in SAP TM if the relevant shipment in SAP ERP is deleted or
the tendering status is reset.
X
E Create shipments in SAP ERP based on the freight orders transferred from SAP TM
to SAP ERP.
ON
LY
FO
X
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
385
Unit 9: Learning Assessment - Answers
3. In the outbound integration scenario, identify the order in which the following tasks are
performed.
Arrange these steps into the correct sequence.
1 Send ERP deliveries to SAP TM.
2 Plan the transportation process in SAP TM.
5 Shipments created in SAP ERP.
6 Transport execution in SAP ERP.
ME
4 Send the freight orders to SAP ERP.
R
3 Tender the freight orders in SAP TM.
Choose the correct answers.
US
TO
4. For freight order-based shipments, which of the following settings must be maintained in
SAP ERP?
A Set up an external number range object that matches the freight order number
range.
X
B Adopt route and determine legs.
X
C Maintain transportation planning point ‘1000’.
X
D Ensure that the delivery types are relevant for transportation execution.
X
E Set up shipment types.
ON
LY
FO
RC
X
386
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
UNIT 10
Transportation Event
Monitoring
Lesson 2
388
397
ME
Monitoring Transportation Events
Exercise 28: Monitor Freight Order Events
R
Lesson 1
404
US
TO
Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
Lesson 3
414
419
RC
Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
Exercise 29: Monitor Events in the Collaboration Portal
UNIT OBJECTIVES
Monitor transportation events with SAP Event Management
●
Configure settings to enable transportation event visibility
●
Handle events in the Collaboration Portal
ON
LY
FO
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
387
Unit 10
Lesson 1
Monitoring Transportation Events
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Monitor transportation events with SAP Event Management
Event Management
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to monitor transportation events with SAP Event Management.
LY
FO
RC
Nowadays, supply chains are global and complex. End-to-end supply chain visibility is one of
the key factors in efficient supply chain operation and control. SAP Event Management is the
only application needed to provide this visibility, because it is available to all partners,
including customers. SAP Event Management can also work with multiple SAP and non-SAP
applications.
ON
Figure 107: Visibility Across Business Partners And IT Environments
As companies expand their suite of IT products to handle more complex scenarios, they often
have to add systems to their enterprise resource planning environment. This makes it difficult
for business users and management to gain a complete view of end-to-end processes and to
monitor potential service issues. Therefore, it is imperative to have a tool that can incorporate
information from several systems and provide insight into the progress of order fulfillment.
SAP Event Management makes processes, assets, and performance visible across the entire
supply chain. Extensive tracking and tracing functions allow process monitoring, automated
exception resolution, proactive alerting, as well as extensive reporting in a single solution.
388
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
Event Management in SAP Transport Management (TM)
R
The event management system is designed to work with several SAP Enterprise Resource
Planning (SAP ERP) instances, if necessary. It can communicate with SAP Customer
Relationship Management (SAP CRM), where sales orders may be received, and this
communication is processed back to the customer to support order fulfillment. SAP
Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) may be responsible for creating the
replenishment plan. SAP ERP or SAP Manufacturing Execution (SAP ME) may be responsible
for communication and tracking progress on the shop floor. SAP Extended Warehouse
Management (SAP EWM) can be responsible for the picking and packing as part of the
logistics execution.
ME
SAP Event Management offers visibility processes to monitor transportation execution in
connection with SAP Transport Management (SAP TM). The transportation execution
visibility processes enable users in roles such as transportation dispatcher, shipper, or
ordering party, to track and monitor planned events, or to report an actual event. Tracking
and tracing is provided for the following business document types in SAP TM:
Freight unit
●
Freight order
●
Freight booking
●
Transportation unit
●
Resource
●
Instruction execution for standard operating procedures
US
TO
●
RC
In each case, the goal is to manage by exception, reduce time to action, and spend less time
fire-fighting.
ON
LY
FO
Event Management Process
Figure 108: Related Events - SAP Event Management
The four cornerstones of SAP Event Management are monitor, notify, analyze, and adjust.
They contribute to providing an adaptive solution. The monitoring process collects data from
the various source systems. Notifications can be set up to be triggered, with alerts sent to the
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
389
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
parties responsible if a process deviates from its anticipated course. Based on the alerts, the
appropriate parties can then simulate adjustments and make any necessary changes. Finally,
in relation to analytics, SAP Event Management can be tied into the SAP Business Warehouse
(SAP BW) environment to support transportation management reviews.
US
TO
ME
R
Event Types
Figure 109: Monitoring Types Of Events
●
FO
RC
SAP Event Management can process several different types of events. Within a given process,
you have events that you expect to happen, and events that actually happen. Typically, you
want to compare the actual event with what you expected, as follows:
Regular Event
The first type of event is an event that you expect to happen within a particular time frame,
and it happens as expected. This is a regular event.
●
Overdue Event
LY
This is an event that you expect to happen within a particular time frame, and it happens
outside the expected time frame. An overdue event can cause a subsequent event to be
rescheduled, or it could just be recorded as an overdue event.
●
Unexpected Event
ON
The third type of event is one that is unexpected. This could be a truck that breaking down
or a malfunction in a piece of equipment; something that could potentially have an effect
on subsequent events, causing something to be rescheduled or another action to be
taken. An unexpected event could trigger an alert or another type of notification.
●
Unreported Event
In this case, you expect an event to occur within a particular time frame, but it is not
reported. It is possible that something still needs to happen following this event, so you
could set a time limit that sends a message or triggers something to happen when the
event is unreported for a certain time period.
390
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
Event Management Tool Features
Event Management monitoring tools provide the following:
1. Expected events are coming from the application system, in this case SAP TM. The
expected events are the activities planned in SAP TM planning.
2. The reported events are the events that are reported from the real-world operations.
R
3. Based on received events from operations or unreported events, the rules in SAP Event
Management are triggered to respond to real-world activities happening in operations or
execution.
US
TO
ME
4. Using SAP TM screens or the SAP Event Management Web front-end, expected and real
events are made visible to user and target groups, such as (internal) customers, planners,
and people in operations. This visibility is given from a transport order, or on the demandside by way of freight unit tracking, tracing, and monitoring and, for the operations-side,
by way of freight orders and bookings tracking, tracing and monitoring.
SAP Event Management can point out critical situations within your supply chain in good time
by comparing expected events with the actual events, and can then, for example, actively
notify those persons involved.
An expected event is an event that can be defined before the corresponding business process
has begun and that describes the normal flow of the business process.
In the context of SAP TM integration, expected events are activities planned in SAP TM.
Expected events include the following:
Cargo receipt
●
Onboard confirmation
●
Proof of delivery
RC
●
FO
The expected events are compared to actual events (also known as reported events).
Reported events include the following:
Unloading truck
●
Late departure
●
Accident
●
No POD sent
LY
●
Transportation Execution Visibility Process
ON
The transportation execution visibility process enables users and target groups, such as
(internal) customers, planners, and people in operations, to monitor events or to report an
actual event by way of SAP TM screens or the SAP Event Management web interface.
SAP Event Management offers visibility processes to monitor transportation execution in
connection with SAP TM. Tracking and tracing is provided for the following business
document types in SAP TM:
●
Freight units
●
Freight orders
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
391
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
●
Freight bookings
●
Transportation unit
●
Resources
●
Instruction execution for standard operating procedures
Visibility Processes for Transportation Monitoring
ME
R
Transportation operations is an area in which transparency is crucial, especially in those
cases where lengthy transportation times have to be considered, such as when shipping
overseas. To ensure customer satisfaction, it is more important than ever to keep full control
of events, even if parts of the business process may run outside the sphere of influence of
your company.
FO
RC
US
TO
Visibility processes for transportation management offer preconfigured, out-of-the box
content for transportation operations, supporting you in tracking relevant activities within and
beyond the confines of your company. You can monitor different processes and business
documents, such as freight units, freight orders, and freight bookings. Depending on your
role, you can choose different layouts for the user interface, such as shipper and consignee,
which result in a comprehensive and easy to understand view of transportation operations.
LY
Figure 110: Visibility for Transportation Execution
ON
The figure, Visibility for Transportation Execution, depicts a realistic scenario in which SAP
TM and SAP Event Management can be integrated to monitor an end-to-end international
order. In the first step of the process, the order is created in SAP ERP and sent to SAP TM. At
this point, a freight unit is created and scheduling can begin.
SAP TM provides the basis for tracking and tracing in SAP EM. In SAP TM, freight units,
orders and bookings create the event handlers, and the planned activities in SAP TM are the
expected events that SAP EM monitors.
For real-world awareness and proactive monitoring, SAP TM relies on SAP EM. Actual events
that occur during execution are reported in SAP EM.
The reporting of events can happen in SAP TM and be sent to SAP EM, or happened in SAP
EM and be sent to SAP TM.
392
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
US
TO
ME
R
Visibility Processes for Transportation and Event Management — Process Flow
Figure 111: Visibility Processes for Transportation and Event Management — Process Flow
Alerts
RC
The figure, Visibility Processes for Transportation and Event Management - Process Flow,
shows a typical scenario in which the SAP EM and SAP TM systems are updated to reflect
accurately the real world progress of a freight order.
FO
During the loading process, SAP ERP or SAP EWM may send a signal (notification) that there
is a delay in the loading process. This can trigger an alert. The transportation planner may
have to adjust the schedule to ensure that the container makes it to the ship on time. Once
the ship has left the departure port, GPS updates may indicate that the ship has not reached
its midway point. This could be due to weather or mechanical issues. The customer service
agent can be notified and can contact the customer to inform them of anticipated delays.
ON
LY
Due to the alert system, the planning team does not have to watch over every order. They can
spend most of their time managing exceptions.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
393
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Standard Content For Transportation Monitoring
Figure 112: Event Management Content for SAP TM
The figure, Event Management Content for SAP TM, shows both expected and unexpected
events. The expected events are planned activities in SAP TM. For example, when loading
begins for a freight unit, SAP TM reports to SAP EM that this event has occurred.
Unexpected events are events that are not planned, for example delays, damaged packaging
material, and cancellations. Unexpected events can also be reported from SAP TM.
ON
LY
Mobile Tracking and Tracing
Figure 113: SAP TM Mobile Solutions
SAP TM Notifier is an app that provides event report functionality to Android-based mobile
devices. It enables you to display a list of open and assigned freight orders along with their
394
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
details, for example, the stops for a freight order and freight units that are assigned to the
stops. You can also report the delivery status.
Additional features include the ability to display the map indicating the exact location of the
freight order or freight unit in real-time (from the latest reported events). Each stop has a list
of predefined events that you can use to report the status of your delivery, for example, start
loading or finish loading. In addition to the predefined events, you can send a delay
notification for an event.
RC
US
TO
ME
R
SAP TM Notifier
Figure 114: SAP Transport Tracker
FO
With the SAP TM Notifier app, you can display freight order details and report the status of
your delivery using predefined events on your mobile device. Mobile devices provide planning
information for the driver, and execution information back to the planner from the driver.
Mobile tracking enables users by being able to do the following:
Display open freight orders that are valid within a certain time frame
●
Display details of a freight order
●
Display details of a stop
LY
●
Display freight units for a stop
●
Display events for a stop
●
Display information about a freight order on a map
●
Confirm an event for a stop after completing the corresponding activity
●
Report a delay for an event
ON
●
Use Case for SAP TM Notifier App
1. Gather the relevant freight orders.
2. Review the tour data.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
395
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
3. Show data on the map.
4. Report potential problems or delays.
5. Execute part of the freight order or the whole freight order and report back the execution.
The technical requirements for the SAP TM Notifier App are as follows:
SAP Transportation Management Release 8.0
●
SAP Event Management Release 7.1, Enhancement Package 1, SP05
●
SAP NetWeaver Release 7.02
●
SAP NetWeaver Gateway 2.0 Support Package 2
●
Sybase Unwired Platform 2.1
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
396
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 10
Exercise 28
Monitor Freight Order Events
R
Business Example
ME
Verify that your freight order is relevant for SAP Event Management tracking. Use freight
order type T0##.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
Field
US
TO
1. In Customizing for SAP TM, verify that your freight order is relevant for SAP Event
Management tracking. Use freight order type T0##. Ensure that the following parameters
are set:
Value
Execution Tracking Relevance
Execution Tracking with External
Event Management
Immediate Processing
Selected
Selected
Severe Execution Checks
Not selected
Application Object Type
ODT30_TO (Tour in Transportation
Execution Visibility Process
(New))
Last Exp. Event
UNLOAD_END
FO
RC
Propagate Execution Info
(Last Expected Event for Execution of a
Document)
LY
Create a Sales Order
Create a sales order in the SAP ERP system.
ON
1. In SAP ERP, create a sales order with the following data:
Field
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
TM320–GRP##-1.1
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
397
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
Field
Value
Material
PRODTM-00
Order Quantity
30
Make a note of the order number.
Create a Freight Order
R
1. In NWBC, in the worklist, select your OTR and open the transportation cockpit.
ME
2. Update the SAP Transportation Cockpit: Profile and Layout Sets using the following data:
Value
Planning Profile
GRP##-NA-FU-PLAN-PROF
Transportation Cockpit Layout
Standard
Layout for Planning Result Screen
Standard
Description
GRP## Profile and Layout Set
Default Set
US
TO
Field
Selected
3. Plan the freight order with carrier US-CAR-01, using Optimizer Planning.
4. In the freight order, determine all the planned events.
FO
RC
5. In the freight order, where can you find the planned departure and arrival dates?
Record Expected Events and Event Exceptions in SAP TM
In this task, you report an expected event and create an unexpected event in SAP TM.
1. In NWBC, change your freight order by reporting Proof of Pickup.
LY
2. In NWBC, change your freight order by adding an unexpected event with the following
details:
User action or value
Event
Delay
Event Reason
Snowstorm
Actual Event Date
Today's date
ON
Field
398
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 10
Solution 28
Monitor Freight Order Events
R
Business Example
ME
Verify that your freight order is relevant for SAP Event Management tracking. Use freight
order type T0##.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
Field
US
TO
1. In Customizing for SAP TM, verify that your freight order is relevant for SAP Event
Management tracking. Use freight order type T0##. Ensure that the following parameters
are set:
Value
Execution Tracking Relevance
Execution Tracking with External
Event Management
Immediate Processing
Selected
Selected
Severe Execution Checks
Not selected
Application Object Type
ODT30_TO (Tour in Transportation
Execution Visibility Process
(New))
Last Exp. Event
UNLOAD_END
FO
RC
Propagate Execution Info
(Last Expected Event for Execution of a
Document)
LY
a) In Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation
Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order Management
→ Freight Order → Define Freight Order Types.
ON
b) Make sure that you are in the display mode. To switch to the display mode on the
Change View Freight Order Types: Details screen, choose Change → Display.
c) Select the freight order type and choose
(Details).
d) On the Display View Freight Order Types: Details screen, in the Execution Settings
screen area, verify that the settings are as shown in the table.
e) Exit the function.
Create a Sales Order
Create a sales order in the SAP ERP system.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
399
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
Value
Order Type
ZT00
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
Sold-to Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
TM320–GRP##-1.1
Material
PRODTM-00
Order Quantity
30
US
TO
Make a note of the order number.
ME
Field
R
1. In SAP ERP, create a sales order with the following data:
a) In SAP ERP, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Sales and
Distribution → Sales → Order → Create (VA01).
b) On the Create Sales Order: Initial Screen, enter the following data:
Field
Order Type
Sales Organization
ZT00
3000
10
FO
RC
Distribution Channel
Value
Division
00
c) Choose Enter.
d) On the Create TM100 Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following data:
Value
Sold-to Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
TM320–GRP##-1.1
LY
Field
Material
PRODTM-00
Order Quantity
30
ON
e) Choose Save.
f) Make a note of the order number: __________________________
Create a Freight Order
1. In NWBC, in the worklist, select your OTR and open the transportation cockpit.
a) In NWBC, choose ERP Logistics Integration → Worklist → Overview Transportation
Requirements.
400
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
b) Choose Refresh.
c) In the Order-Based Transportation Requirements - All screen area, select your sales
order, and choose Start Transportation Cockpit.
2. Update the SAP Transportation Cockpit: Profile and Layout Sets using the following data:
Value
Planning Profile
GRP##-NA-FU-PLAN-PROF
Transportation Cockpit Layout
Standard
Layout for Planning Result Screen
Standard
Description
GRP## Profile and Layout Set
Default Set
Selected
ME
R
Field
US
TO
a) On the Transportation Cockpit: Profile and Layout Sets screen, choose New.
b) Enter the data provided in the table (or select your Profile and Layout Set if you have
already created one).
c) Choose Save.
d) Choose Continue.
e) Select the new row and choose Continue.
3. Plan the freight order with carrier US-CAR-01, using Optimizer Planning.
RC
a) In the Freight Unit Stages screen area, select the freight unit.
b) Choose Optimizer Planning → Selected Entries with All Resources.
c) Note the freight order number.
FO
d) Select the new freight order and choose Carrier Selection → Manual.
e) In the Assign Carrier Manually dialog box, enter US-CAR-01 and choose OK.
f) Choose Accept.
g) Choose Save.
LY
4. In the freight order, determine all the planned events.
a) In the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings screen area, choose the freight order document
number.
ON
b) Open the Execution tab and review the expected results.
c) For each event, note the Planned Date and Location.
5. In the freight order, where can you find the planned departure and arrival dates?
Open the Stages tab and you will see the planned departure and arrival dates and times for
that stage.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
401
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
a) Open the Stages tab.
b) Select a stage and in the Stages table, you can see the relevant information.
c) On the Stages tab, select the stage in the table.
This opens new tabs.
d) View the required information on the Dates/Times tab.
Note that the planned dates that are taken over into the expected events.
R
e) Stay on the Freight Order screen.
ME
Record Expected Events and Event Exceptions in SAP TM
In this task, you report an expected event and create an unexpected event in SAP TM.
1. In NWBC, change your freight order by reporting Proof of Pickup.
a) In your freight order, on the Execution tab, choose Edit.
US
TO
b) Select the Proof of Pickup event row.
c) On the Execution tab, below the table of events, in the Actual Event Date field, ensure
that you can enter a date. Do not enter a date here.
d) In the table of events, choose Report Event.
e) Check that the status is changed for the proof of pickup event and that the current
date and time is the actual event date.
RC
f) In the Proof of Pickup row, check that in the Source of Exec. Information column, it is
Reported Directly for this Document.
g) Save your data and stay on this screen.
2. In NWBC, change your freight order by adding an unexpected event with the following
details:
Field
FO
Event
User action or value
Delay
Event Reason
Snowstorm
Actual Event Date
Today's date
LY
a) In your freight order, on the Execution tab, choose Edit.
b) Choose Insert Event.
ON
c) On the Execution tab, enter the data provided in the table.
d) Choose Save.
e) Note that the unexpected event has appeared in the event list on the Execution tab.
f) Close the window.
402
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Monitor transportation events with SAP Event Management
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
403
Unit 10
Lesson 2
R
Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM)
for Transportation Visibility
●
US
TO
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to configure the settings to enable visibility to transportation
events with SAP EM.
Configure settings to enable transportation event visibility
ON
LY
FO
RC
Event Creation Architecture Landscape
Figure 115: Creating Events: Architectural Landscape
In SAP TM, an application interface (AI) to SAP Event Management (SAP EM) configuration is
required so that data is transferred from the SAP TM to SAP EM. Examples of configuration
objects include function modules (codes) and extractors required to interface the data
between the two systems.
SAP TM must be configured so that programs (or extractors) can extract data (for example,
expected events) from SAP TM and send the data via the application interface to SAP EM.
404
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
Note:
This configuration is not part of this course.
To use the SAP EM features, configuration is also required in SAP EM. This may include
visibility settings using the Web UI or SAP GUI. Additionally, roles and role assignment to
users should be set up to enable access to visibility scenarios.
R
In SAP EM, Business Application Programming Interface (BAPIs) are used to integrate with
SAP TM and other non-SAP systems, via SAP Process Integration (SAP PI) or other methods.
ME
The BAPIs are as follows:
●
/SAPTRX/BAPI_EH_POST - for creation of event handlers
●
/SAPTRX/BAPI_EH_ADDEVENTMSG_02 - for reporting events
Integration Tools between SAP TM and SAP EM
US
TO
Non-TM systems use IDoc and Web Services to integrate into SAP EM.
SAP TM is different from other SAP solutions (for example, SAP ERP) in the way that it
interfaces with the application interface. In SAP ERP, this interface is triggered by BAdIs when
a business document is saved. SAP TM uses the Post-Processing Framework (PPF) for this.
The PPF is also used for printing and interfaces to SAP ERP and SAP Global Trade Services
(SAP GTS). Therefore, before the integration can start, you need to check if this EM Interface
is enabled in the PPF.
ON
LY
FO
RC
In Customizing for Cross- Application Components, choose Reusable Objects and Functions
for BOPF Environment → PPF Adapter for Output Management → Maintain Output
Management Adapter Settings.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
405
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
US
TO
ME
R
Event Types and Event Handler Configuration Settings
FO
RC
Figure 116: Creating Event Handlers and Expected Events in TM
In the integration between SAP TM and SAP EM, two different interfaces and functions are
used, as follows:
1. Creation and update of the Event Handler with all expected events and other critical fields
such as parameter and tracking IDs.
2. Sending or reporting of events from the SAP TM system, for example, loading or unloading
events from freight unit or freight order.
LY
To be able to create event handlers in SAP TM, you must configure the application object
types (AOTs). From the AOTs, the extractors are created. These extractors send the data to
SAP EM and create SAP EM event handlers.
Content of Application Object Types
Application Object Types contain the following:
Expected events, with planned dates and times
ON
●
●
●
Tracking IDs that uniquely identify the trackable object or business document, for
example, a freight order
Information and system parameters that contain information about the object
Content of Extractors
The extractors contain the following:
406
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
●
A freight order
●
A freight booking
●
A freight unit
●
A transportation unit
●
Other objects
R
Event Handlers and Reporting Events in SAP EM
ME
An event handler represents a business document (for example, freight order, freight unit, or
transportation unit) or a business process (for example, within a Transportation Execution)
that is relevant to tracking or monitoring functions. SAP EM creates an event handler for each
object. The event handler contains all of the information necessary to track this application
object. It contains this information in a form that is independent of its origin, so that SAP EM
can map and track business processes in a uniform way.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
The event handler information makes it possible to enable the monitoring of events that are
reported to SAP EM for an application object, and to check if the actual events occur in line
with the expected events. In SAP TM, event types are used to send or report events to SAP
EM.
Figure 117: Reporting Events in SAP EM
Events
When events are reported, SAP EM uses the tracking ID that is provided in the event message
to find the corresponding event handler.
Basic Fields in an Event
An event contains the following basic fields:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
407
●
Date
●
Time
●
Time zone
●
Tracking ID
●
Tracking code
●
Event code
R
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
FO
RC
US
TO
Visibility Process Configuration
ME
All of these fields are configured or coded in the event types.
Figure 118: SAP-Delivered Visibility Processes
LY
To monitor SAP TM Execution events, you can use the visibility scenarios from the freight
order, freight booking, resource, or freight unit in the standard.
This means that the application object types (AOTs) and the event type configuration are
already available and only need to be activated. You also need to assign the application (in this
case, SAP TM) to the SAP EM system.
ON
Visibility Scenario Prerequisites
To use the visibility scenarios for transportation execution in SAP EM, you will need to ensure
that the following prerequisites are fulfilled:
1. An RFC destination between SAP TM and SAP EM in transaction SM59 is created.
2. All services below default_host/sap/bc/webdynpro/saptrx/ in transaction SICF for the
SAP EM Web interface to work.
3. Business function SCM_EM_TMCONTENT01 is activated in SAP EM.
408
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
Configuration in SAP TM
Once the prerequisites are fulfilled, you can perform the following configuration in SAP TM:
1. Define SAP EM.
2. Define used business process types, application object types, and event type.
a. Assign SAP EM to the application object types.
c. Assign SAP EM to all required events types.
R
b. Mark the event management relevance for the application object.
3. Activate the application object types.
Configuration in SAP EM
US
TO
Perform the following steps in SAP EM:
ME
d. Mark the event management relevance for all required events types.
1. Define an application system.
2. Assign a parameter profile to the mapping area.
3. Assign user profiles to users or a role.
RC
Hint:
When you use SAP Event Management for the first time, all Web interface fields
are not yet compiled. To avoid problems in the Web interface, open the
configuration transaction Configure Fields for User Profiles once.
ON
LY
FO
Settings in SAP Transportation Management
Figure 119: Configuration in SAP TM
Define the System Configuration
The RFC connection to the SAP Event Management system and the definition of the logical
system serve as base definitions for connecting to SAP EM.
In SAP TM, define the system configuration as follows:
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
409
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
1. Define Logical System for SAP Event Management.
In Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management
Interface → Define System Configuration → Define Logical System.
2. Define RFC Destination to SAP Event Management.
In Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management
Interface → Define System Configuration → Define RFC Connection to SAP EM.
3. Define SAP Event Management System.
ME
Define the Application Object Type
R
In Customizing for Integration with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management
Interface → Define System Configuration → Define RFC Connection to SAP EM.
Define the Event Type
US
TO
SAP delivers a predefined application object type with the relevant functions and extractors.
The application object type determines the SAP EM relevance of objects and processes in
SAP TM. To define the application object type, in Customizing for Integration with Other SAP
Components, choose Event Management Interface → Define Application Interface → Define
Used Bus. Proc. Types, Appl. Obj. Types, and Evt Types.
SAP delivers a predefined event type with the relevant functions and extractors. The event
type determines whether the change to an SAP TM object requires an event to be sent to the
relevant event handler in SAP EM. To define the event type, in Customizing for Integration
with Other SAP Components, choose Event Management Interface → Define Application
Interface → Define Used Bus. Proc. Types, Appl. Obj. Types, and Evt Types.
FO
RC
Set Freight Unit Types and Freight Order Types for SAP EM Integration
To track the execution status of a freight order or freight unit, the Execution Tracking
Relevance field in the freight order type and in the freight unit type must be set to Execution
Tracking with External Event Management. You can define the freight order in Customizing for
SAP Transportation Management. Choose Transportation Management → Freight Order
Management → Freight Order → Define Freight Order Types.
You can define the freight unit in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management. Choose
Transportation Management → Planning → Freight Unit → Define Freight Unit Types.
ON
LY
Settings in SAP Event Management
Figure 120: Configuration in SAP EM
The remote function call RFC connection to the SAP Event Management system and the
definition of the logical system serve as base definitions for connecting to SAP EM.
410
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
Parameter Mapping
The mapping profile is used to unify parameters when data is coming from SAP TM and to
determine event handler types. To define the parameter mapping, in Customizing for Event
Management, choose Event Management → Event Handlers and Event Handler Data
→ Parameters → Define Parameter Mapping.
To Configure Integration Between Freight Orders and Event Management
R
1. View the Event Manager Definition for the SAP TM logical system ZMTCLNT800.
b) In the Information dialog box, choose Continue.
ME
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Integration with Other SAP Components → Event
Management Interface → Define Application Interface → Define SAP EM.
c) In the Display View “SAP Event Manager Definitions”: Overview screen, look for the row
with ZMTCLNT800 in the Dest. field.
Field
Event Manager
EM Log. System
SAP EM Version
Local
Value
Name or identification of an Event Manager
The logical System ID of Event Manager
SAP Event Manager release used
Do not select the checkbox
Enter the standard name of an RFC destination. If
the receiver is an SAP system, the name of the instance in the SAP system is displayed. (For example ZMTCLNT800)
RC
Dest.
US
TO
d) Here you will see the various event manager definitions.
FO
Sync.
Select checkbox if the communication to the
Event Manager occurs synchronously for all BAPIs. Deselect this checkbox to improve performance. Select this checkbox for test purposes only.
In a productive environment, it is recommended
that you use asynchronous communication.
LY
e) Exit the function.
ON
2. View the business process type settings in SAP TM.
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Integration with Other SAP Components → Event
Management Interface → Define Application Interface → Define Used Bus. Proc.
Types, Appl. Obj. Types, and Evt Types.
b) On the Change View “Define Used Business Process Types”: Overview screen, select
the row for a business process type (for example, TMS_TOR).
c) In the Dialog Structure screen area, choose Define Application Object Types.
d) On the Change View “Define Application Object Types”: Overview screen, select an
application object type (for example, ODT30_T0).
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
411
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
e) Choose
(Details).
f) On the Change View “Define Application Object Types”: Details screen, in the Event
Manager field, ensure that the name of the Event Manager is entered (for example,
EM_TM_800).
g) Ensure that the EM Relevance of Appl. Obj. checkbox is checked.
3. View the event types.
R
a) In the Dialog Structure, choose Define Event Types.
c) Choose
ME
b) In the Change View “Define Event Types”: Overview screen, select an event type (for
example, ODT_20_Scheduled).
(Details).
US
TO
d) In the Change View “Define Event Types”: Details screen, on the General Data tab, in
the Event Manager field, ensure that the Event Manager name is entered (for example,
EM_TM_800).
e) Ensure that the EM Relevance of Appl. Obj. checkbox is selected.
f) Return to Customizing.
4. Enable event management tracking in SAP TM for freight order.
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management
→ Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Freight Order
→ Define Freight Order Types.
FO
RC
b) Choose a freight order type.
c) Choose
(Details).
d) On the Change View “Freight Order Types”: Details screen, in the Execution Settings
screen area, in the Execution Track Relev. field, choose Execution Tracking with
External Event Management.
e) If you select the Immediate Processing checkbox, the life cycle status is automatically
set to In Process when a freight order is created.
LY
f) The Propagate Execution Info setting indicates whether an event that is reported for a
freight order is to be propagated to the predecessor freight units.
g) If severe execution checks are activated, the system only allows you to perform cargo
management related activities on the freight order interface if the handling execution
status of the related items is set to a value that allows such activities.
ON
h) In the Event Management Settings section, in the Application Object Type field, select
an application object type for freight orders (for example, ODT30_T0).
i) In the Last Exp. Event field, select the last expected event, for example, POD (Proof of
Delivery). If this event is reported from the destination stop of a freight order, the
freight order is finished from an execution perspective and the system changes the
execution status of the freight order to Executed.
j) Save and exit the function.
5. Enable settings for event tracking in SAP EM.
412
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring SAP Event Management (SAP TM) for Transportation Visibility
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Event Management → General Settings in SAP
Event Management → Define Application System.
b) In the Information dialog box, choose Continue.
c) On the Display View "Application System Definition": Overview, screen in the logical
System field, enter the name of the system that is integrated with SAP EM (for
example, TM_00_800).
6. Enable Settings for the event handlers in SAP EM system.
R
d) Save and exit the function.
ME
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Event Management → Event Handlers and Event
Handler Data.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Configure settings to enable transportation event visibility
ON
LY
FO
RC
●
US
TO
b) Maintain additional settings for Event Handlers, Expected Events, and Parameters. For
more information, refer to the guide Integration of SAP TM and SAP Event
Management.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
413
Unit 10
Lesson 3
Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Handle events in the Collaboration Portal
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to monitor and handle events in the Collaboration Portal.
LY
FO
RC
Event Handling in the Collaboration Portal
ON
Figure 121: SAP TM Collaboration Portal
The SAP Transportation Management collaboration portal for carriers (SAP TM Collaboration
Portal) supports collaborative business processes.
As a carrier working with several shippers that use the SAP TM collaboration portal, you have
separate access to each of your shippers. In each case, you can work only with this one
shipper.
The main benefits of the SAP TM Collaboration Portal are as follows:
414
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
●
●
●
●
The SAP TM Collaboration Portal is a full browser-based solution, which means that the
carrier does not need access to shipper’s network (for example, a VPN connection).
All common browsers are supported (Internet Explorer 9, Mozilla Firefox, Safari, Google
Chrome).
The carrier does not have to install anything, but just log in into the collaboration portal
with the access (logon and password) provided by the shipper as SAP TM Collaboration
Portal owner or host.
R
●
Small and mid size carriers do not need to have SAP TM installed.
The carrier can see only request for quotations (RFQ) assigned to it, and the transmitted
quotations.
ME
●
To increase the usability of the portal by the carrier, user settings in the portal are stored
and are available after logging on again.
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
Event Notification and Handling
Figure 122: Event Notification and Handling
ON
Since the introduction of the Collaboration Portal, new functionality has been added to the
portal. One of the newer functionalities in the area of freight order management is event
notification and handling. It enables carriers to report expected (planned) and unexpected
events related to a freight order or the stops of a freight order, to the shipper.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
415
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Freight Orders for Execution
Figure 123: Freight Orders for Execution
Carriers enter the SAP Transportation Management Collaboration Portal on the Home screen.
This screen displays a worklist with the key performance indicators (KPIs) for the available
areas in the form of tiles. From the tiles, shippers can navigate to the individual areas to
continue their work.
The area of freight order management has been enhanced with a tile for Event Handling. The
tile displays the open freight orders for execution, for which events still have to be reported, if
necessary.
LY
The Freight Orders for Execution subscreen gives an overview of all of the freight orders
assigned to the carrier. The list can be filtered by the freight order status, and the individual
freight order for which an event should be reported can be selected. The locations where the
events occur can be displayed on a map, or the sequence of locations can be displayed in a
numbered list.
ON
The list supports sorting, searching for freight orders, and filtering. You can apply a quick filter
in the toolbar to filter the freight orders by the status of the event confirmation to show only
open freight orders (Open), freight orders for which all the planned events have already been
reported (Closed), or freight orders that have been canceled by the shipper (Canceled).
The next planned (Open) event is displayed for each freight order, together with the affected
locations and the date and time. By selecting a single row in the list, the next open event can
be directly reported.
416
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
Figure 124: Reporting Events
US
TO
ME
R
Reporting Events
RC
The Freight Order Details screen displays all of the execution related information. There is a
subscreen for entering tracking related information. On this screen, the carrier can enter
actual event data, such as reporting expected events, including comments, or add additional
events.
FO
On this subscreen, as well as the next planned event, the carrier can also report all open
events, such as Arrival, Loading Begin (for an expected event), or Delay (for an unexpected
event). The carrier can enter the date and time, a comment, and a reason for each event. It is
possible to report multiple events at the same time. The carrier can also upload attachments
and add notes to the freight order.
Note that the system displays planned events only if an integration with SAP Event
Management is set up in the back-end SAP TM system.
ON
LY
The carrier can report unplanned events that affect an individual location (Location Events) or
the transportation as a whole, for example a delay (Tour Events).
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
417
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
ME
R
Quantity Discrepancies
US
TO
Figure 125: Quantity Discrepancies
ON
LY
FO
RC
In addition to event notification and handling, there is also a subscreen for entering all cargorelated information. This screen enables the carrier to enter actual quantities on particular
stops. If there is a discrepancy between the quantity given in the freight order and the actual
quantity, this discrepancy can be reported by entering the actual quantity.
418
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 10
Exercise 29
Monitor Events in the Collaboration Portal
R
1. Open the Collaboration Portal.
Use the following credentials to logon:
User: US_CARR01
US
TO
Password: carrier01
ME
Use the URL https://wdflbmt2290.wdf.sap.corp:51681/sap/bc/ui5_ui5/tmui/
coll_portal/
2. Display all open freight orders for execution.
3. Open the freight order that you created for monitoring.
4. Review the events that have been reported so far.
5. Report Arrival at Destination with the current date and time.
ON
LY
FO
RC
6. Review the updated events in NWBC.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
419
Unit 10
Solution 29
Monitor Events in the Collaboration Portal
R
1. Open the Collaboration Portal.
Use the following credentials to logon:
User: US_CARR01
US
TO
Password: carrier01
ME
Use the URL https://wdflbmt2290.wdf.sap.corp:51681/sap/bc/ui5_ui5/tmui/
coll_portal/
a) Open the Collaboration Portal using the URL provided.
b) Logon to the Collaboration Portal using the credentials provided.
2. Display all open freight orders for execution.
a) Choose the Event Handling → Freight Orders for Execution tile.
3. Open the freight order that you created for monitoring.
FO
RC
a) In the list of Open freight orders, find the freight order that you created for monitoring,
and, to open it, click the link with the freight order ID.
4. Review the events that have been reported so far.
a) On the Events tab, review the events that have already been reported for the shipping
point in Chicago.
b) On the Events tab, review the events that have already been reported for the tour.
5. Report Arrival at Destination with the current date and time.
a) In the area of the destination location in Denver, in the Reported Date/Time column,
enter today’s date and the current time.
LY
b) Above the table, choose Update Events.
6. Review the updated events in NWBC.
a) Return to your freight order screen in NWBC and choose Refresh.
ON
b) Review the event Arrival at Destination.
420
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Handling Events in the Collaboration Portal
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Handle events in the Collaboration Portal
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
421
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 10: Transportation Event Monitoring
422
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 10
Learning Assessment
A Freight unit
X
B Transportation unit
X
C Resource
X
D Shipment
US
TO
X
ME
Choose the correct answers.
R
1. In which of the following business document types is SAP TM tracking and tracing
provided?
2. When configuring the transportation execution visibility process, which of the following
settings must be configured in SAP EM?
Choose the correct answers.
A Define an application system
X
B Assign a parameter profile to the mapping area
X
C Assign user profiles to users or a role
X
D Assign SAP EM to all required events types
ON
LY
FO
RC
X
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
423
Unit 10
Learning Assessment - Answers
R
1. In which of the following business document types is SAP TM tracking and tracing
provided?
A Freight unit
X
B Transportation unit
X
C Resource
X
D Shipment
US
TO
X
ME
Choose the correct answers.
2. When configuring the transportation execution visibility process, which of the following
settings must be configured in SAP EM?
Choose the correct answers.
A Define an application system
X
B Assign a parameter profile to the mapping area
X
C Assign user profiles to users or a role
X
D Assign SAP EM to all required events types
ON
LY
FO
RC
X
424
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
UNIT 11
Transportation Execution
R
Lesson 1
426
435
ME
Configuring Freight Order Output
Exercise 30: Configure Settings to Enable Printing of Freight Order Documents
Lesson 2
UNIT OBJECTIVES
444
455
US
TO
Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
Exercise 31: Process a Freight Order with Discrepancies
Configure settings to enable the printing of documents in the freight order
●
Process different types of discrepancies in SAP TM
ON
LY
FO
RC
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
425
Unit 11
Lesson 1
Configuring Freight Order Output
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Configure settings to enable the printing of documents in the freight order
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to integrate SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
transportation execution directly into SAP Transportation Management.
FO
RC
Output Management: Integration
LY
Figure 126: Output Management Overview
ON
Whether managing requests, planning, subcontracting, executing, or settling, each of the
users and managers involved needs to be notified when a task is required or a report on
recent activity is made. Users need to view the results of business process activities and
generate automated outputs in response to various business events. SAP TM output
management is an important requirement for keeping your business processes flowing and
synchronized.
Output management automates the output of business documents, such as printouts, in
response to certain business events.
Output management enables you to perform application-specific tasks such as uploading
data to a business intelligence (BI) system and sending events to SAP Event Management.
The solution enables you to set up outputs easily. It supports both automated back-end and
manual front-end outputs. You can also use a comprehensive output history to check and
monitor all the outputs that have been triggered for a business document. Output
management also supports the ArchiveLink, preview, and log display capabilities.
426
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Output
Output Management Communication
Output management provides you with the following external communication:
●
Printouts
●
Faxes
●
E-mails
R
Communication Types
Application-to-application (A2A) communication
●
Business-to-business (B2B) communication
●
SAP NetWeaver alert posting
●
Workflow task actioning
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
●
ME
Output management also provides you with methods to action the following types of
communication:
Figure 127: Examples of Output
ON
The figure, Examples of Output, depicts a possible example of output management using SAP
TM in a logistics service provider (LSP) scenario. Once a customer places a transportation
request with a freight forwarder, a forwarding order is created. The confirmed forwarding
order documents can be printed or sent to the customer by e-mail. If necessary, this can
trigger a workflow process to seek management approval. This could be the case if you
wanted to ship a product to a country that may be subject to government sanctions - the legal
department would therefore need to review it before it ships. Once planning is complete, the
freight forwarder can tender the shipment to a carrier via B2B or other means. This could
include a request for quote, particularly if this type of job has not been contracted before, or if
costs have undergone significant change due to economic conditions. The carrier can reply
using conventional or electronic means, depending on the technology available to them. Once
the order has been shipped in SAP TM, the settlement documents can trigger the generation
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
427
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
of freight invoices, and (if the costs that were agreed are relevant) the invoice verification
process can be activated.
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Output Management UI Actions
Figure 128: Output Management UI
There are several actions that can be performed from the output management UI of the
business documents.
Manual Generate Actions
The following options are available as manual generate actions:
Generating actions, including scheduling conditions checks
●
Generating a list of actions
LY
●
●
Generating actions, skipping schedule condition checks
●
Configuring actions that can skip schedule conditions
ON
Manual Executing Actions
The following options are available as manual executing actions:
428
●
Executing actions, including conditions checks (explicit save required)
●
Executing and saving
●
Executing actions, skipping start conditions
●
Configuring actions that can skip the start conditions
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Output
E-mail Subject and Note Templates
The following e-mail subject and note templates are available:
●
E-Mail subject is defaulted to the action name.
●
E-Mail note is defaulted, based on customizing
Change Output Parameters
Choose relevant communication medium
●
Modify
●
Printer
●
Number of print copies
●
Languages
●
Recipients
US
TO
Attachment Options
ME
●
R
The following change output parameters are available:
The following options for attachments are possible:
●
●
●
Attaching files in the output management UI
Predetermining the attachments using a BAdI or configuring in Post Processing
Framework (PPF) Customizing
RC
●
Uploading the attachments into the attachments folder of the leading business document
Sending the attachments to all the e-mail recipients, along with leading business
document
FO
Output Management: PPF Settings
ON
LY
The post processing framework (PPF) provides SAP applications with a uniform interface for
the condition-dependent generation of actions (for example, printing delivery notes, faxing
order confirmations, or triggering approval procedures). The actions are generated if specific
conditions are fulfilled for an application document, for example a specific status is set
(approval by some person) or a specific date has been reached (two weeks before end of
contract). The actions are then processed either directly, in a scheduled report later, or can
be deferred via queued remote function call (qRFC).
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
429
ME
R
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
US
TO
Figure 129: Post Processing Framework Schematic
The PPF is part of the SAP NetWeaver Application Server and can be used by applications. It
is the successor to message control and offers a wider range of functions, simpler connection
to the applications, and greater flexibility. The PPF provides tools for scheduling, starting, and
monitoring actions. Actions can be determined, generated, and processed either
automatically or with user interaction. With the PPF, you can evaluate modifiable conditions
for determining actions. The application can be used to select the determination technology
with which the conditions are evaluated or use its own determination technology.
RC
Processing types are provided by the PPF to execute various actions, as follows:
●
Printing, sending e-mails, and faxing with Smart Forms
●
Starting a workflow
●
Starting a Business Add-In
FO
The processing types can be adopted by the application, adapted to meet the requirements of
the application, or replaced with the processing types of the application. The PPF also
provides tools for the administration of actions. It has an action overview with status display,
determination logs, and processing logs. The overview can be included in the application as a
subscreen.
LY
The PPF triggers the main outbound communication and integration steps such as PI
outbound messaging, integration to SAP Event Management, BI, and workflow. In addition,
printing is triggered via PPF and handled by Adobe Document Services (ADS).
ON
Post Processing Framework (PPF) Configurations
●
Maintain application, action profile, action definition, and processing type
Table 58: Processing Type
430
Method call
For triggering outputs such as B2B/A2A
and so on, or to trigger any application-specific tasks
External communication
For print, fax, and e-mail
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Output
Trigger alert
For triggering an alert
Workflow
For triggering a workflow
●
Create conditions for the action definition: start condition and schedule conditions
●
Create processing details
R
An action definition is metadata or a skeleton of a business task and has to be maintained with
its individual configuration. While defining an action, it is possible to specify the type of action
(external, workflow, method call, or alert).
ME
The processing details are taken from the action definition and can be modified. For example,
the recipients (e-mail or fax) for external communication can be set.
A valid printer has to be set with the PPF conditions for actions, which result in printing.
Schedule condition
US
TO
To trigger PPF actions, start and schedule conditions need to be configured according to
business needs or rules, as follows:
The schedule condition decides whether an action should be scheduled for processing.
An action is therefore only generated if the schedule condition is met.
The filter value is specified in the Schedule condition field. The standard value /BOFU/
EVAL_SCHEDULE_CONDITION ensures that the method in the agent class is invoked.
Start condition
RC
The start condition is checked before the action is executed. The action is only executed
when the start condition has been fulfilled.
The filter value is specified in the Start condition field. The standard value /BOFU/
EVAL_START_CONDITION ensures that the method in the agent class is invoked.
ON
LY
FO
Output Management: Adapter Settings
Figure 130: Output Management Integration with SAP TM
Output management automates the output of business documents such as printouts, in
response to certain business events. This output management adapter helps you to integrate
output management functionality with application business objects (BOs) that are
implemented in a business object processing framework (BOPF).
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
431
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
Output Management Adapter
The output management adapter uses PPF to generate and process outputs. Depending on
how you configure PPF, it generates output actions for particular application data records.
The system then processes these actions and sends the output data.
US
TO
ME
R
All of the relevant action-level outputs are hard wired to the corresponding methods in the
agent class that is specified in the output management adapter customizing. This enables
easy implementation at the customer end.
Figure 131: Configuration - Output Management Adapter Settings
FO
RC
Action Profiles
When associating an agent class to a BO, it is possible to assign an action profile; assign
actions to the action profile, and specify whether the action is critical or uncritical.
Critical outputs must be completed within the logical unit of work (LUW), such as business-tobusiness (B2B) method calls or workflows.
ON
LY
Non-critical outputs fall into the category of communication methods, such as print, e-mail,
and fax.
432
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
US
TO
ME
R
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Output
Figure 132: Output Management Agent Classes
Any BOPF application implementing output management should create a class for handling
the actions according to business needs. This class should be created with /BOFU/
CL_PPF_SERV_FOR_BO as the super class.
ON
LY
FO
RC
The agent classes can be assigned to the BO node using the O/P adapter settings.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
433
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
434
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 11
Exercise 30
R
Configure Settings to Enable Printing of
Freight Order Documents
ME
Business Example
The system must be configured before freight order documents can be printed. You are an
SAP consultant working with your client ABC Shipping. You have been asked to configure the
system so the company can print freight order documents. In this exercise, you can practice
configuring the settings.
RC
2. What is an action profile?
US
TO
1. In SAP TM, what framework is used for any form of communication?
FO
3. What is an action definition?
LY
4. Identify the four main processing types supported in post processing framework.
ON
5. Identify the standard action profile for printing freight documents for road freight.
6. Locate the action definitions defined within action profile /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD.
7. Determine whether the action definition for /SCMTMS/PRINT_MAN is active or inactive.
8. Explore the action definition settings for the action definition /SCMTMS/PRINT_MAN.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
435
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
9. What is the significance of setting the processing time to Processing using the selection
report?
ME
11. Identify the processing types defined for /SCMTMS/PRINT_MAN.
R
10. What is meant by the Changeable in Dialog setting?
US
TO
12. Locate the form name for processing type external communication for /SCMTMS/
PRINT_MAN.
FO
RC
13. Identify the form type of the /SCMTMS/FP_MANIFEST form.
14. Locate where the archiving for documents can be enabled.
15. What is the difference between start conditions and schedule conditions?
LY
16. Identify the schedule condition maintained for /SCMTMS/PRINT_MAN.
ON
17. Locate where a default printer for this action is defined.
18. What is the function of an agent class?
436
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Output
19. Identify the agent class associated with the printing TOR objects.
R
20. Identify the action profiles associated with the /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINTING output agent.
ME
21. Identify whether actions relating to the printing of documents for road are enabled.
US
TO
22. Identify whether it is possible to skip the schedule condition checks for /SCMTMS/
PRINT_MAN.
RC
23. Identify whether it is possible to skip the start condition checks for the action /SCMTMS/
PRINT_MAN.
ON
LY
FO
24. Identify the output types associated with the freight order type T0##.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
437
Unit 11
Solution 30
R
Configure Settings to Enable Printing of
Freight Order Documents
ME
Business Example
The system must be configured before freight order documents can be printed. You are an
SAP consultant working with your client ABC Shipping. You have been asked to configure the
system so the company can print freight order documents. In this exercise, you can practice
configuring the settings.
US
TO
1. In SAP TM, what framework is used for any form of communication?
Output management based on post processing framework.
2. What is an action profile?
An action profile is used to group action definitions that belong together. For example, an
action profile can be used to group all actions related to freight orders for road.
FO
RC
3. What is an action definition?
An action definition is the basic structure for an action. It defines characteristics of the
action such as the time of trigger and whether it can be executed from the UI.
4. Identify the four main processing types supported in post processing framework.
External communication, Method Call, Alert, and Workflow.
LY
5. Identify the standard action profile for printing freight documents for road freight.
/SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD is the standard action profile for actions related to printing
freight documents for road freight.
ON
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Cross-Application Components → Processes and
Tools for Enterprise Applications → Reusable Objects and Functions for BOPF
Environment → PPF Adapter for Output Management → Maintain PPF Settings.
b) Select the application /SCMTMS/TRANSPORTATION.
c) Choose Define Action Profile and Actions.
d) Check the list for an action profile with the description Actions for Print Documents
Road Freight.
438
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Output
6. Locate the action definitions defined within action profile /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD.
a) In the Action Profile table, choose the action profile /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD.
b) In the Dialog Structure screen area, choose Action Definition.
7. Determine whether the action definition for /SCMTMS/PRINT_MAN is active or inactive.
The action definition is active because the Inactive checkbox is not selected.
R
a) In the /SCMTMS/PRINT_MAN row, look at the Inactive checkbox. If the checkbox is
selected, the action definition is inactive.
ME
8. Explore the action definition settings for the action definition /SCMTMS/PRINT_MAN.
a) In the list of action definitions, double-click /SCMTMS/PRINT_MAN.
b) View the various settings for the action definition.
US
TO
9. What is the significance of setting the processing time to Processing using the selection
report?
This means that the action is only scheduled when generated. The action can be further
processed using a selection report or explicitly by a user from the corresponding business
document.
10. What is meant by the Changeable in Dialog setting?
RC
If the Changeable in Dialog checkbox is not selected, actions triggered by the action
definition can no longer be manually changed after automatic determination.
11. Identify the processing types defined for /SCMTMS/PRINT_MAN.
FO
The external communication processing type is defined.
a) In the Dialog Structure, choose Processing Types.
b) Note the defined processing type.
LY
12. Locate the form name for processing type external communication for /SCMTMS/
PRINT_MAN.
ON
The form name is /SCMTMS/FP_MANIFEST.
a) On the Display View “Processing Types” Overview screen, select the Document tab.
b) Look in the Form Name field.
13. Identify the form type of the /SCMTMS/FP_MANIFEST form.
PDF-Based Forms.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
439
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
a) Look in the Form Type field.
14. Locate where the archiving for documents can be enabled.
a) Select the Archiving tab.
b) Look in the Archive Mode field.
15. What is the difference between start conditions and schedule conditions?
ME
16. Identify the schedule condition maintained for /SCMTMS/PRINT_MAN.
R
Schedule conditions specify when actions are scheduled or generated for processing.
Start conditions specify when actions are triggered or processed.
The /BOFU/EVAL_SCHEDULE_CONDITION schedule condition is maintained.
US
TO
a) Exit the Define Action Profile and Actions function.
b) On the Display View “PPF: Applications in Customizing”: Overview screen, select /
SCMTMS/TRANSPORTATION.
c) Choose Condition Configuration (Transportable Conditions).
d) In the Scheduling of Actions column, in theAction Profiles folder, choose Actions for
Print Documents Road Freight.
(Technical Names) to view the technical names of the action profiles.
FO
RC
e) Choose
f) In the Actions for Print Documents Road Freight table, select the /SCMTMS/
PRINT_MAN action definition.
g) Open the Schedule Condition tab.
17. Locate where a default printer for this action is defined.
a) Open the Processing Details tab.
b) Open the Printer tab.
18. What is the function of an agent class?
LY
An agent class can be used to capture business logic for processing or generating actions.
19. Identify the agent class associated with the printing TOR objects.
ON
The agent class is /SCMTMS/CL_PPF_SERV_FOR_TOR.
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose Cross-Application Components → Processes and
Tools for Enterprise Applications → Reusable Objects and Functions for BOPF
Environment → PPF Adapter for Output Management → Maintain Output
Management Adapter Settings.
b) In the Output Agent column, locate /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINTING.
c) Look in the Agent Class for BO Node column.
440
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Output
20. Identify the action profiles associated with the /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINTING output agent.
/SCMTMS/TOR_CREATE_FWSD,
/SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_AIR,
/SCMTMS/
TOR_PRINT_ROAD, /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_SEA, /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_AIR_FU and /
SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_PARCEL_ROOT.
b) In the Dialog Structure, choose Assign PPF Profiles.
R
a) Select the entry corresponding to the /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINTING output agent.
ME
21. Identify whether actions relating to the printing of documents for road are enabled.
Yes, actions related to printing of documents for road are enabled.
a) Choose action profile /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD.
US
TO
b) Look at the Enable checkbox.
22. Identify whether it is possible to skip the schedule condition checks for /SCMTMS/
PRINT_MAN.
No. The Can Gnrt. W/o Check (Can Generate Without Check) checkbox is unselected,
therefore it is not possible to skip the schedule condition checks.
RC
a) In the Dialog Structure, choose Action Settings.
b) Select the action /SCMTMS/PRINT_MAN.
c) Choose
(Details) to view the details of the action.
FO
d) Look at the Can Gnrt. W/o Check (Can Generate Without Check) checkbox.
23. Identify whether it is possible to skip the start condition checks for the action /SCMTMS/
PRINT_MAN.
LY
No. The Can Execute Without Condition Check checkbox is unselected, therefore it is not
possible to skip the start condition checks.
a) In the Dialog Structure, choose Processing Type Settings.
ON
b) Look at the Can Execute Without Condition Check checkbox.
24. Identify the output types associated with the freight order type T0##.
/SCMTMS/TOR and /SCMTMS/TOR_PRINT_ROAD are the output types associated with
the freight order type T0##.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
441
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management
→ Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Freight Order
→ Define Freight Order Types.
b) Select the freight order type and choose
(Details) to view the details.
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
c) In the Output Options section, check the maintained output profiles.
442
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring Freight Order Output
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Configure settings to enable the printing of documents in the freight order
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
443
Unit 11
Lesson 2
Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Process different types of discrepancies in SAP TM
FO
RC
Freight Order Discrepancies
US
TO
●
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to process different types of discrepancies in SAP TM.
LY
Figure 133: Freight Order Discrepancies Overview
ON
In the context of transportation management, a discrepancy can be described as a deviation
from what is expected and what is actually received. A discrepancy could be in the quantity of
goods received or it could be damaged packaging or missing documents.
In SAP TM there are two categories of discrepancies, which are Quantity and General.
To have more precise differentiation of discrepancies, subcategories have been defined.
Quantity Discrepancies
444
●
Missing cargo (pieces)
●
Unexpected cargo (pieces)
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
●
More weight or volume than expected
●
Less weight or volume than expected
General Discrepancies
Damaged cargo
●
Dangerous goods
●
Overdimensional cargo
●
High-value cargo
●
Stackable cargo
●
Different equipment or packaging type
●
Bonded goods
●
To be clarified
ME
US
TO
Blocks
R
●
When a discrepancy is reported in an FO, FB, or TU document, the system automatically
blocks the subsequent stages of the transport when reported discrepancies are not yet
resolved.
For freight units, further planning and execution are blocked.
RC
For freight orders, freight bookings, and transportation units, execution and invoicing blocks
are set.
In SAP TM, you can select a checkbox in the freight order, freight booking document, or
transportation unit that prevents the system from setting a block.
FO
If there are unresolved discrepancies in a document, it is not possible to set the freight
execution status to Freight Ready for (Un-) Loading. Moreover, a block on an unresolved
discrepancy implies that no goods receipt may take place; therefore, you cannot set the cargo
receipt status.
Discrepancies Between Planned Quantities and Actual Quantities
LY
Quantities requested by the ordering party to be transported are entered in the forwarding
order. When the actual quantities are reported, there can be discrepancies between it and the
requested quantities. Such deviations are referred to as “quantity discrepancies”. They can
be reported in the freight order (for example, FO for delivery), in the freight booking
document, or in the transportation unit.
ON
When a quantity discrepancy is entered in the FO, FB, or TU, the discrepancy is reflected in
the FU as well automatically. In SAP TM, you can define a tolerance range for reported
quantity discrepancies.
You can enter the following tolerance limits in percent:
●
●
Lower tolerance - This limit is used if the actual quantity is less than the planned quantity
Upper tolerance - This limit is used if the actual quantity is greater than the planned
quantity
If the reported quantity discrepancy is within this predefined tolerance range, the system
does not set any blocks.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
445
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
US
TO
ME
R
For example, the tolerance range has an upper and lower tolerance limit of 10%. If the
expected quantity is 40 boxes and the actual quantity is between 36 to 44 boxes, no block set
by the system. However if the actual quantity is <36 or >44 then a block is set.
Figure 134: Quantity Discrepancies and Tolerance Ranges
ON
LY
FO
RC
General Discrepancies
Figure 135: General Discrepancies
446
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
Not all discrepancies in shipments are related to quantities.
For example, you can enter discrepancies in the following situations:
●
Documents are missing for an item
●
There is a dangerous goods item not designated as such
●
Packaging of an item is damaged
Discrepancy type
●
Discrepancy date
●
Notes (optional)
●
Attachments (optional)
US
TO
●
ME
You enter a discrepancy by making entries including the following:
R
You enter discrepancies on the Discrepancies tab of the individual freight order item or freight
booking item.
LY
FO
RC
Prerequisites to Discrepancy Handling
ON
Figure 136: Prerequisites / Customizing
Before you can handle any discrepancies in SAP TM, you define the discrepancy types in
Customizing.
In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP Transportation
Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Define
Discrepancy Profile.
In this Customizing activity, you can define discrepancy types and associate them with
predefined events and discrepancy subcategories. Further, among the discrepancy types
associated with the same event, you must select one discrepancy type as the default
discrepancy type. You can also define lower or upper discrepancy tolerances.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
447
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
You can define discrepancy profiles. If you do so, you can assign discrepancy types with
different stop categories to them. You can assign discrepancy profiles to freight order types,
freight booking types, and transportation unit types.
Methods of Entering Discrepancies
The following options are available when reporting discrepancies:
●
R
●
Report other discrepancies in Items tab of FO, FB, or TU and enter detailed information in
the Discrepancies tab of the item details.
Add any necessary attachments to a reported discrepancy within the Attachments column
on the Discrepancies tab of the item details.
ME
●
Report quantity discrepancies in Items tab of FO, FB, or TU and actual values in the
Quantities tab of the item details.
Add any necessary notes to a reported discrepancy within either the Note or the Notes
column on the Discrepancies tab of the item details.
US
TO
●
Note:
It is possible to do the following:
Report multiple discrepancies for the same item
●
Enter the same discrepancy for several items
●
Remove a discrepancy that has been added by mistake
ON
LY
FO
RC
●
Figure 137: Freight Unit Unassignment
448
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
It is possible to unassign FUs for which discrepancies have been reported. FUs can be
unassigned from a FO, FB, or TU in the FO/FB/TU screen or in the transportation cockpit.
While the discrepancy and the block or blocks still exist on the freight unit level, they are
removed in the FB, FO, or TU. This means that the cargo (without the goods of the unassigned
FU) is can proceed with further processing.
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Status Changes
Figure 138: Status Change
The system automatically copies information related to discrepancies and statuses between
the documents involved.
FO
Discrepancies entered in the freight order are automatically copied to the freight booking and
freight unit.
The resolution of discrepancies in the freight booking also appear in the freight unit and
freight order.
ON
LY
Changes of the Cargo Execution Status in the freight order for delivery are visible in the freight
booking.
Note:
It is not possible to set the cargo execution status to Ready for Unloading as long
as discrepancies are unresolved.
Resolving Discrepancies
During execution, discrepancies can be determined between the actual quantities and the
quantities that have been ordered by the customer. Furthermore, exceptions can occur, such
as missing or damaged cargo. This data can be sent from SAP EWM to SAP TM, and either
copied into the freight order or freight booking automatically, or entered into the freight order
or freight booking manually.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
449
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
The customer service agent or transportation planner must decide with the ordering party
how to proceed with the discrepancies. Depending on this decision, the customer service
agent can adjust the ordered data to the actual data, or can plan the subsequent delivery of
missing cargo.
To support the exception handling process, the following functions of SAP TM have been
added or enhanced:
Discrepancy profile with the option to define discrepancy subcategories
●
Personal object worklist (POWL) for discrepancies
●
Copy of actual data from freight document to ordered data of forwarding order
●
Change of forwarding order data after execution has started
●
Assignment of local freight document items to forwarding orders and freight units
●
Manual freight unit split after execution has started
●
Manual corrections of items, for example, after transfer of data from SAP EWM
ME
US
TO
FO
RC
New Worklist for Discrepancies
R
●
Figure 139: Discrepancy Worklist
LY
Before SAP TM 9.3, it was possible to find Forwarding Orders with discrepancies, but the
result list was based on the document level instead discrepancies level.
With SAP TM 9.3 a central worklist or POWL has been provided to list all discrepancies with
details.
ON
The POWL can be found in the area of Forwarding Order Management. You can display
discrepancies with all relevant data. You can resolve discrepancies directly and access the
related documents such as forwarding orders and freight orders. The POWL includes options
for resolving missing cargo discrepancies with and without keeping the freight units that have
been created automatically by the system. It includes an option to resolve discrepancies with
unexpected cargo and assign the local freight order items to forwarding order and freight unit
items.
The same UI options for resolving discrepancies have also been added to the Discrepancy tab
of the item details (for forwarding orders and freight documents).
450
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
You can resolve discrepancies as follows:
●
●
●
●
If you want to split the freight units for missing cargo and delete the split items, choose
Resolve → Resolve Missing Cargo (Delete FU Item).
If you have received unexpected cargo that does not have an item and is not assigned to a
freight unit in the forwarding order, choose Resolve → Resolve Unexpected Cargo (Assign
FWO Item).
R
●
If you split the freight units for missing cargo and keep the split items but want to remove
them from the freight order, choose Resolve → Resolve Missing Cargo (Retain FU Item).
If you have received unexpected cargo, and this already has an item and is assigned to a
freight unit in the forwarding order, choose Resolve → Resolve Discrepancy.
ME
●
If you want to resolve a discrepancy, choose Resolve.
If you have resolved a discrepancy by mistake and want to undo this, choose Undo
Resolve.
If you have entered a discrepancy by mistake, choose Delete.
US
TO
●
Conditions for Using the Resolve and Undo Resolve Buttons
You can use the actions associated with the Resolve button for specific discrepancy types
only. The following conditions apply:
●
Resolve discrepancy
●
RC
This action is permitted for all discrepancy types, except for discrepancies with the
subcategory Missing Cargo. You cannot execute the Resolve action for this subcategory if
the Quantity Update column in the Customizing activity Define Discrepancy Profile has the
value Split Predecessor Document.
Resolve missing cargo (retain FU item)
FO
You can execute this action for discrepancies with the subcategory Missing Cargo, only if
the Quantity Update column in the Customizing activity Define Discrepancy Profile has the
value Split Predecessor Document.
●
Resolve missing cargo (delete FU item)
LY
You can execute this action for discrepancies with the subcategory Missing Cargo, only if
the Quantity Update column in the Customizing activity Define Discrepancy Profile has the
value Split Predecessor Document.
●
Resolve unexpected cargo (assign FWO item)
You can execute this action only for discrepancies with the subcategory Unexpected
Cargo.
ON
You can use the action associated with the Undo Resolve button for specific discrepancy
types only. The following conditions apply:
●
●
The discrepancy must have the status Resolved.
The discrepancy must not have the subcategory Missing Cargo. If the discrepancy does
have the subcategory Missing Cargo, the action Undo Resolve can be executed only if the
Quantity Update column in the Customizing activity Define Discrepancy Profile does not
have the value Split Predecessor Document.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
451
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Resolving Discrepancies in the Forwarding Order
Figure 140: Resolving Discrepancies in the Forwarding Order
To resolve discrepancies and handle exceptions, corresponding actions have been developed
and added to the POWL. However the actions may be also used in a forwarding order (FWO)
screen.
LY
In a forwarding order, you enter the quantities and attributes requested by the ordering party
for the items to be transported. When the actual quantities are reported, there can be
discrepancies between them and the requested quantities. You can enter these quantity
discrepancies in the freight document, just as you enter other discrepancies, such as
packaging damage or missing documents. These discrepancies are then also displayed in the
forwarding order.
ON
Using the displayed data, you can check discrepancies and, for example, clarify, after
discussion with the ordering party, whether the discrepancies are acceptable. Then, for
further planning, you can set discrepancies to resolved, or block stages of the forwarding
order that were not yet executed.
In addition, you can search for forwarding orders that contain discrepancies. You can also
display discrepancies in your personal object worklist for discrepancies.
452
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Copy Actual Data
Figure 141: Copy Actual Data
FO
You can copy actual data that has been reported by SAP EWM, or entered in the freight
document manually, to the ordered data of the forwarding order. The system displays, in the
details of the forwarding order item, whether discrepancies exist, and whether actual data
differs from ordered data.
LY
You can change most of the ordered data, even if execution has already started (cargo receipt
status is On Hand). However, the changes are then no longer propagated to follow-up
documents, such as freight units and freight orders. If a settlement document already exists,
you must cancel the settlement document first, then change the data, and, finally, create a
new settlement document.
On the item detail screen of the forwarding order UI, you can see whether actual data differs
from ordered data. In the item table you have the option to copy actual quantities and
attributes to the ordered data of a forwarding order item.
ON
A new status in the item details (Item Processing Status) indicates whether actual data has
already been copied to ordered data. Furthermore, it shows whether the item is statistical,
which means that it has no freight units anymore. In this case, the system has deleted the
freight units of the forwarding order item after you have solved a discrepancy and copied
actual data to the ordered data (because the quantity of the item was zero).
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
453
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
454
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 11
Exercise 31
Process a Freight Order with Discrepancies
R
Business Example
ME
A distribution company wants to control what happens when discrepancies are identified in
freight orders and shipments.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
Field
Discrepancy Type
US
TO
1. In Customizing for SAP TM, create a general discrepancy type with the following
information:
Value
D##0
Discrepancy Type Description
GRP## General Discrepancy
Text Type
D0000
Associated Event
Selected
FO
RC
No Block
GEN_DISCRP
Discr. Subcategory
Damaged Cargo
2. Create a quantity discrepancy type with the following data:
Value
Discrepancy Type
D##1
Discrepancy Type Description
GRP## Quantity Discrepancy
Text Type
D0001
Associated Event
REPORT_QUANTITY
Discr. Subcategory
Missing Cargo
Lower Tolerance
10
Upper Tolerance
10
ON
LY
Field
3. Create a Discrepancy Profile with the following data and assign your Discrepancy Types to
the Discrepancy Profile:
Field
Value
Discr. Prf.
DISCPRF##
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
455
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
Value
Discrepancy Profile Description
Discrepancy Profile Group ##
Field
Value
Discr. Type
D##0
Stop Cat. Relevance
Inbound and Outbound Stop
Discr. Type
D##1
Stop Cat. Relevance
Inbound and Outbound Stop
ME
R
Field
4. Assign your discrepancy profile to your freight order type, using the following data:
Value
Freight Order Type
T0##
Discrepancy Profile
5. Create a forwarding order.
Field
US
TO
Field
DISCPRF##
Value
Forwarding Order Type
01– Road
RC
Transportation Mode
T0##
17– Less-Than-Truckload
Movement Type
T2C (TM200–Direct)
Sales Organization
50001426
Ordering Party
EU-CUST-01
FO
Shipping Type
EU-CUST-01
Consignee
EU-CUST-08
Pick-up Date
Next Monday
Delivery Date
One day after pick-up
Item Type
PRD
Product
PRODTM-00
Quantity
20
Quantity Unit of Measurement
CRT
Gross weight
1000
Gross weight UOM
LB
ON
LY
Shipper
456
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
Value
Item Type
PRD
Product
PRODTM-00
Quantity
20
Quantity Unit of Measurement
CRT
Gross weight
1000
Gross weight UOM
LB
ME
6. Create a freight order for your forwarding order.
R
Field
7. There are 20 cartons in the freight order you just created. During loading, the driver
reported that only 19 were loaded. In the freight order, report a discrepancy for 1 carton.
Value
Quantity
US
TO
Field
19
Gross Weight
430kg
RC
8. What date was the quantity discrepancy reported?
FO
9. Is the quantity discrepancy within tolerance limits?
10. Is the freight order blocked?
ON
LY
Note:
You can also see this on the Statuses tab, in the Blocking Information screen
area.
11. Update the actual quantities to 15 cartons. Use the following information:
Field
Value
Quantity
15
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
457
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
Field
Value
Gross Weight
340kg
R
12. Is the quantity discrepancy within tolerance limits?
ME
13. Is there a block on the freight order? Why?
14. Report a general discrepancy for the freight order and enter a reason for the discrepancy.
US
TO
15. Determine if there is a planning block on the freight order. What is the reason for this?
FO
RC
16. Determine whether there is an invoicing block on the freight order.
17. Determine whether there is an execution block on the freight order. What is the reason for
this?
LY
18. Determine the status of the freight unit related Item 10 of the freight order.
ON
19. Identify the reasons for the block on the freight unit.
20. Resolve the discrepancy in the freight order.
21. Is there a block on the freight order?
458
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
22. Determine the status of the freight unit for the Item 10 after the discrepancy has been
resolved
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
459
Unit 11
Solution 31
Process a Freight Order with Discrepancies
R
Business Example
ME
A distribution company wants to control what happens when discrepancies are identified in
freight orders and shipments.
Note that, in this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number assigned to you by your instructor.
Field
Discrepancy Type
US
TO
1. In Customizing for SAP TM, create a general discrepancy type with the following
information:
Value
D##0
Discrepancy Type Description
GRP## General Discrepancy
Text Type
D0000
Associated Event
Selected
FO
RC
No Block
GEN_DISCRP
Discr. Subcategory
Damaged Cargo
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management
→ Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Define Discrepancy
Profile.
b) In the Discrepancy Types dialog box, choose New Entries.
c) Enter the data provided in the table.
LY
d) Press Enter on your keyboard.
e) If a warning message concerning the namespace is displayed, press Enter again.
f) Save the discrepancy type and go back.
ON
2. Create a quantity discrepancy type with the following data:
460
Field
Value
Discrepancy Type
D##1
Discrepancy Type Description
GRP## Quantity Discrepancy
Text Type
D0001
Associated Event
REPORT_QUANTITY
Discr. Subcategory
Missing Cargo
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
Field
Value
Lower Tolerance
10
Upper Tolerance
10
a) In the Change View "Discrepancy Types": Overview screen, choose New Entries.
b) Enter the data provided in the table.
R
c) Press Enter on your keyboard.
ME
d) If a warning message concerning the namespace is displayed, press Enter again.
e) Save the discrepancy type and stay in the function.
3. Create a Discrepancy Profile with the following data and assign your Discrepancy Types to
the Discrepancy Profile:
Value
Discr. Prf.
US
TO
Field
DISCPRF##
Discrepancy Profile Description
Discrepancy Profile Group ##
Field
Value
Discr. Type
Inbound and Outbound Stop
RC
Stop Cat. Relevance
D##0
Discr. Type
D##1
Stop Cat. Relevance
Inbound and Outbound Stop
FO
a) Select Discrepancy Profiles and choose New Entries.
b) Enter the data provided in the first table.
c) Select the line with the new entry and, from the dialog structure, choose Assign
Discrepancy Types to Profile.
LY
d) Choose New Entries and enter the data provided in the second table.
e) Save and leave the customizing activity.
ON
4. Assign your discrepancy profile to your freight order type, using the following data:
Field
Value
Freight Order Type
T0##
Discrepancy Profile
DISCPRF##
a) In the SAP Customizing Implementation Guide (SPRO), choose SAP Transportation
Management → Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Freight
Order → Define Freight Order Type.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
461
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
b) Select Freight Order Type T0## and choose Details.
c) In Execution Settings, enter DISCPRF## as your Discrepancy Profile.
d) Save and leave the customizing activity.
Value
Forwarding Order Type
T0##
Transportation Mode
01– Road
Shipping Type
17– Less-Than-Truckload
Movement Type
T2C (TM200–Direct)
Sales Organization
50001426
Ordering Party
EU-CUST-01
Shipper
EU-CUST-01
Pick-up Date
Delivery Date
Item Type
Product
EU-CUST-08
Next Monday
One day after pick-up
PRD
PRODTM-00
20
FO
RC
Quantity
US
TO
Consignee
ME
Field
R
5. Create a forwarding order.
CRT
Gross weight
1000
Gross weight UOM
LB
Field
Value
Item Type
PRD
Product
PRODTM-00
LY
Quantity Unit of Measurement
20
Quantity Unit of Measurement
CRT
Gross weight
1000
ON
Quantity
Gross weight UOM
LB
a) In NWBC, choose Forwarding Order Management → Forwarding Order → Create
Forwarding Order.
b) Enter the data provided in the first table.
c) Choose Continue.
462
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
d) In the top right of the screen, in the Page field, choose Fast Order Entry (Land).
e) Enter the data provided in the first table.
f) In the Items table, choose Insert → Product.
g) Enter the product information provided in the second table.
h) Choose Save.
6. Create a freight order for your forwarding order.
c) Choose Freight Document → Create.
ME
b) On the Actual Route tab, select the main stage.
R
a) In the top right of the screen, to display all data, in the Page field, choose Forwarding
Order.
e) Choose Save.
US
TO
d) In the Stages table, in the Document column, note the freight order number (you may
need to scroll to see the Document column).
7. There are 20 cartons in the freight order you just created. During loading, the driver
reported that only 19 were loaded. In the freight order, report a discrepancy for 1 carton.
Field
Value
Quantity
430kg
RC
Gross Weight
19
a) In the forwarding order, on the Stages tab, choose the link in the document column to
open the freight order.
b) Choose the Items tab.
FO
c) Choose Edit.
d) Choose the Product 10 PRODTM-00 row.
e) Choose the Quantities tab.
f) On the Actual Quantities screen area, enter the data provided in the table.
LY
g) Save your changes.
ON
8. What date was the quantity discrepancy reported?
Today’s date.
a) Choose the Product 10 PRODTM-00 row.
b) Open the Discrepancies tab to see the date that the discrepancy was reported.
9. Is the quantity discrepancy within tolerance limits?
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
463
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
Yes.
a) On the Discrepancies tab, locate the Within Tolerance field.
b) The Within Tolerance checkbox is selected, so the discrepancy is within the tolerance
limits.
R
10. Is the freight order blocked?
No.
US
TO
ME
Note:
You can also see this on the Statuses tab, in the Blocking Information screen
area.
a) On the Discrepancies tab, locate the No Block field.
b) The No Block checkbox is selected, so the freight order is not blocked.
11. Update the actual quantities to 15 cartons. Use the following information:
Field
15
FO
RC
Quantity
Value
Gross Weight
340kg
a) In the Actual Quantities screen area, enter the data provided in the table.
12. Is the quantity discrepancy within tolerance limits?
No.
LY
a) On the Discrepancies tab, locate the Within Tolerance field.
b) The Within Tolerance checkbox is selected, so that the discrepancy is not within the
tolerance limits.
ON
13. Is there a block on the freight order? Why?
Yes. The quantity discrepancy type permits a ± 10% deviation from the planned quantity
without a block. The order quantity is 20 pieces, so the permissible deviation is ± 2. Actual
quantities greater than 18 and less than 22 are within the tolerance limits and, therefore,
the document will be blocked.
a) On the Discrepancies tab, locate the No Block field.
464
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
b) The No Block checkbox is selected, so the freight order is blocked.
Note:
You can also see this on the Statuses tab, in the Blocking Information
screen area.
14. Report a general discrepancy for the freight order and enter a reason for the discrepancy.
R
a) Choose the Discrepancies tab.
b) Choose Insert and enter discrepancy type D##0.
d) In the Notes column, choose New.
ME
c) In the Note column, enter a description of the discrepancy: One carton is
damaged.
US
TO
e) In the Notes dialog box, verify that your note is displayed.
f) In the dialog box, choose Insert.
g) In the new row, in the Text Type field, select GRP00 -Header Note.
h) Click in the text box, and enter the following text: Contact shipper for
instructions.
i) To close the dialog box, choose Close.
j) Save the freight order.
RC
15. Determine if there is a planning block on the freight order. What is the reason for this?
FO
No, there is no planning block on the freight order. Discrepancies do not affect the
planning.
a) In the freight order, choose the Statuses tab.
b) Under Blocking Information, look in the Planning Block field.
LY
16. Determine whether there is an invoicing block on the freight order.
ON
Yes, there is an invoicing block on the freight order. Invoicing can only be performed if
there are no discrepancies, or if reported discrepancies have been resolved.
a) In the freight order, on the Statuses tab, check the Invoicing Block field.
17. Determine whether there is an execution block on the freight order. What is the reason for
this?
Yes, there is an execution block on the freight order. Execution can only be performed if
there are no discrepancies, or if reported discrepancies have been resolved.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
465
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
a) In the freight order, on the Statuses tab, select the Execution Block checkbox.
b) To view the reason for the block, choose Details.
18. Determine the status of the freight unit related Item 10 of the freight order.
There is a red light next to the freight unit. The red light means that the freight unit is
blocked.
R
a) In the freight order, choose the Document Flow tab.
19. Identify the reasons for the block on the freight unit.
ME
b) In the Document Hierarchy column, check the status (stop light) icon next to the
freight unit number.
US
TO
There is a planning and execution block, because a discrepancy was reported for the
freight unit item in the freight order. Choose Details to find out more information about the
blocks.
a) To open the freight unit, in the Document Flow tab, choose the freight unit number.
b) In the freight unit, choose the Statuses tab.
20. Resolve the discrepancy in the freight order.
FO
RC
a) Choose the Items tab.
b) Choose the Product 10 PRODTM-00 row.
c) On the Discrepancies tab, select Quantity Discrepancy and choose Resolve → Resolve
Discrepancy.
d) Save your changes.
21. Is there a block on the freight order?
No. The block was removed when the discrepancy was resolved.
LY
a) Choose the Statuses tab.
b) Check the Block status.
ON
22. Determine the status of the freight unit for the Item 10 after the discrepancy has been
resolved
There is no block on the freight unit.
a) In the freight order, choose the Document Flow tab.
b) Check the status of the freight unit.
466
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Freight Order Discrepancies
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Process different types of discrepancies in SAP TM
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
467
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 11: Transportation Execution
468
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 11
Learning Assessment
True
X
False
ME
X
US
TO
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
R
1. Output management automates the output of business documents, such as printouts, in
response to certain business events.
2. When a discrepancy is reported in a freight order document, what blocks are applied to
the freight order?
Choose the correct answers.
A Planning block
X
B Execution block
X
C Invoicing block
X
D Delivery block
RC
X
FO
3. The planned weight of a delivery is 100 kg but the actual weight is 125 kg. A quantity
discrepancy exists. The upper and lower tolerance range is +/-20%. Which of the
following statements about the quantity discrepancy are correct?
Choose the correct answer.
A The actual quantity exceeds the upper tolerance limit by 5%.
X
B The actual quantity exceeds the upper tolerance limit by 10%.
X
C The actual quantity exceeds the lower tolerance limit by 5%.
X
D The actual quantity exceeds the lower tolerance limit by 10%.
X
E The actual quantity is within the tolerance range.
ON
LY
X
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
469
Unit 11
Learning Assessment - Answers
True
X
False
ME
X
US
TO
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
R
1. Output management automates the output of business documents, such as printouts, in
response to certain business events.
2. When a discrepancy is reported in a freight order document, what blocks are applied to
the freight order?
Choose the correct answers.
A Planning block
X
B Execution block
X
C Invoicing block
X
D Delivery block
FO
RC
X
3. The planned weight of a delivery is 100 kg but the actual weight is 125 kg. A quantity
discrepancy exists. The upper and lower tolerance range is +/-20%. Which of the
following statements about the quantity discrepancy are correct?
Choose the correct answer.
A The actual quantity exceeds the upper tolerance limit by 5%.
LY
X
B The actual quantity exceeds the upper tolerance limit by 10%.
X
C The actual quantity exceeds the lower tolerance limit by 5%.
X
D The actual quantity exceeds the lower tolerance limit by 10%.
X
E The actual quantity is within the tolerance range.
ON
X
470
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
UNIT 12
Integration with SAP Extended
Warehouse Management
R
Lesson 1
Lesson 2
Lesson 3
481
US
TO
Integrating SAP EWM Based on Deliveries
472
ME
Integrating SAP EWM based on Shipments
Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
Exercise 32: Receive Goods in Transit Warehouse
RC
UNIT OBJECTIVES
489
497
Execute the freight order-based shipment by using SAP EWM
●
Configure settings to enable warehouse integration based on shipments
●
Directly integrate SAP TM into SAP EWM
●
Configure settings to enable warehouse integration based on deliveries
●
Integrate SAP TM into SAP EWM in a Logistic Service Provider scenario
●
Configure settings to enable transit warehouse integration
ON
LY
FO
●
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
471
Unit 12
Lesson 1
Integrating SAP EWM based on Shipments
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, we examine the integration of SAP Enterprise Resource Planning (SAP ERP)
sales orders and outbound deliveries with SAP transportation planning and SAP Extended
Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) warehouse planning and execution.
Execute the freight order-based shipment by using SAP EWM
●
Configure settings to enable warehouse integration based on shipments
US
TO
●
ON
LY
FO
RC
Integration Scenarios for SAP EWM Based on Shipments
Figure 142: SAPTM-SAP ERP—SAP EWM Integration
The integration of SAP TM into the SAP EWM application enables you to integrate SAP TM
transportation planning with SAP ERP delivery and shipment processing and SAP EWM
warehouse planning and execution.
In a first integration, based on release SAP TM 9.0, SAP TM was integrated into SAP EWM via
SAP ERP. In this scenario, data is not sent directly between SAP TM and SAP EWM.
472
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM based on Shipments
In this process, you plan the transportation in SAP TM based on sales orders created in SAP
ERP. SAP TM proposes and creates deliveries based on dates and quantities according to
transportation planning results, taking into account transportation constraints, such as
resource availability and transportation durations. The SAP TM system sends delivery
proposals to SAP ERP, which creates the deliveries and forwards them to SAP TM and to SAP
EWM for further processing. As a result of the transportation planning in SAP TM, a freight
order is created in SAP TM. The creation of a freight order results in the creation of a
shipment in SAP ERP and of a transportation unit (TU) in SAP EWM.
ME
R
In the warehouse you pick the goods by waves directly into shipping handling units (HUs), for
example, pallets. You then stage the shipping HUs and load them into a truck before posting
the goods issue. As a result of the goods issue, the deliveries are updated in SAP ERP for later
billing and the freight order in SAP TM is updated for a later freight cost settlement.
Main Outbound Integration Scenarios Supported with SAP TM-ERP-EWM Integration
1. Outbound process with order-based transportation planning in SAP TM
US
TO
2. Outbound process with delivery-based transportation planning in SAP TM
3. Outbound process with transportation planning in SAP EWM
ON
LY
FO
RC
4. Deletion of transportation planning
Figure 143: Order Based Transportation Planning in SAP TM
An order-based SAP EWM integration scenario starts with the creation of a sales order. A
sales order in SAP ERP creates an order-based transportation request (OTR) and associated
freight units in SAP TM. When the freight units (FUs) are planned, freight orders are created.
Based on this freight order, outbound deliveries are created in SAP ERP by using the
functionality of delivery proposals.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
473
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
Outbound deliveries are created in SAP ERP. The outbound delivery is sent to SAP EWM as an
outbound delivery request where an outbound delivery order is created. At the same time it is
also sent to SAP TM where a delivery based transportation request (DTR) is created, which
consumes the OTR created earlier. The status of the OTR will change to Fully Consumed. The
FUs are updated and transferred to SAP ERP where a shipment is created. The shipment is
assigned the outbound deliveries. The shipment creates a transportation unit in SAP EWM.
ME
R
Note:
Now, the freight order and the assigned freight units in SAP TM, the SAP ERP
shipment and the assigned outbound deliveries, the transportation unit and the
assigned outbound delivery order in SAP EWM are synchronized.
The delivery is picked, packed, staged, and loaded in SAP EWM. A goods issue is triggered in
SAP EWM. The goods issue and checkout of the transportation unit result in an update in SAP
ERP. The delivery update means that information about the actual weights. quantities, and
packing is sent from SAP EWM to SAP ERP. The DTR is updated in SAP TM.
US
TO
When the shipment status is updated, the freight order status is updated to In Execution. The
freight order is executed in SAP TM. Once the execution is complete, the status of the SAP
ERP shipment is updated.
The final step in the process is charge calculation and settlement in SAP TM.
ON
LY
FO
RC
Delivery Based Transportation Planning in SAP TM
Figure 144: Delivery Based Transportation Planning in SAP TM
The delivery-based transportation planning process starts with a sales order. The sales order
is not sent through transportation management system, but deliveries are created in SAP
474
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM based on Shipments
ERP. The deliveries are sent to both SAP TM and SAP EWM. The remainder of the process is
the same as order-based process.
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Transportation Planning in SAP EWM
Figure 145: Transportation Planning in SAP EWM
FO
In the SAP EWM-driven scenario, also known as SAP EWM-based transportation planning, the
transportation planning starts in SAP ERP system with the creation of the sales order and the
creation of outbound deliveries. The outbound deliveries are sent to SAP EWM, but not to SAP
TM. The SAP EWM system performs transportation planning by creating the transportation
unit by itself and assigning the units to it. A goods issue is triggered once the TU is picked,
packed, staged, and loaded.
ON
LY
After the transportation unit is checked out, the delivery is updated and a shipment created in
SAP ERP. The shipment is sent to SAP TM where a freight order is created enabling SAP TM
to perform charge calculation and settlement.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
475
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
US
TO
ME
R
Deletion of Transportation Planning in SAP EWM
FO
RC
Figure 146: Deletion of Transportation Planning in SAP EWM
Sometimes, a transportation unit (TU) in SAP EWM cannot be executed as planned. In such
circumstances, the TU is deleted, thus deleting the shipment and, depending on how the
freight order is configured in SAP TM, either deleting or canceling the freight order.
ON
LY
The deletion or cancellation of a freight order enables SAP TM to perform the planning and
start the process again. This process is called deletion of transportation planning.
476
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM based on Shipments
US
TO
ME
R
Integration Settings for SAP EWM Based on Shipments
Figure 147: Configure Settings to Enable Integration Between SAP EWM and SAP TM
When goods of several outbound delivery documents are to be transported together,
transportation planning in TM is based on SAP ERP sales orders or deliveries. SAP TM then
creates shipments in SAP ERP, which are sent to SAP EWM. SAP ERP creates the required
handling units, using container as the packaging material.
FO
RC
SAP EWM converts handling units (HUs) in SAP ERP shipments into a vehicle or
transportation unit and a planned shipping and receiving activity in SAP EWM. A
transportation unit is the smallest loadable unit of a vehicle that is used to transport goods.
Transportation units are mapped to handling units (HUs) and packaging materials can be
assigned. By linking the packaging materials to a means of transport, the construction rules
for the vehicles can be specified (for example, order of arrangement of transportation unit,
and so on).
After the warehouse execution, the transport information is sent via SAP ERP to SAP TM,
where transport execution and freight settlement occurs.
LY
For the order-based and delivery-based SAP EWM integration scenarios, SAP TM is
configured to send the relevant packaging information for the creation of handling units in
SAP ERP.
Configuration of SAP TM Tasks
SAP TM must be configured to perform the following tasks:
Assigning packaging materials to container equipment types.
●
Assigning packaging material to vehicles resources.
ON
●
●
Assigning appropriate document creation relevance in the freight order used for shipment
integration.
It is possible to send either the container packaging information or the vehicle resource
information or both.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
477
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
Supported Shipment Relevance in SAP TM
The shipment relevance supported in SAP TM are the following:
●
Shipment creation with HUs for Vehicles Only
Generates a handling unit for an SAP TM vehicle resource in SAP ERP.
●
Shipment creation with HUs for Containers Only
Generates a handling unit for an SAP TM container in SAP ERP.
Shipment creation with HUs for Vehicles and Containers
R
●
ME
Generates a handling for both vehicle resource and container information to SAP ERP.
To Configure Settings to Enable Integration Between SAP EWM and SAP TM
1. View the main customizing settings in the SAP EWM.
US
TO
a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SCM Extended Warehouse Management, choose
Extended Warehouse Management → Goods issue Process → Transportation
Management in EWM → Shipments → Define Shipment Type.
b) Select and open each of the following: PTRQ, FTRQ, and BOLD.
c) Go back.
d) In Customizing settings, choose Shipments → Maintaining Settings for Determining
Shipment Types.
FO
RC
Here, only the determination of BOLD from FTRQ is maintained.
e) In Customizing for SCM Extended Warehouse Management, choose Extended
Warehouse Management → Goods issue Process → Transportation Management in
EWM → Freight Documents → Define Freight Document Type.
There is just one freight document type created, FRD.
f) In Customizing for SCM Extended Warehouse Management, choose Extended
Warehouse Management → Goods issue Process → Transportation Management in
EWM → Freight Documents → Define Maintain Settings for Determining Freight
Document Types.
LY
This setting is only required if you use an external transport planning system in
connection with SAP TM.
2. Activate transportation management in SAP EWM.
ON
a) In Customizing for SCM Extended Warehouse Management, choose Extended
Warehouse Management → Goods issue Process → Transportation Management in
EWM → Basics → Activate Transportation Management.
b) Check the Log Output as List checkbox.
c) Choose Execute.
For most objects the system will note that the objects do not need to be generated or
activated, because they are already in use.
3. Define packaging material types in SAP TM.
478
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM based on Shipments
a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SCM Basis
→ Pack → Handling Units → Define Packaging Material Types.
b) If required, define a new packing material type using the following data:
Value
PkMtT
Enter a unique ID
Description
Packaging Material
PMCat
Means of Transport, Transport Element,
Transport Unit
R
Field
ME
4. Specify a packaging material for container equipment group and equipment type.
a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose
Transportation Management → Master Data → Resources → Define Equipment
Groups and Equipment Types.
US
TO
b) In the Dialog Structure, choose Transportation Unit Groups.
c) Select the equipment group for containers (or maintain if required.)
d) In the Dialog Structure, choose Equipment Type (or create a new equipment type.)
e) Select an equipment type and choose
(Display).
f) In the Packaging Matl. field, specify the appropriate packaging material.
RC
g) Save and exit the function.
5. Specify the packaging material for the vehicle resource.
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, in the Menu, choose Menu → SAP Menu.
FO
b) In the SAP Menu, choose SAP Transportation Management → Transportation
Management → Master Data → Resource → Resource
c) In the Resource field, enter the vehicle resource (for example, TM_TRUCK).
d) Choose
(Display Resources).
(Display<->Change).
LY
e) In the Display Resources: Header Data screen, choose
f) Open the Transportation tab.
g) In the Pack. Material field, enter specify the packaging material.
ON
h) Save and exit the function.
6. Configure a freight order to transfer packaging information to SAP ERP.
a) In SAP TM, in Customizing for SAP Transportation Management, choose SAP
Transportation Management → Transportation Management → Freight order
Management → Freight Order → Define Freight Order Types.
b) Select the freight order type that is to be used for integration with SAP EWM.
c) Choose
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
(Details).
479
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
d) In the Document Creation Relevance field, choose one of the following:
●
●
Shipment Creation with HUs for Vehicles Only – Choose this option to generate a
handling unit for an SAP TM vehicle resource in SAP ERP.
Shipment Creation with HUs for Containers Only – Choose this option to generate a
handling unit for an SAP TM container in SAP ERP.
Shipment Creation with HUs for Vehicles and Containers – Choose this option to
generate a handling unit for both vehicle resource and container information in SAP
ERP.
R
●
ME
e) Save and exit the function.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Execute the freight order-based shipment by using SAP EWM
●
Configure settings to enable warehouse integration based on shipments
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
●
480
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 12
Lesson 2
Integrating SAP EWM Based on Deliveries
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to integrate SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
transportation execution directly into SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM).
Directly integrate SAP TM into SAP EWM
●
Configure settings to enable warehouse integration based on deliveries
US
TO
●
LY
FO
RC
Integration Scenarios for Direct Integration
ON
Figure 148: History of TM-EWM Integration
Since release 9.1, a direct integration between SAP TM and SAP EWM is available, and SAP
ERP shipments are no longer required for integration. Communication is now carried out
between SAP TM and SAP EWM directly, via services.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
481
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
US
TO
ME
R
Process Flow in System Landscape Outbound Process
Figure 149: Process Flow in System Landscape Outbound Process
This system setup enables end-to-end integrated transportation planning, warehouse
execution, and freight settlement by way of a direct interface between SAP TM and SAP EWM.
FO
RC
SAP TM and SAP EWM are part of the supply chain execution platform. Customer orders and
delivery orders are generated in SAP ERP. The transportation planning occurs in the SAP TM.
The result of the planning is a freight order. This freight order is transferred to SAP EWM
directly.
SAP EWM is responsible for operations such as picking, packing, and staging from the
warehouse. The goods are loaded onto the truck. Once loading is complete, the transport is
ready for execution and sent back to SAP TM. In SAP TM, the execution is processed. After
successful execution, the freight order is settled in SAP TM.
Integrate Best-in-Class Applications
ON
LY
The SAP EWM-SAP TM integration allows a tight integration of master data and Customizing
between two systems. The communication occurs by way of the exchange infrastructure (XI).
With the update to 9.1, the views for Customizing have not changed, so administrators can
still use the same screens. Existing integration features of the release 9.0. are still available in
SAP TM 9.1.
482
Note:
Besides freight orders, direct integration with SAP EWM is also supported for
freight bookings and transportation units.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
US
TO
ME
R
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM Based on Deliveries
Figure 150: Integrate Best-in-Class Applications
FO
RC
When you plan to send goods from several outbound delivery documents with the same
transport, transportation planning in SAP TM is based on SAP ERP sales orders or deliveries.
SAP TM sends the transportation planning results to SAP EWM. The information from SAP
TM is mapped into corresponding TU or vehicle activities. Building rules are not used in SAP
EWM.
After the warehouse execution, the transport information is communicated from SAP EWM to
SAP TM to carry out transport execution and freight settlement in SAP TM. The
communication back to SAP TM is triggered on goods issue of the TU, and contains
information about what is loaded on the TUs that are posted goods issue.
ON
LY
Note:
Delivery-based outbound transportation planning in SAP TM is also supported for
outbound deliveries created in SAP EWM (DirODO). SAP EWM Customizing
enables the setting of a TM-relevant transportation planning types and therefore
the assignment of such deliveries to TUs created from SAP TM.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
483
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Main Process Steps of Order-Based Outbound Transportation Planning
Figure 151: Outbound Process
The main process steps of order-cased outbound transportation planning are as follows:
1. SAP TM receives sales orders or deliveries from SAP ERP and creates corresponding
transportation requirements and freight units.
2. Based on transportation requirements, transportation is planned, freight orders are
created in SAP TM.
LY
3. When transportation planning is based on sales orders, SAP TM creates deliveries in SAP
ERP.
4. SAP ERP distributes outbound deliveries to SAP EWM and SAP EWM generates
corresponding warehouse requests of the type outbound delivery order automatically.
ON
5. Based on the freight order information, a message is sent from SAP TM to SAP EWM
directly, where a vehicle or a TU and a planned shipping and receiving activity is created
automatically, and the outbound delivery orders are assigned to the TU activity.
6. Perform the warehouse activities related to the outbound delivery orders such as picking,
packing, staging, and loading the goods. Note that all warehouse activities except loading
can be performed before arrival of the TU to the door.
7. Execute the action Arrival at Checkpoint for the vehicle or the TU. The system changes the
status of the shipping and receiving activity automatically from Planned to Active.
8. Assign a door to the vehicle or the TU.
484
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM Based on Deliveries
9. If yard management is active, move the vehicle or the TU from the yard to the assigned
door. If yard management is not active, execute the action Arrival at Door for the TU.
10. Perform the warehouse activities such as loading the goods, posting the goods issue, and
printing the transportation documents.
R
11. With the goods issue posting in SAP EWM, the delivery information is transferred to SAP
ERP, where the deliveries are updated automatically with the execution data. The
information is forwarded from SAP ERP to SAP TM, where the corresponding deliverybased transportation requirement (DTR) is updated automatically.
ME
12. With the goods issue posting in SAP EWM, the transport-relevant information is sent from
SAP EWM to SAP TM automatically, where the freight order is updated with the execution
and status data (for example, the stop of the freight order is set to Departed; loaded items
are set to Loaded).
US
TO
13. If yard management is active, move the vehicle or the TU from the door to the yard. If yard
management is not active, execute the action Departure from Door for the vehicle or the
TU.
14. Execute the action Departure from Checkpoint for the vehicle or the TU. SAP EWM
automatically changes the status of the shipping and receiving activity from Active to
Completed.
15. Set the execution status of the SAP TM freight order to Completed if this was not set
automatically in the previous step.
16. Carry out the freight settlement In SAP TM. The freight settlement document in SAP TM is
the basis for the invoice verification and settlement in SAP ERP.
RC
Inbound Process
In delivery-based planning, the deliveries are already created in SAP ERP based on the sales
orders.
ON
LY
FO
The communication between SAP TM and SAP EWM is the same for delivery-based planning
as for order-based transportation planning.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
485
Figure 152: Inbound Process
US
TO
ME
R
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
FO
RC
As in the delivery-based outbound transportation planning, a transport planner plans inbound
deliveries in SAP TM and sends a message for warehouse execution to SAP EWM. The
creation of TUs or Vehicles with their assignments to the inbound deliveries is also automatic.
The unloading of the transportation unit should be sent from SAP EWM to SAP TM to update
the freight order. This communication step is new compared to release 9.0.
SAP EWM and SAP TM Integration Settings
SAP TM must be configured to perform the following tasks:
Assign packaging materials to container equipment types.
●
Assign packaging material to vehicles resources.
●
Assign appropriate document creation relevance in the freight order type.
LY
●
ON
Set the relevance to Transportation Activity Creation in SAP EWM.
To Configure Settings in SAP TM
1. Define a packaging material type in SAP TM.
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management →
Transportation Management → SCM Basis → Pack → Handling Units → Define
Packaging Material Types.
b) Create an entry with Packaging Material Category A (Means of Transport).
2. Define a means of transport in SAP TM.
486
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM Based on Deliveries
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management →
Transportation Management → Master Data → Resources → Define Means of
Transport.
b) Create an entry with the transportation mode Road.
c) Select the Multiresource checkbox.
3. Define vehicle resources in SAP TM.
R
a) In NWBC, choose Master Data → Resources → Define Resources.
b) Choose Create Resources.
4. Define package type codes in SAP TM.
ME
c) On the Vehicle tab, enter the resource data including the means of transport that you
created in Step 2.
b) Create an entry.
US
TO
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management → Forwarding
Order Management → Define Package Type Codes.
5. Define equipment groups and equipment types in SAP TM.
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management →
Transportation Management → Master Data → Resources → Define Equipment
Groups and Equipment Types.
b) In the Dialog Structure screen area, choose Transportation Unit Groups.
RC
c) Select the equipment group CN with the description Container and the resource class
Container.
d) In the Dialog Structure screen area, choose Transportation Mode Assignment.
e) Select transportation mode category 1, Road.
FO
f) In the Dialog Structure screen area, choose Transportation Unit Type and create a new
entry.
6. Define freight order types for SAP EWM integration.
LY
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management →
Transportation Management → Freight Order Management → Freight Order → Define
Freight Order Types.
b) Create a freight order type.
ON
c) In the Additional Settings screen area, in the Document Creation Relevance field, enter
E (Transportation Activity Creation in SAP EWM).
d) In the Output Options screen area, in the Output Profile field, enter /SCMTMS/TOR.
To Configure Settings in SAP EWM
1. Check the packaging material type in SAP EWM.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
487
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SCM Extended Warehouse Management →
Extended Warehouse Management → Cross-Process Settings → Handling Units →
Basics → Define Packaging Material Types.
b) Check that an entry corresponding to the packaging material type in SAP TM exists.
2. Configure the means of transport in SAP EWM.
a) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SAP Transportation Management → SCM
Basis → Master Data → Transportation Lane → Maintain Means of Transport.
R
b) Check that an entry corresponding to the means of transport in SAP TM exists.
ME
c) In Customizing for SAP TM, choose SCM Extended Warehouse Management →
Extended Warehouse Management → Cross-Process Settings → Shipping and
Receiving → General Settings → Define Control Parameters for Forming Vehicles /
Transportation Units.
US
TO
d) Check that entries exist for TU (Transportation Unit) with action profile /SCWM/TU
and for VEH (Vehicle) with action profile /SCWM/VEH.
3. Define the link between packaging material and MTR in SAP EWM.
a) In SAP TM, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose SAP Extended Warehouse
Management → Extended Warehouse Management → Settings → Shipping and
Receiving → Link Between Packaging Material (TU) and Means of Transport.
b) Check that an entry exists that links the means of transport to the packaging material.
FO
RC
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Directly integrate SAP TM into SAP EWM
●
Configure settings to enable warehouse integration based on deliveries
ON
LY
●
488
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 12
Lesson 3
Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
ME
R
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to integrate SAP TM into SAP EWM in a Logistic Service Provider
scenario. You also learn how to configure settings to enable transit warehouse integration.
Integrate SAP TM into SAP EWM in a Logistic Service Provider scenario
●
Configure settings to enable transit warehouse integration
LY
FO
RC
Transit Warehousing
US
TO
●
Figure 153: Direct SAP TM-SAP EWM Integration for Logistic Service Providers
ON
With release 9.3, the integration of SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) and SAP
Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) has been further enhanced, and the
integration is now possible without an SAP ERP system. While with 9.1 integration was
achieved directly between SAP TM and SAP EWM, the integration was still based on SAP ERP
deliveries. This scenario, therefore, supported only shippers that use SAP ERP logistics
integration in SAP TM.
Transit Warehousing now supports direct SAP TM – SAP EWM integration, without
predecessor documents in SAP ERP. Instead, the process can be based on forwarding orders
(FWOs) and, therefore, supports Logistic Service Providers. You perform transportation
planning in SAP TM, and then send your freight documents and transportation units to SAP
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
489
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
EWM. In SAP EWM, you then execute the warehouse tasks, such as picking, packing, staging,
and loading or unloading. You execute the settlement in SAP TM.
US
TO
ME
R
Integrated Planning and Execution
Figure 154: Integrated Planning and Execution
FO
RC
Transit Warehousing enables a seamless integration of the planned (system-based) flow of
goods in SAP TM and the physical (system-based) flow of goods in SAP EWM across the
entire transportation chain.
By integrating the two systems, you gain transparency on warehouse data in SAP TM, for
example, whether a truck has been loaded or unloaded in SAP EWM, and whether
discrepancies exist, for example, quantity discrepancies.
In this process, you can temporarily store the cargo in transit warehouses, regional hubs,
gateways (air freight) or container freight stations (ocean freight) until it is shipped to the
next location. You can also organize the cargo across the entire transportation chain and gain
transparency with regard to the specific warehouse data. The process of handling cargo at
one location can be repeated at several locations.
ON
LY
In SAP EWM, processing is based on business documents that are created via the loading and
unloading instructions from SAP TM. In addition, the warehouse layout is configured in
accordance with the requirements of transit warehousing. For example, special warehouse
types are available and a product master is no longer required. The handling of the cargo is
carried out on package level instead of product level.
490
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
US
TO
ME
R
Process and Document Overview
RC
Figure 155: Process and Document Overview
In this process example shown in the figure, Process and Document Overview, there are
several FWOs from different shippers to different consignees.
ON
LY
FO
The ocean or air main leg is covered by a freight booking (FB). The pickup, drayage, and
delivery legs are covered by separate freight orders (FOs). In between, goods are shipped
through a transit warehouse, gateway, or container freight station (CFS), where they are
unloaded from the vehicle resource and loaded to the next vehicle resource.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
491
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
Figure 156: Integrated Process
US
TO
ME
R
Integrated Process
FO
RC
The example process shown in the figure, Integrated Process, is supported by integrating SAP
TM with SAP EWM using the transit warehousing scenario.
The first relevant integration point is the unloading of goods at the transit warehouse TW
Tokyo after the pick-up stage. The pick-up location in Tokyo is managed by the shipper. At the
same transit warehouse TW Tokyo, the goods are loaded onto the next truck for the feeding
pre-carriage leg. Both the inbound (unloading) and the outbound (loading) process are
supported.
In the following stages of the transportation chain, further transit warehouses and gateways
are passed through in the same manner.
ON
LY
The last integration point is the loading of goods at TW San Diego for the delivery leg. The
delivery location in Tucson is managed by the consignee.
492
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
RC
Figure 157: Process Flow
US
TO
ME
R
Process Flow
In an inbound scenario, the processes Receive from shipper, Receive from other transit
warehouse and Receive from airport/seaport (drayage) are supported.
The customer service agent creates a forwarding order in SAP TM.
FO
The transportation planner creates an actual route manually or has the system determine this
route. The actual route contains one or more locations that are relevant for transit
warehousing. A location is relevant for transit warehousing if you have entered a warehouse
number and a logical system (SAP EWM system) in the location master data.
ON
LY
From the forwarding order, the transportation planner creates a freight order for picking up
the goods at the shipper and transporting them to the transit warehouse. Afterwards, the
transportation planner sets the execution status of the freight order to Ready for
Transportation Execution, which means that the transportation activities can start. Finally, the
transportation planner sets the cargo execution status of the freight order for the transit
warehouse to Cargo Ready for Unloading. The system sends an unloading instruction to SAP
EWM.
On receipt of the message, SAP EWM generates a transportation unit and the corresponding
handling units and an inbound delivery.
On arrival of the truck on the yard, the warehouse staff log the arrival of the truck and assign it
to a door. SAP EWM sends a notification to SAP TM. On receiving the message, the freight
document is updated with the information about the arrival of the truck.
The warehouse staff unload the truck and posts goods receipt. When the freight is fully
received, SAP EWM sends an unloading report to SAP TM. On receiving the message, the
freight order and the freight units are updated with the information about the received cargo.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
493
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
In case of exceptions, exception handling is processed.
The SAP EWM transmission status on SAP TM freight documents provides information about
the status of the message exchange.
In SAP EWM, new UIs for inbound handling were implemented, for Freight Order Inbound,
Unloading Preparation, and Stock List. These new UIs display SAP EWM information for the
underlying SAP TM freight documents. It is possible to navigate directly to the SAP TM
documents.
R
In addition, new RF-transactions were implemented for receiving and putaway.
Process Flow in Outbound Scenario
ME
In an outbound scenario, the processes Deliver to consignee, Send to other transit warehouse
and Send to airport/seaport (drayage) are supported.
US
TO
In SAP TM, a forwarding order is created and planned as described in the inbound scenario.
Afterwards, an unloading list is created based on a freight document. The transportation
planner sets the execution status of the freight document to Ready for execution, that is, the
transportation activities can begin. The transportation planner sets the cargo execution
status of the freight document to the transit warehouse on cargo ready for loading. The
system sends a loading instruction to SAP EWM.
On receipt of the message, SAP EWM generates a transportation unit and an outbound
delivery order and assigns the corresponding handling units to the outbound delivery order.
On arrival of the truck on the yard, the warehouse staff log the arrival of the truck and assign it
to a door. SAP EWM sends a notification to SAP TM. On receiving the message, the freight
document is updated with the information about the arrival of the truck.
FO
RC
The warehouse staff take the handling units to the staging area.
The warehouse staff load the truck. SAP EWM sends a loading report to SAP TM. On receiving
the message, the freight order and the freight units are updated with the information about
the loaded cargo.
The warehouse staff log the departure of the truck and post goods issue. SAP EWM sends
another message to SAP TM. On receiving the message, the freight order is updated in SAP
TM.
In case of exceptions, exception handling is processed.
The SAP EWM transmission status on SAP TM freight documents provides information about
the status of the message exchange.
LY
In SAP EWM, new UIs for outbound handling were implemented, for Freight Order Outbound
and Loading Preparation. These new UIs display SAP EWM information for the underlying SAP
TM freight documents. It is possible to navigate directly to the SAP TM documents.
ON
In addition, new RF-transactions for were implemented for packing and loading.
494
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
US
TO
ME
R
Integration Highlights
Figure 158: Integration Highlights
The direct integration of SAP TM into SAP EWM was enhanced with many features, which
enhance the existing integration scenario for shippers. Some of the new features are as
follows:
RC
Multi-Document Handling
Transit warehousing supports planning and execution with trailers. The data that is
returned from SAP EWM is reported back to all the related business documents across
multiple levels, that is, not only to the freight order but also to one or more trailer units
and freight units.
FO
Truck & Trailer
Transit warehousing supports planning and execution with trailers. The data that is
returned from SAP EWM is reported back to all the related business documents across
multiple levels, that is, not only to the freight order but also to one or more trailer units
and freight units.
LY
Prerequisites for Truck & Trailer
ON
In the resource master data you have defined an active vehicle resource for your truck
and a passive vehicle resource for your trailer.
You have maintained the necessary settings in the customizing for your transportation
unit type.
The trailer must have been coupled to the truck before the execution of warehouse tasks.
Multiple (Delta) Updates
As a new feature, it is now also possible to transfer multiple updates. It is possible to
receive a new (delta) Loading/Unloading Report in SAP TM from SAP EWM. The
Loading/Unloading Report contains only new or updated information of the already
loaded or unloaded handling units.
Enhanced Discrepancy Handling
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
495
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
It is possible to react to discrepancies reported from SAP EWM with different actions,
which are supported from a POWL.
Support of late FU Splits (in Execution)
It is possible to react to warehouse confirmations with FU splits, even when execution has
already started.
Backward Propagation
Support of SAP EWM Handling Units across Freight Units
R
Confirmation data from SAP EWM can be propagated backwards to predecessor
documents.
ME
It is possible to process SAP EWM handling units that include items of several freight
units (Cross FU-Handling).
Cross-System Document Flow
US
TO
The document flow of the freight order, freight booking, or trailer unit was enhanced with
SAP EWM entries. It is possible to navigate directly to the corresponding SAP EWM
transaction from the SAP TM document flow.
Search Documents by Handling Unit ID
ON
LY
FO
RC
It is possible to search for freight documents using the SAP EWM HU ID.
496
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 12
Exercise 32
Receive Goods in Transit Warehouse
R
Business Example
ME
A freight forwarder wants to plan orders for international transport via air and is responsible
for the entire transportation chain.
In the exercise, you plan the first stage of the transport (pick-up from customer) in SAP TM
and integrate into SAP EWM to receive the goods in the first transit warehouse.
Create a Forwarding Order
US
TO
1. In SAP NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC), create a forwarding order using the data
provided in the following tables. Use the forwarding order type AF01.
On the General Data tab, enter the following data:
Field
Value
Sales Organization
Incoterm
EXW
RC
Incoterm Location
OAF-FWH-05 (FH Tokyo)
Movement Type
DD
Use the following data for the new package:
Field
AF03
Package Type
PAL
Quantity
3
Quantity UoM
EA
FO
Item Type
LY
ON
Value
Gross Weight
800
Gross Weight UoM
kg
Gross Volume
3
Gross Volume UoM
M3
Net Weight
680
Net Weight UoM
kg
On the Package Details tab, enter the following data:
Field
Value
Item Description
Clothing
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
497
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
Value
Length
1,5
Width
2
Height
1
Unit of Measure
M
Goods Value
4.050.000 JPY
R
Field
Value
Ordering Party
OAF-CU-01
Shipper
OAF-CU-01
Consignee
OAF-CO-01
Collect Agreement Party
Import Organization
US
TO
Filed
ME
On the Business Partner tab, enter the following data:
OAF-FWH-21
AF-FWH-20
On the Location and Date/Times tab, enter the following data:
Field
Source Location
OAF-CU-01
OAF-CO-01
FO
RC
Destination Location
Value
Pick-Up Date
<Today> + 1 day
Delivery Date
<Today> + 4 days
2. Write down the number of your forwarding order.
LY
Plan Customer Pick-up
In SAP NWBC, plan the pickup of the goods from the customer.
1. Open your forwarding order in the Transportation Cockpit, using the following settings:
Value
Planning Profile
AF-PLAN-PROF-PRE
Transportation Cockpit Layout
EKT 93 TH
ON
Field
2. Apply the default route to your freight unit.
3. Create a freight order for the first stage using Create Freight Document.
4. Save and write down the number of your freight order.
Send Unloading Instructions to SAP EWM
498
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
1. Open your freight order and review the items.
2. Review the Execution Status, the Logistical Execution Status, and the Transmission-toEWM Status.
3. Record that your freight order is ready for transportation execution. Review the status
changes.
4. Record the departure of your freight order from the customer pick-up location and save.
Review the status changes.
7. Review the document flow of your freight order.
ME
6. Review the new status of your freight order.
R
5. Record that the cargo of your freight order is ready for unloading at the first transit
warehouse and save. Review the status changes.
8. Make sure that the freight order is displayed in display mode.
US
TO
Inbound Processing in SAP EWM (Receiving at Warehouse)
The truck arrives at the warehouse. The arrival needs to be registered, then the truck is
moved to a door, and the HUs are received.
1. Review the SAP EWM freight order, the TU, and the HUs that were created in SAP EWM.
RC
2. How many TUs were created? What are their IDs?
FO
3. How many HUs were created? What are their IDs?
4. Record the arrival of the truck at the checkpoint.
5. Review the status changes on your freight order in SAP TM.
6. In SAP EWM, record the arrival of the truck at the door, using door DO##.
LY
7. Record the receiving of the HUs.
8. Review the status changes on your freight order in SAP TM.
9. Review the items of your SAP TM freight order.
ON
10. In SAP EWM, record the departure of the truck from the checkpoint.
11. Review the events on your SAP TM freight order.
Monitor Handling Units
1. In SAP EWM, monitor the HUs for your forwarding order using the Handling-Unit Stock
List.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
499
Unit 12
Solution 32
Receive Goods in Transit Warehouse
R
Business Example
ME
A freight forwarder wants to plan orders for international transport via air and is responsible
for the entire transportation chain.
In the exercise, you plan the first stage of the transport (pick-up from customer) in SAP TM
and integrate into SAP EWM to receive the goods in the first transit warehouse.
Create a Forwarding Order
US
TO
1. In SAP NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC), create a forwarding order using the data
provided in the following tables. Use the forwarding order type AF01.
On the General Data tab, enter the following data:
Field
Sales Organization
Incoterm
OAF-FWH-05 (FH Tokyo)
EXW
FO
RC
Incoterm Location
Value
Movement Type
DD
Use the following data for the new package:
Value
Item Type
AF03
Package Type
PAL
Quantity
3
Quantity UoM
EA
LY
Field
800
Gross Weight UoM
kg
Gross Volume
3
Gross Volume UoM
M3
Net Weight
680
Net Weight UoM
kg
ON
Gross Weight
On the Package Details tab, enter the following data:
500
Field
Value
Item Description
Clothing
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Field
Value
Length
1,5
Width
2
Height
1
Unit of Measure
M
Goods Value
4.050.000 JPY
On the Business Partner tab, enter the following data:
Value
Ordering Party
OAF-CU-01
Shipper
OAF-CU-01
Consignee
OAF-CO-01
Import Organization
US
TO
Collect Agreement Party
ME
Filed
R
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
OAF-FWH-21
AF-FWH-20
On the Location and Date/Times tab, enter the following data:
Field
Value
Source Location
OAF-CO-01
RC
Destination Location
OAF-CU-01
Pick-Up Date
<Today> + 1 day
Delivery Date
<Today> + 4 days
FO
a) In SAP NWBC, choose Forwarding Order Management → Forwarding Order → Create
Forwarding Order.
b) Enter air forwarding order type AF01 and choose Continue.
LY
c) Choose the General Data tab, and enter the data provided in the table for the General
Data tab.
d) In the Items area, insert a new package and enter the data provided in the table for the
new package.
ON
e) Select the item and enter the data provided for the Package Details tab.
f) Choose the Business Partner tab, and enter the data provided in the table for the
Business Partner tab.
g) Choose the Location and Dates/Times tab, and enter the data provided in the table for
the Location and Dates/Times tabs.
h) Choose Save.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
501
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
2. Write down the number of your forwarding order.
Plan Customer Pick-up
In SAP NWBC, plan the pickup of the goods from the customer.
Value
Planning Profile
AF-PLAN-PROF-PRE
Transportation Cockpit Layout
EKT 93 TH
ME
Field
R
1. Open your forwarding order in the Transportation Cockpit, using the following settings:
a) On the Forwarding Order screen, choose Follow-Up → Start Transportation Cockpit.
US
TO
b) If the system takes you directly to the transportation cockpit main screen, choose
Change Profile Selection → Profile Selection Screen.
c) To add a new line to the profile and layout set table, choose New.
d) Enter the data provided in the table.
e) Choose Save.
f) Select the new line and choose Continue.
2. Apply the default route to your freight unit.
FO
RC
a) In the main screen of the transportation cockpit, in the Freight Unit Stages area, select
your freight unit and choose Apply Default Route.
The journey from the customer to the consignee will be broken down into several
transportation stages (only the export stages will be shown in the transportation
cockpit).
3. Create a freight order for the first stage using Create Freight Document.
a) Select the stage from the customer location (OAF-CU-01) and choose Create Freight
Document.
A freight order is created and displayed in the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings area of
the transportation cockpit.
LY
4. Save and write down the number of your freight order.
a) Choose Save.
ON
b) Write down the number of your freight order.
Send Unloading Instructions to SAP EWM
1. Open your freight order and review the items.
a) To open your freight order, choose the ID in the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings area
of the transportation cockpit.
b) Choose the Items tab.
502
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
c) Verify that there is one package item Clothing with a quantity of 3 EA.
2. Review the Execution Status, the Logistical Execution Status, and the Transmission-toEWM Status.
a) Choose the Statuses tab.
The Execution status is Not Started.
The Logistical Execution status is Not Loaded.
The Transmission-to-EWM status is Not Sent.
a) Choose Edit.
ME
R
3. Record that your freight order is ready for transportation execution. Review the status
changes.
b) From the Set Status dropdown list choose Set to Ready for Transportation Execution.
c) Review the status changes.
US
TO
4. Record the departure of your freight order from the customer pick-up location and save.
Review the status changes.
a) From the Set Status dropdown list choose Set to Departed.
b) Review the status changes.
c) Choose Save.
5. Record that the cargo of your freight order is ready for unloading at the first transit
warehouse and save. Review the status changes.
RC
a) From the Set Item Status dropdown list choose Set to Cargo Ready for Unloading.
b) Review the status changes.
c) Choose Save.
The unloading instructions are now sent to SAP EWM.
FO
6. Review the new status of your freight order.
a) Verify that the Execution status has changed to In Execution.
b) Verify that the Logistical Execution status has changed to Cargo Ready for Unloading.
c) Verify that the Transmission-to-EWM status has changed to Sent.
LY
7. Review the document flow of your freight order.
a) Choose the Document Flow tab.
ON
b) Verify that there is a new entry, EWM Freight Order with the same ID as your SAP TM
freight order.
8. Make sure that the freight order is displayed in display mode.
Inbound Processing in SAP EWM (Receiving at Warehouse)
The truck arrives at the warehouse. The arrival needs to be registered, then the truck is
moved to a door, and the HUs are received.
1. Review the SAP EWM freight order, the TU, and the HUs that were created in SAP EWM.
a) In SAP NWBC, choose Extended Warehouse Management → Transit Warehousing
→ Process Freight Orders.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
503
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
b) When asked for a warehouse number, enter JPTY and choose OK.
c) From the active queries, choose Inbound → Freight Orders for Processing.
d) If no freight orders are shown, choose Refresh.
e) Identify your freight order number created previously and click the document number.
The EWM inbound freight order is opened in a new window.
R
f) Review the header data, including the parties, transportation data, dates, statuses, and
progress.
ME
2. How many TUs were created? What are their IDs?
One TU was created. It has the same ID as your freight order.
Three HUs were created.
a) Write down their IDs.
US
TO
3. How many HUs were created? What are their IDs?
4. Record the arrival of the truck at the checkpoint.
a) Choose Arrival at Checkpoint.
FO
RC
b) Verify that the TU status changes to Arrival.
5. Review the status changes on your freight order in SAP TM.
a) Go back to your TM freight order screen and choose Refresh.
b) Verify that the Logistical Execution status has changed to Arrived.
c) Verify that the Transmission-to-EWM status has changed to Partially Received.
6. In SAP EWM, record the arrival of the truck at the door, using door DO##.
a) Go back to your SAP TM freight order screen.
LY
b) On the TUs/TU Containers tab, select the row of the TU and choose Arrival at Door.
c) In the pop-up, select the line with door DO##.
d) Verify that the TU status has changed to At Door.
ON
7. Record the receiving of the HUs.
a) On the HUs/HU Containers tab, select all HU lines and choose Receive HU.
b) Verify that the HU status has changed to Received.
c) Verify that the TU status has changed to Receiving.
d) Verify that the progress on header level changes to 100%.
e) Choose Receiving Completed for the TU.
f) Verify that the TU status has changed to Receiving Completed.
504
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
8. Review the status changes on your freight order in SAP TM.
a) Go back to your SAP TM freight order screen and choose Refresh.
b) Verify that the Logistical Execution status has changed to Unloaded.
c) Verify that the Transmission-to-EWM status has changed to Received.
9. Review the items of your SAP TM freight order.
a) On the Items tab, choose Refresh.
R
b) Verify that, below the package item Clothing, there are now three new package items
with the actual HU IDs.
a) Go back to your SAP EWM freight order screen.
b) Choose Departure from Checkpoint.
ME
10. In SAP EWM, record the departure of the truck from the checkpoint.
US
TO
c) Verify that the TU status has changed to Departure.
11. Review the events on your SAP TM freight order.
a) Go back to your SAP TM freight order screen.
b) On the Execution tab, choose Refresh.
c) Review the reported events.
Monitor Handling Units
RC
1. In SAP EWM, monitor the HUs for your forwarding order using the Handling-Unit Stock
List.
a) In SAP NWBC, navigate to Extended Warehouse Management → Transit
Warehouse → Handling-Unit Stock List.
b) When asked for a warehouse number, enter JPTY and choose OK.
FO
c) For the selection criterion Forwarding Order Number, enter the number of your
forwarding order and choose Search.
ON
LY
d) Review the handling units in the list.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
505
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
US
TO
ME
R
Transit Warehouse Integration Setup
FO
RC
Figure 159: SAP TM Customizing Settings
Define SAP EWM Integration Profile
The SAP EWM integration profile is defined in the customizing activity SAP Transportation
Management → Transportation Management → Integration → Integration with SAP Extended
Warehouse Management → Define EWM Integration Profile. You can define a profile for the
direct integration with SAP EWM or an external warehouse management system.
In the integration profile, you can define the following:
Whether loading and unloading instructions are to be sent manually or automatically.
●
Whether loading and unloading instructions are to be sent once or multiple times.
LY
●
●
Whether related transportation units are to be marked as relevant for loading or unloading
when sending loading and unloading instructions.
The options available for defining the SAP EWM integration profile can be defined as follows:
ON
1) Sending of (Un)Loading Instructions
The sending of loading or unloading instructions defines how loading and unloading
instructions are sent to SAP EWM or an external warehouse management system. The
loading and unloading instructions can either be sent manually or automatically, as
follows:
●
506
Manual sending
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
For manual sending, send the loading and unloading instructions manually by
selecting Send Loading/Unloading Instruction under Follow Up in your freight
document or transportation unit.
●
Automatic sending
For automatic sending, if there is a status change, for example, when the freight order
is set to Cargo Ready for Loading/Unloading, loading and unloading instructions are
sent by the system automatically.
R
Selecting Automatic and Manual Sending of (Un)Loading Instructions allows you to
send loading and unloading instructions either manually or automatically in your
freight document or transportation unit.
2) Delta Handling of (Un)Loading Instructions
ME
●
US
TO
Delta handling defines whether loading and unloading instructions for one warehouse
location are to be sent only once or multiple times. If Send (Un)Loading Instructions Once
and Lock Document is selected, the freight document or transportation unit can no longer
be edited after the loading and unloading instructions have been sent. Editing is only
possible after the notification message from SAP EWM has been received.
Note that, for the delivery-based integration of SAP TM with SAP EWM, the loading and
unloading instructions can only be sent once per warehouse location.
3) Include Related Transp. Units in (Un)Loading Instructions
If a freight document contains assigned transportation units (TUs), there are two
options:
Include Related TUs in (Un)Loading Instructions
RC
●
When the freight document items are sent to SAP EWM as loading or unloading
instructions, the system also marks the freight document items that are related to the
assigned transportation unit as relevant for loading or unloading.
●
Exclude Related TUs from (Un)Loading Instructions
FO
When the freight document items are sent to SAP EWM as loading or unloading
instructions, the system does not mark the freight document items that are related to
the assigned transportation unit as relevant for loading or unloading.
Note that this applies also if you send a transportation unit that contains assigned
transportation units to SAP EWM.
LY
For example, you have created a trailer unit and a freight order and have assigned the trailer
unit to the freight order. Then you have triggered the sending of the loading instruction for the
freight order.
ON
If you select Include Related TUs in (Un)Loading Instructions, the loading instruction for the
items that are related to the trailer unit specifies that those items are relevant for loading.
If you select Exclude Us from (Un)Loading Instructions, the loading instruction for the items
that are related to the trailer unit specifies that those items are not relevant for loading.
Note that, currently SAP EWM integration of TUs is only supported as part of a freight
document; TUs cannot be integrated into SAP EWM separately. Therefore the option Include
Related TUs in (Un)Loading Instructions is the only way to integrate TUs into SAP EWM,
making the option Exclude Related TUs from (Un)Loading Instructions redundant until
standalone integration of TUs into SAP EWM is supported.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
507
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
Define Discrepancy Profile
In this Customizing activity, you can define discrepancy types and associate them with
predefined events and discrepancy subcategories. Furthermore, among the discrepancy
types associated with the same event, you must select one discrepancy type as the default
discrepancy type. You can also define upper or lower discrepancy tolerances.
You can define discrepancy profiles. If you do so, you can assign discrepancy types with
different stop categories to them.
ME
R
In a discrepancy profile, you can assign only one discrepancy type for each discrepancy
subcategory and stop category. You can use the stop category to define different behavior for
inbound and outbound stops for a discrepancy subcategory of a discrepancy profile.
Define Freight Order Types / Freight Booking Types / Transportation Unit Types
US
TO
In the customizing activity SAP Transportation Management → Transportation
Management → Freight Order Management → Freight Order / Freight Booking /
Transportation Unit → Define Freight Order Types / Freight Booking Types / Transportation
Unit Types, the freight document type has to be set up for integration.
The integration comprises the following settings:
1. Assignment of SAP EWM Integration Profile
2. Assignment of Discrepancy Profile
The following applies to the assignment of discrepancy profiles to document types:
If there is no discrepancy profile assigned to the document type and there are no
discrepancy profiles in the system because you have not used them so far
(compatibility mode), the system creates the discrepancies according to the existing
discrepancy types.
FO
RC
●
●
●
If there is no discrepancy profile assigned to the document type and there are
discrepancy profiles in the system, but they do not apply to the current document type,
the system does not create discrepancies for this document type.
If there is a discrepancy profile assigned to the document type, only discrepancies for
the types assigned to the discrepancy profile are created.
3. Assignment of Output Profile
LY
The output profile has to include the messages for transit warehouse integration, for
example, output profile /SCMTMS/TOR.
4. Set Document Creation Relevance
ON
Specifies whether a business document can be created either in SAP ERP or SAP EWM.
This field is used both for integration with SAP ERP and with SAP EWM.
You can specify for your freight orders and trailers (transportation unit type) whether
transportation activities can be created in SAP EWM based on the SAP TM execution
document.
If you have selected the Transportation Activity Creation in SAP EWM option, the system
sends a loading or unloading instruction when you select the Set to Cargo Ready for
Loading or Set to Cargo Ready for Unloading action in the execution document. In SAP
EWM, the system automatically creates transportation activities.
508
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP EWM for Transit Warehousing
If you have not selected the Transportation Activity Creation in SAP EWM option, you have
to trigger the sending of the loading or unloading instruction manually in the execution
document.
Note that, once the loading or unloading instruction is sent, you cannot cancel the
execution document in SAP TM.
RC
US
TO
ME
R
Master Data Setup
Figure 160: Master Data Setup
FO
To transfer electronic data interchange (EDI) messages between SAP TM and SAP EWM, the
target system and the warehouse number in the target system must be known. Therefore the
location master in SAP TM was enhanced with the logical system of the SAP EWM instance
and the warehouse number to determine the respective receiving SAP EWM system when
transferring EDI messages from SAP TM to SAP EWM. A location is only relevant for transit
warehousing if you have specified a warehouse number and a logical system (SAP EWM)
system in the location master.
ON
LY
SAP EWM stores the shipper of an inbound delivery and the consignee of an outbound
delivery as business partners (and not as locations). This means that, for all transports
between freight forwarder locations (hubs or gateways), the sending hubs (for inbound
transports), and the receiving hubs (for outbound transports) must be available as business
partners in SAP EWM. For all freight forwarder locations (hubs or gateways) an organization
with a business partner, which is maintained in the location master, usually exists, which
means that it is possible to distribute these business partners from SAP TM to SAP EWM.
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
509
Unit 12: Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
Integrate SAP TM into SAP EWM in a Logistic Service Provider scenario
●
Configure settings to enable transit warehouse integration
ON
LY
FO
RC
US
TO
ME
R
●
510
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
Unit 12
Learning Assessment
A Staging
X
B Settlement
X
C Transportation planning
X
D Picking
US
TO
X
ME
Choose the correct answers.
R
1. When integrating SAP TM with SAP EWM, which operations are carried out in SAP EWM?
2. SAP TM must be configured to assign packaging materials to container equipment type.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
X
False
ON
LY
FO
RC
X
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
511
Unit 12
Learning Assessment - Answers
Choose the correct answers.
A Staging
X
B Settlement
X
C Transportation planning
X
D Picking
US
TO
X
ME
R
1. When integrating SAP TM with SAP EWM, which operations are carried out in SAP EWM?
2. SAP TM must be configured to assign packaging materials to container equipment type.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
True
X
False
ON
LY
FO
RC
X
512
© Copyright. All rights reserved.